2010 SLK

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 1
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1
SLK
Operator’s Manual
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 2
Symbols YY This continuation symbol marks a

warning or procedure which is
Trademarks: continued on the next page.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Display Text in displays, such as the control
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
system, are printed in the type
RESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler. shown here.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
RLogic 7® is a registered trademark of
Harman International Industries,
Incorporated.
RMicrosoft® is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
RWindows media® is a registered trademark
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 1
Our company and staff congratulate you on

the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
1715842796 É1715842796]ËÍ
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 2
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 3
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 23
Introduction ......................................... 18 Safety and security ............................. 31
Controls in detail ................................. 55
Operation ........................................... 189
Practical hints ................................... 233
Technical data ................................... 291

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 4
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Air volume .......................................... 168

Alarm system
911 Emergency calls ........................ 152 see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) ...... 279
A Alternator
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 48 Messages in the multifunction
Indicator lamp ................................ 257 display ........................................... 249
Messages in the multifunction Alternator (Technical data)
display ........................................... 237 see Vehicle specification
Accessory weight .............................. 217 AMG menu ............................................ 97
Accidents ............................................. 82 Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 305
Air bags ........................................... 33 Antilock Brake System
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 179 see ABS
Emergency calls (Telephone) ......... 152 Anti-theft systems ............................... 51
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps Anti-theft alarm system ................... 51
see Headlamps Immobilizer ...................................... 51
Additives Tow-away alarm ............................... 52
Engine oil ....................................... 303 Aquaplaning
Gasoline ......................................... 304 see Hydroplaning
Address change ................................... 19 Armrest
Advanced Tire Pressure Storage compartment .................... 175
Monitoring System (Advanced Ashtray ............................................... 177
TPMS) ................................................. 201 Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 217
Messages in the multifunction Audio/DVD menu .............................. 100
display ................................... 241, 255 Audio system ..................................... 112
Air bags ................................................ 33 Adjusting volume ........................... 117
Emergency call upon deployment . . 179 Audio and telephone operation ...... 112
Front, driver and passenger ............. 35 Audio AUX mode ............................ 145
Head-thorax ..................................... 36 Bluetooth® settings ....................... 120
Knee bags ........................................ 36 CD mode ........................................ 131
Messages in the multifunction Components .................................. 112
display ........................................... 239 iPod® (media interface) ................. 139
OCS (Occupant Classification Media interface .............................. 139
System) ........................................... 37 MP3 mode ..................................... 131
Passenger front air bag off Operating safety ............................ 112
indicator lamp ................... 29, 37, 263 Radio operation ............................. 121
Safety guidelines ............................. 34 Satellite radio ................................ 125
Air conditioning refrigerant and Switching on and off ...................... 117
lubricant ............................................. 303 System settings ............................. 119
Air distribution .................................. 168 Telephone ...................................... 146
Air pressure USB devices (media interface) ....... 139
see Tire inflation pressure Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 69
Air pressure (tires) ............................ 217 Automatic central locking .......... 59, 108
Air pump (electric) ............................ 280 Automatic climate control
Air recirculation mode ...................... 169 see Climate control system
AIRSCARF neck-level heating ............. 65 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 71
Air vents ............................................. 166 Automatic interior lighting control .... 75
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 5
Index 5
Automatic locking when driving ...... 108 Brake fluid

Automatic shift program .................... 88 Checking level ............................... 197
Automatic transmission ..................... 85 Messages in the multifunction
Automatic shift program .................. 88 display ........................................... 244
Gear range indicator ........................ 88 Brake lamps
Gear ranges ..................................... 88 Cleaning lenses ............................. 229
Gear selector lever ........................... 86 Brake pads
Kickdown ......................................... 87 Messages in the multifunction
Kickdown (manual shift program) .... 92 display ........................................... 243
Manual shift program ....................... 90 Brakes ................................................ 222
One-touch gearshifting .................... 89 High-performance brake system .... 223
Program mode indicator .................. 89 Parking brake ................................... 83
Program mode selector switch Warning lamp ................................. 257
(automatic shift program) ................ 88 Break-in period .................................. 190
Program mode selector switch Bulbs
(manual shift program) .................... 90 see Replacing bulbs
Shifting procedure ........................... 86
Steering wheel gearshift control ...... 89 C
Transmission position indicator ....... 87
Transmission positions .................... 87 CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 21
AUX socket ........................................ 145 California retail buyers and
Axle oils .............................................. 301 lessees, important notice for ............. 19
Calls (phone) .............................. 110, 146
Can holders
B
see Cup holders
Back button ....................................... 116 Capacities and recommended
Backrest fuel/lubricants .................................. 300
see Seats Carpets, cleaning .............................. 231
Backup lamps CD player ............................................ 131
Messages in the multifunction Central locking
display ........................................... 252 Automatic ................................ 59, 108
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 217 Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 59
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 49 SmartKey ......................................... 56
Batteries, SmartKey Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 59
Checking condition .......................... 57 Certification label .............................. 292
Replacing ....................................... 266 Children in the vehicle
Battery, Vehicle ................................. 282 Air bags ........................................... 33
Charging ........................................ 283 Indicator lamp, passenger front
Jump starting ................................. 283 air bag off ........................................ 37
Messages in the multifunction Infant and child restraint systems .... 45
display ........................................... 249 OCS (Occupant Classification
Bead (tire) .......................................... 217 System) ........................................... 37
Beverage holders Safety notes ..................................... 45
see Cup holders Child safety
Bluetooth® settings .......................... 120 see Children in the vehicle
Brake Assist System Chrome-plated exhaust tip,
see BAS cleaning .............................................. 232
Cigarette lighter ................................ 177
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 6
6 Index
Clear button ....................................... 116 Coolant

Climate control Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 305
see Climate control system Capacities ...................................... 301
Climate control system .................... 162 Checking level ............................... 196
Air conditioning ............................. 165 Messages in the multifunction
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 303 display ........................................... 247
Air distribution ............................... 168 Corner-illuminating front fog
Air recirculation mode ................... 169 lamps .................................................... 75
Air vents ........................................ 166 Cruise control .................................... 159
Air volume ..................................... 168 Activating ....................................... 160
Automatic mode ............................ 166 Canceling ....................................... 160
Deactivating system ...................... 165 Changing the set speed ................. 161
Front defroster .............................. 168 Last stored speed .......................... 161
Maximum cooling MAX COOL ........ 169 Lever .............................................. 160
Residual heat and ventilation ......... 169 Messages in the multifunction
Temperature .................................. 166 display ........................................... 241
Clock ...................................... 26, 93, 105 Resume function ............................ 161
Cockpit ................................................. 25 Setting current speed .................... 160
Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 217 Cup holders ........................................ 176
Collapsible tire (spare wheel) .......... 300 Curb weight ....................................... 217
Collapsible wheel chock ................... 234 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 21
COMAND system Customer Relations Department ....... 21
see separate COMAND system
operating instructions D
Combination switch ............................ 73
Dashboard
Control system .................................... 93
see Instrument cluster
Multifunction display ....................... 95
Data recording ..................................... 21
Multifunction steering wheel ............ 94
Date, Setting ...................................... 105
Resetting to factory settings .......... 102
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 72
Control system menus ........................ 96
Switching on or off ......................... 106
AMG ................................................. 97
Deep water
Audio/DVD .................................... 100
see Standing water
Navigation ..................................... 101
Defogging (windshield) ..................... 169
Settings ......................................... 102
Defroster
Standard display .............................. 96
Telephone ...................................... 110 Front (Climate control system) ...... 168
Trip computer ................................ 109 Rear window .................................. 170
Vehicle status message memory ... 101 Delayed shut-off
Control system submenus Exterior lamps ................................ 107
Convenience .................................. 108 Interior lighting .............................. 107
Instrument cluster ......................... 103 Department of Transportation
Lighting .......................................... 105 see DOT
Time/Date ..................................... 105 Difficulties
Vehicle ........................................... 108 While driving .................................... 82
Convenience submenu With starting .................................... 80
Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 108 Digital speedometer ............................ 97
Dimensions (vehicle)
see Vehicle specification
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 7
Index 7
Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 209 E

Displays
Digital speedometer ........................ 97 Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 67, 108
Maintenance service indicator ....... 225 Electrical system
Messages in the multifunction Improper work on or
display ........................................... 236 modifications ................................... 20
Multifunction display ....................... 95 Power outlet .................................. 177
Outside temperature ............... 97, 104 Electrical system (Technical data)
Symbol messages .......................... 243 see Vehicle specification
Text messages ............................... 237 Electronic Stability Program
Trip computer ................................ 109 see ESP®
Vehicle status message memory ... 101 Emergency, in case of
Vehicle system settings ................. 102 First aid kit ..................................... 234
Door control panel .............................. 30 Flat tire .......................................... 273
Doors Hazard warning flasher .................... 74
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 56 Roadside Assistance ................ 19, 180
Messages in the multifunction Towing the vehicle ......................... 285
display ........................................... 245 Emergency calls
Opening from inside ......................... 58 Tele Aid .......................................... 179
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 182 Telephone ...................................... 152
Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 264 Emergency operations
DOT (Department of Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 182
Transportation) .................................. 217 Retractable hardtop ....................... 266
Drinking and driving ......................... 221 Trunk lid, emergency release ........... 60
Driving Emergency Tensioning Device
Abroad ........................................... 224 see ETD
Hydroplaning ................................. 224 Emission control ............................... 225
Instructions ............................. 80, 221 Information label ............................ 293
In winter ........................................ 220 System warranties ........................... 18
Problems ......................................... 82 Engine
Safety systems ................................ 47 Break-in recommendations ............ 190
Systems ......................................... 159 Cleaning ......................................... 228
Through standing water ................. 224 Compartment ................................ 192
Driving and parking Malfunction indicator
Safety notes ..................................... 79 lamp ........................................ 26, 262
Driving off .................................... 81, 224 Messages in the multifunction
Driving safety systems ....................... 47 display ........................................... 247
ABS .................................................. 48 Number .......................................... 293
BAS .................................................. 49 Starting ............................................ 80
ESP® ................................................ 49 Turning off ....................................... 84
ETS .................................................. 50 Engine (Technical data)
Driving systems see Vehicle specification
Cruise control ................................ 159 Engine coolant
Driving tips, automatic see Coolant
transmission ........................................ 87 Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 195
Additives ........................................ 303
Checking level ............................... 193
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 8
8 Index
Consumption ................................. 193 Front air bags

Messages in the multifunction see Air bags
display ........................................... 250 Front lamps
Oil dipstick ..................................... 193 see Headlamps
Recommended engine oils and oil Front seat head restraints
filter ............................................... 302 see Head restraints
ESP® (Electronic Stability Fuel ..................................................... 190
Program) .............................................. 49 Additives ........................................ 304
ETS .................................................. 50 Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 301
Messages in the multifunction Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 221
display ........................................... 237 Fuel consumption statistics ........... 109
Warning lamp ................................. 260 Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 191
ETD (Emergency Tensioning Fuel tank reserve warning
Device) ................................................. 43 lamp ........................................ 26, 261
Safety guidelines ............................. 34 Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 303
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 50 Refueling ........................................ 190
Express operation Requirements ................................ 303
Power windows ................................ 78 Fuel filler flap ..................................... 191
Exterior lamp switch ........................... 71 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ........ 300
Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 68 Fuel tank
Parking position ............................... 69 Capacity ........................................ 301
Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 24 Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 191
Refueling ........................................ 190
F Fuses .................................................. 288
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 42
G
First aid kit ......................................... 234
Flat tire ............................................... 273 Garage door opener .................... 30, 183
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 281 Gasoline
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 277 see Fuel
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 273 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 218
Spare wheel ........................... 273, 300 Gear range ........................................... 88
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 273 Indicator .......................................... 88
Floormats ........................................... 187 Limiting ............................................ 89
Fluids Shifting into optimal ........................ 90
Automatic transmission fluid ......... 301 Gear selector lever .............................. 86
Brake fluid ..................................... 301 Cleaning ......................................... 231
Capacities ...................................... 300 Gearshift pattern ............................. 86
Engine coolant ............................... 301 Lock ........................................... 80, 86
Engine oil ....................................... 301 Shifting procedure ........................... 86
Hydraulic fluid ................................ 302 Transmission position indicator ....... 87
Manual transmission oil ................. 301 Transmission positions .................... 87
Power steering fluid ....................... 301 Gearshift lever ..................................... 84
Washer and headlamp cleaning Gearshift pattern ............................. 84
system ........................................... 302 Generator
Fog lamps ............................................. 73 see Alternator
Messages in the multifunction Global locking/unlocking
display ................................... 252, 254 see Key, SmartKey
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 9
Index 9
Glove box ........................................... 174 I

Gross Axle Weight Rating
see GAWR Identification labels .......................... 292
Gross Vehicle Weight Identification number, vehicle
see GVW (VIN) ................................................... 293
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Ignition ........................................... 61, 80
see GVWR Immobilizer .......................................... 51
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 218 Infant and child restraint systems
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight see Children in the vehicle
Rating) ................................................ 218 Inflation pressure
see Tires, Inflation pressure
Inside door handle ........................ 30, 58
H
Instrument cluster ........................ 26, 92
Halogen headlamps Illumination ...................................... 93
see Headlamps Lamps ............................................ 256
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 231 Multifunction display ....................... 95
Hazard warning flasher ....................... 74 Instrument lighting
Headlamp cleaning system ................ 74 see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Headlamps Instrument panel
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 71 see Instrument cluster
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 71 Instruments and controls
Bi-Xenon .................................. 71, 269 see Cockpit
Cleaning lenses ............................. 229 Interfere with radio reception .......... 141
Cleaning system .............................. 74 Interior lighting ................................... 75
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 72 Delayed shut-off ............................ 107
Delayed shut-off ............................ 107 Emergency lighting .......................... 76
Halogen ......................................... 269 Reading lamps ................................. 75
High-beam flasher ............................ 74 Interior rear view mirror ..................... 68
High-beam headlamps ..................... 74 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 69
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 71 Interior storage spaces
Replacing bulbs ............................. 267 see Storage compartments
Switch .............................................. 71 Intermittent wiping ............................. 76
Headliner, cleaning and care of ....... 231 Rain sensor ...................................... 76
Head restraints .................................... 62 iPod® (media interface) .................... 139
Adjustment ...................................... 62
Head-thorax air bags ........................... 36 J
Heated steering wheel ........................ 67
Height adjustment Jack ..................................................... 235
Seats ............................................... 62 Jump starting ..................................... 283
High-beam flasher ............................... 74
High-beam headlamps ................ 74, 269 K
Indicator lamp .................................. 26 Key, Mechanical
High-performance brake system ..... 223 Loss of ............................................. 58
Hood ................................................... 192 Replacing ......................................... 58
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 245
Horn ...................................................... 25
Hydroplaning ..................................... 224
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 10
10 Index
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 264 Low tire pressure/TPMS

Valet locking .................................... 61 malfunction telltale .................. 26, 262
Key, SmartKey Passenger front air bag
Battery check lamp .......................... 57 off ...................................... 29, 37, 263
Checking batteries ........................... 57 Seat belt telltale ................ 26, 42, 259
Factory setting ................................. 57 SRS .................................... 26, 32, 260
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 57 Turn signals ..................................... 26
Global unlocking Language, selecting .......................... 104
(SmartKey) ....................................... 57 License plate lamps
Locking/unlocking ........................... 56 Messages in the multifunction
Loss of ............................................. 58 display ........................................... 253
Messages in the multifunction Replacing bulbs ............................. 269
display ........................................... 246 Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 230
Remote control ................................ 56 Lighter
Replacing ......................................... 58 see Cigarette lighter
Replacing batteries ........................ 266 Lighting ................................................ 70
Restoring to factory setting ............. 57 Daytime running lamp mode ............ 72
Selective setting .............................. 57 Exterior ............................................ 71
Starter switch positions ................... 61 Interior ............................................. 75
Kickdown ............................................. 87 Limp-home mode ................................. 92
Kickdown (manual shift program) ..... 92 Load index (tires) ...................... 213, 218
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 218 Locator lighting ................................. 106
Knee bags ............................................ 36 Locking the vehicle
Manually ........................................ 265
L SmartKey ......................................... 56
Loss of
Labels
Key .................................................. 58
Certification ................................... 292
Service and Warranty Information
Emission control information ......... 293
booklet .......................................... 292
Tire and Loading Information
Low-beam headlamps ......................... 71
placard ........................................... 205
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 71
Tire inflation pressure .................... 200
Switching on .................................... 71
Lamps, exterior
Lubricants .......................................... 300
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 71
Luggage cover ................................... 173
Front .............................................. 269
Lumbar support ................................... 64
display ........................................... 252
Switching on/off .............................. 71 M
Lamps, indicator and warning Maintenance ........................................ 19
ABS .......................................... 26, 257 Maintenance System
Brakes ..................................... 27, 257 Service indicator display ................ 226
Engine malfunction .................. 26, 262 Service indicator message ............. 225
ESP® ........................................ 26, 260 Service term exceeded .................. 226
Fog lamps ........................................ 73 Manual headlamp mode (Low-
Fuel tank reserve ..................... 26, 261 beam headlamps) ................................ 71
High-beam headlamps ............... 26, 74 Manual shift program ......................... 90
Instrument cluster ................... 26, 256 Manual transmission .......................... 84
Gearshift lever ................................. 84
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 11
Index 11
Maximum engine speed License plate lamps ....................... 253

see Vehicle specification Light sensor ................................... 253
Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 218 Low-beam lamps ............................ 253
Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 218 Parking brake ................................ 244
Maximum permissible tire Parking lamps ................................ 253
inflation pressure .............................. 218 Passenger front air bag .................. 239
Mechanical key Reserve fuel ................................... 251
see Key, Mechanical Retractable hardtop ....................... 246
Media interface ................................. 139 Reverse lamp ................................. 252
Memory function ................................. 70 Side marker lamps ......................... 252
Menus SmartKey ....................................... 246
see Control system menus SRS ................................................ 245
Mirrors .................................................. 68 Tail lamps ...................................... 254
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 69 Tele Aid .......................................... 245
Exterior rear view mirror parking Tire inflation pressure ............ 241, 255
position ............................................ 69 Tire pressure monitor .................... 241
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 68 Tires ...................................... 241, 255
Interior rear view mirror ................... 68 Trunk ............................................. 245
Memory function .............................. 70 Turn signals ................................... 255
Vanity mirror .................................. 176 Washer fluid ................................... 247
MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 303 Multifunction steering wheel
Motor Octane Number Adjustment ...................................... 66
see MON Buttons ............................................ 94
MP3 mode .......................................... 131 Cleaning ......................................... 231
Multifunction display .......................... 95 Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 67, 108
Symbol messages .......................... 243 Gearshift control .............................. 89
Text messages ............................... 237 Heating ............................................ 67
Vehicle status messages ............... 236 Memory function .............................. 70
Multifunction display messages Overview .......................................... 27
ABS ................................................ 237
Advanced TPMS ..................... 241, 255 N
Air bags ......................................... 239 Navigation menu ............................... 101
Alternator ...................................... 249 Navigation system
Battery ........................................... 249 see Separate operating instructions
Brake fluid ..................................... 244 Nets, parcel ....................................... 174
Brake pads ..................................... 243 Night security illumination .............. 107
Check engine ................................. 247 Normal occupant weight .................. 218
Coolant .......................................... 247 Number, vehicle identification
Cruise control ................................ 241
(VIN) ................................................... 293
Doors ............................................. 245
Engine oil ....................................... 250
O
Engine service ............................... 247
ESP® .............................................. 237 Occupant Classification System
Fog lamps .............................. 252, 254 see OCS (Occupant Classification
Gas cap .......................................... 251 System)
High-beam lamps ........................... 253 Occupant distribution ....................... 218
Hood .............................................. 245
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 12
12 Index
Occupant safety Passenger front air bag ...................... 35

Air bags ........................................... 33 Messages in the multifunction
Children and air bags ....................... 33 display ........................................... 239
Children in the vehicle ..................... 45 Passenger front air bag off
Fastening the seat belts ................... 42 indicator lamp ....................... 29, 37, 263
Infant and child restraint systems .... 45 Passenger safety
Introduction ..................................... 32 see Occupant safety
OCS (Occupant Classification Pedals ................................................. 221
System) ........................................... 37 Phone
Passenger front air bag off see Telephone
indicator lamp .......................... 37, 263 Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 230
Seat belts .................................. 34, 40 Power assistance .............................. 222
OCS (Occupant Classification Power outlet ...................................... 177
System) ................................................ 37 Power seats
Self-test ........................................... 39 see Seats
Odometer ............................................. 95 Power washer .................................... 228
Oil, oil level Power windows ................................... 78
see Engine oil Cleaning ......................................... 229
On-board computer Door windows .................................. 78
see Control system Operation ......................................... 78
One-touch gearshifting ....................... 89 Rear side windows ........................... 79
Operating safety .................................. 20 Synchronizing .................................. 79
Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 229 Practical hints ................................... 234
Outside temperature Problems
see Displays While driving .................................... 82
Overhead control panel ...................... 30 With vehicle ..................................... 21
With wipers ...................................... 77
P Product information ............................ 18
Production options weight ............... 218
Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 228
Program mode selector switch
Paintwork code ................................. 293
Automatic shift program .................. 88
Panic alarm .......................................... 47
Manual shift program ....................... 90
Parcel nets ......................................... 174
Proximity key
Parking ................................................. 83
see Key, SmartKey
Parking and standing lamp
PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 218
Replacing bulbs ............................. 269
Parking brake ...................................... 83
R
display ........................................... 244 RACETIMER .......................................... 98
Parking position Radio .................................................. 121
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 69 Satellite radio ................................ 125
Transmission position ...................... 87 Selecting stations .......................... 100
Parts service ...................................... 292 Radio transmitters ............................ 224
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rain sensor
see Passenger front air bag off see Intermittent wiping
indicator lamp Rear axle oil ....................................... 301
Rear fog lamp
see Fog lamps
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 13
Index 13
Rear lamps Satellite radio .................................... 125

see Tail lamps Seat belt force limiter ......................... 43
Rear window defroster ..................... 170 Seat belts ............................................. 40
Recommended tire inflation Children in the vehicle ..................... 45
pressure ..................................... 198, 218 Cleaning ......................................... 231
Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 303 Fastening ......................................... 42
Refueling ............................................ 190 Proper use of ................................... 41
Regular checks .................................. 191 Safety guidelines ............................. 34
Reminder, Seat belt Safety notes ..................................... 40
see Seat belts, Telltale Telltale ..................................... 26, 259
Remote control Seat heating ......................................... 65
see Key, SmartKey Seating capacity ................................ 206
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 182 Seats ..................................................... 62
Replacing Adjustment ...................................... 62
Key .................................................. 58 Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 67
Replacing bulbs ................................. 267 Heating ............................................ 65
Reporting safety defects .................... 21 Memory function .............................. 70
Research Octane Number Selective setting
see RON see Key, SmartKey
Reserve fuel Selector lever
Messages in the multifunction see Gear selector lever
display ........................................... 251 Self-test
Warning lamp ........................... 26, 261 OCS (Occupant Classification
Reset button .................................. 27, 92 System) ........................................... 39
Restraint systems Tele Aid .......................................... 178
see Occupant safety Service
Retractable hardtop .......................... 170 see Maintenance
Locking .......................................... 172 Service, parts .................................... 292
Luggage cover ............................... 173 Service and warranty information ..... 18
Messages in the multifunction Service intervals
display ........................................... 246 see Maintenance System, Service
Operating manually ........................ 266 indicator message
Wind screen ................................... 173 Service life (tires) .............................. 210
Rims ........................................... 218, 297 Settings
Roadside Assistance ................... 19, 180 Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 57
RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 303 Memory function .............................. 70
Roof Menu ............................................. 102
see Retractable hardtop Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 57
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 230 Shelf behind roll bars ........................ 175
Side marker lamps
S Cleaning lenses ............................. 229
Safety display ........................................... 252
Driving safety systems ..................... 47 Sidewall (tires) .................................. 219
Occupant safety ............................... 32 Side windows
Reporting defects ............................ 21 see Power windows
Safety belts
see Seat belts
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 14
14 Index
SmartKey Fuel requirements .......................... 303

see Key, SmartKey Gasoline additives .......................... 304
Snow chains ...................................... 220 Identification labels ....................... 292
Snow tires Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 303
see Winter tires Rims and tires ................................ 297
Spare wheel ....................................... 297 Spare wheel ................................... 300
Mounting ....................................... 277 Vehicle specification SLK 300 ....... 294
Storage location ............................ 235 Vehicle specification SLK 350 ....... 295
Speed settings Vehicle specification SLK 55 AMG . 296
Cruise control ................................ 160 Washer and headlamp cleaning
Resume function ............................ 161 system ................................... 302, 306
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Technical data (dimensions)
Indicator lamp ................... 26, 32, 260 see Vehicle specification
Messages in the multifunction Technical data (electrical system)
display ........................................... 245 see Vehicle specification
Standing water, driving through ...... 224 Technical data (engine)
Starter switch positions see Vehicle specification
SmartKey ......................................... 61 Technical data (weights)
Starting difficulties (engine) .............. 80 see Vehicle specification
Starting the engine ............................. 80 Tele Aid ............................................... 178
Steering column Emergency calls ............................. 179
see Multifunction steering wheel, Information button ......................... 181
Adjustment Initiating an emergency call
Steering wheel manually ........................................ 180
see Multifunction steering wheel Messages in the multifunction
Steering wheel gearshift control ....... 89 display ........................................... 245
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 183 Remote door unlock ...................... 182
Storage compartments ..................... 174 Roadside Assistance button .......... 180
Storing tires ....................................... 210 Search & Send ............................... 182
Sun visors .......................................... 176 SOS button .................................... 180
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 183
T System self-test ............................. 178
Telephone .................................... 27, 146
Tachometer .......................................... 93 Answering/ending a call ................ 110
Overspeed range ............................. 93 Call lists ......................................... 156
Tail lamps Emergency calls “911” .................. 152
Cleaning lenses ............................. 229 Hands-free microphone ................... 30
Messages in the multifunction Making calls ................................... 156
display ........................................... 254 Menu ............................................. 110
Tar stains ........................................... 228 Operation ....................................... 110
Technical data Phone book ........................... 111, 153
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 303 Redialing ........................................ 111
Brake fluid ..................................... 303 Temperature
Capacities fuels, coolants, Interior temperature ...................... 166
lubricants etc. ................................ 300 Outside .................................... 97, 104
Coolant .......................................... 304 Tightening torque
Engine oil additives ........................ 303 Wheels ........................................... 281
Engine oils ..................................... 302 Time setting ....................................... 105
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 15
Index 15
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 219 Temperature .......................... 199, 211
Tire and Loading Information Terminology ................................... 217
placard ............................................... 205 TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 273
Tire and loading terminology ........... 217 Tire Identification Number ............. 219
TIREFIT ............................................... 273 TPMS low tire pressure/
Tire Identification Number malfunction telltale .................. 26, 262
see TIN Traction ................................. 211, 219
Tire inflation pressure Tread ............................................. 219
Checking ........................................ 201 Tread depth ........................... 210, 219
Important notes on ........................ 199 Treadwear ...................................... 211
Label on the inside of fuel filler Treadwear indicators ............. 210, 219
flap ................................................ 200 Vehicle maximum load on .............. 219
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 205 Wear pattern .................................. 212
Tire labeling ....................................... 212 Winter tires ............................ 219, 297
Tire load rating .................................. 218 Tire speed rating ....................... 214, 219
Tire ply composition and material Total load limit ................................... 219
used .................................................... 219 Tow-away alarm .................................. 52
Tire repair kit Towing
see TIREFIT Towing eye bolt .............................. 286
Tires ........................................... 197, 297 Vehicle ........................................... 285
Advanced Tire Pressure Towing eye bolt ................................. 286
Monitoring System (Advanced Traction ...................................... 211, 219
TPMS) ............................................ 201 Transmission
Air pressure ................................... 198 see Automatic transmission or
Care and maintenance ................... 209 Manual transmission
Cleaning ......................................... 210 Transmission fluid level .................... 195
Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 209 Transmission gear selector lever
Important notes on tire inflation see Gear selector lever
pressure ........................................ 199 Transmission positions ....................... 87
Inflation pressure .................. 200, 201 Traveling abroad ............................... 224
Information placard ....................... 205 Tread (tires) ....................................... 219
Inspection ...................................... 209 Tread depth (tires) .................... 210, 219
Labeling ......................................... 212 Treadwear .......................................... 211
Load index ............................. 213, 218 Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 210, 219
Load rating .................................... 218 Trip computer menu ......................... 109
Messages in the multifunction Trip odometer, resetting ..................... 93
display ................................... 241, 255 Trunk
Ply composition and material Closing ............................................. 60
used ............................................... 219 Messages in the multifunction
Problems under-/overinflation ...... 200 display ........................................... 245
Retreads ........................................ 197 Opening ........................................... 60
Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 297 Trunk lid emergency release ............ 60
Rotation ......................................... 212 Unlocking manually ....................... 265
Service life ..................................... 210 Valet locking .................................... 61
Sizes .............................................. 297 Turning off the engine ........................ 84
Snow chains .................................. 220 Turn signals ......................................... 73
Speed rating .......................... 214, 219 Cleaning lenses ............................. 229
Storing ........................................... 210
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 16
16 Index
Indicator lamps ................................ 26 Vehicle status message memory .... 101

Messages in the multifunction Vehicle tool kit .................................. 234
display ........................................... 255 Vehicle washing
see Vehicle care
U Vehicle weights
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards .................................. 210, 219
Units W
Selecting speedometer display Warning sounds
mode ............................................. 104 Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 42
Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 303 Parking brake ................................ 244
Unlocking the vehicle Seat belt telltale ............................ 259
Manually ........................................ 264 Warranty coverage ............................ 292
SmartKey ......................................... 56 Washer and headlamp cleaning
Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 231 system ................................................ 306
USB devices (media interface) ......... 139 Washer fluid
Useful features .................................. 176 Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 247
V Mixing ratio .................................... 306
Refilling .......................................... 196
Valet locking ........................................ 61
Washing the vehicle .......................... 227
Vehicle
Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 212
Battery ........................................... 282
Weights (vehicle)
Care ............................................... 227
Control system ................................ 93
Wheel
Identification Number (VIN) ........... 292
Changing ....................................... 273
Locking/unlocking ........................... 56
Removing ....................................... 278
Lowering (wheel change) ............... 281
Spare ............................................. 273
Modifications and alterations,
Tightening torque ........................... 281
Operating safety .............................. 20
Wheels, sizes ..................................... 297
Towing ........................................... 285
Wheels, Tires and .............................. 197
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 264
Windows
Vehicle dimensions
see Power windows
Windows, cleaning ............................ 229
Vehicle Identification Number
Wind screen ....................................... 173
(VIN) ................................................... 292
Windshield
Vehicle jack
Cleaning wiper blades .................... 229
see Jack
Defogging ...................................... 169
Vehicle lighting .................................... 70
Washer fluid ................................... 306
Vehicle loading
Wipers ............................................. 76
Load limit ....................................... 206
Windshield wipers
Terminology ................................... 217
Replacing wiper blades .................. 271
Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 219
Winter driving
Vehicle specification
Instructions .................................... 220
SLK 300 ......................................... 294
Snow chains .................................. 220
SLK 350 ......................................... 295
Tires ............................................... 219
SLK 55 AMG .................................. 296
Winter tires ................................ 219, 297
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 17
Index 17
Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 232

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 18
18 Introduction
Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 19
Introduction 19
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Control System Warranty Customer Assistance Center
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon One Mercedes Drive
Laws) Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail Maintenance

buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
automobiles
necessary maintenance work which should
Under California law you may be entitled to a be performed at regular intervals.
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
purchase price or lease price, if after a you when you take the vehicle to an
reasonable number of repair attempts authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its service. The service advisor will record each
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service in the booklet for you.
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of Roadside Assistance
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer Program provides factory-trained technical
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
reasonable number of repair attempts is toll-free Roadside Assistance number
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
more of the following occurs: (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
(1) the same substantial defect or will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
malfunction results in a condition that is Customer Assistance Representatives
likely to cause death or serious bodily 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information refer to the
or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (in the USA) or the
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Roadside Assistance section of the Service
writing of the need for its repair, and Warranty Information Booklet (in
(2) the same substantial defect or Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly Change of address or ownership
notified us in writing of the need for its If you change your address, be sure to send
repair, or in the “Change of Address Notice” found in
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of the Service and Warranty Information
repair of the same or different substantial Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
total of more than 30 calendar days. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
Written notification should not be sent to a
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
dealer, it should be addressed to
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 20
20 Introduction
contacting you in a timely manner should the Operating safety

need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all G Warning!
literature with the vehicle to make it available Work improperly carried out on electronic
to the next operator. components and associated software could
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to cause them to cease functioning. Because the
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” vehicle’s electronic components are
found in the Service and Warranty interconnected, any modifications made may
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- produce an undesired effect on other
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the systems. Electronic malfunctions could
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer seriously impair the operating safety of your
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
Operating your vehicle outside the components.
USA or Canada
Other improper work or modifications on the
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign vehicle could also have a negative impact on
countries, please be aware that: the operating safety of the vehicle.
RService facilities or replacement parts may Some safety systems only function while the
not be readily available. engine is running. You should therefore never
RUnleaded
turn off the engine while driving.
gasoline for vehicles with
catalytic converters may not be available; G Warning!
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
catalysts.
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
RGasoline may have a considerably lower impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause Such blows can be caused, for example, by
engine damage. running over an obstacle, road debris or a
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
for delivery in Europe under our European vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
Delivery Program. For details, consult an that damage to your vehicle as occurred:
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to: Rturn on your hazard warning flashers
In the USA: Rslow down carefully
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive distance from the road
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
In Canada: wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
European Delivery Department authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
98 Vanderhoof Avenue qualified maintenance or repair facility for
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 further inspection or repairs.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 21
Introduction 21
Proper use of the vehicle Reporting safety defects

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
For the USA only:
familiar with the following information and
rules: The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Rthe safety precautions in this manual Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
Rtraffic rules and regulations of 1966”.
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
Reporting safety defects
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
vehicle. These warning labels are intended to which could cause a crash or could cause
make you and others aware of various risks. injury or death, you should immediately
Do not remove any of these warning labels inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
unless explicitly instructed to do so by Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
information on the label itself. Removing notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
warning labels may cause you and others to If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
be unaware of certain risks which may result open an investigation, and if it finds that a
in an accident and/or personal injury. safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Problems with your vehicle individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If you should experience a problem with your To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
affect its safe operation, we urge you to (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center www.safercar.gov; or write to:
immediately to have the problem diagnosed Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
and corrected if required. If the matter is not 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss Washington, DC 20590.
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about
management or, if necessary, contact us at motor vehicle safety from
one of the following addresses: www.safercar.gov.
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Vehicle data recording
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Information regarding electronic
recording devices
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department (Including notice pursuant to California Code
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. § 9951)
98 Vanderhoof Avenue Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 22
22 Introduction
This information helps, for example, to

diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
Please check the Tele Aid subscription
service agreement for details regarding the
information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 23
23
Exterior view ....................................... 24

Cockpit ................................................. 25
Instrument cluster .............................. 26
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 27
Center console .................................... 28
Overhead control panel ...................... 30
Door control panel .............................. 30
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 24
24 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Trunk: Cleaning 229
Locking and unlocking 56 D Wipers 76
Opening and closing 59 Wiper blades, replacing 271
Valet locking 61 Wiper blades, cleaning 229
; Rear window defroster 170 E Hood 192
= Fuel filler flap 190 F Front lamps 267
? Doors: G Front towing eye 286
Locking and unlocking 56, H Headlamp cleaning system 74
264
I Tires and wheels 197
A Exterior rear view mirrors 68
Rims and tires 297
B Retractable hardtop 170
J Rear lamps 267
C Windshield:
K Rear towing eye 286
Wiping with washer fluid 77
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 25
Cockpit 25
Cockpit
At a glance
: Steering wheel gearshift G Steering wheel adjustment,
control (automatic manual 66
transmission) 89
H Steering wheel adjustment,
; Multifunction steering 27, electrical 66
wheel 94 Heated steering wheel 67
= Horn I On-board diagnostics
? Instrument cluster 26, (OBD) socket
92 J Hood lock release 192
A Lever for Voice Control K Exterior lamp switch 71
System, see separate
operating instructions L Combination switch:
Turn signals 73
B Overhead control panel 30
Wipers 76
C Sun sensor (automatic High beam 74
climate control)
M Door control panel 30
D Glove box 174
N Cruise control lever 159
E Center console 28
F Starter switch 61
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 26
26 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Multifunction display with: 7 Seat belt telltale 42,
259
Trip odometer 109
K High-beam headlamp
Main odometer 95
indicator lamp 73
Gear range indicator
(automatic transmission) 88 = Fuel gauge with:
Program mode indicator 8 Fuel tank reserve
(automatic transmission) 88 warning lamp (the arrow
Outside temperature indicates that the fuel filler
indicator or digital flap is on the right-hand
speedometer (depending side) 261
on selected setting in the 97, ? Clock 93
control system) 104
Set speed for cruise control 159 A Speedometer with:
+ Supplemental
; Tachometer with: Restraint System (SRS) 32,
! Engine malfunction indicator lamp 260
indicator lamp, USA only 262 ! Antilock Brake
; Engine malfunction System (ABS) indicator
indicator lamp, Canada only 262 lamp 257
h Combination low tire # Left turn signal
pressure/TPMS indicator lamp
malfunction telltale, USA 201, d Electronic Stability
only 262
Program (ESP®) warning
lamp 260
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 27
Multifunction steering wheel 27
Function Page Multifunction steering wheel

! Right turn signal
At a glance
indicator lamp
J Brake warning lamp,
Canada only 258
$ Brake warning lamp,
USA only 258
B Reset button for:
Trip odometer 93
Settings 102
C Knobs for instrument
cluster illumination 93
Function Page
: Multifunction display 95
; Press button 6:
to answer a call 110
to dial1 110
to redial1 110
Press button ~:
to end a call 110
to reject an incoming call 110
Press button W or X:
to select submenus in the
Settings menu 103
to set values
to operate the RACETIMER2 98
to set the volume
= Press button V or U
to select next/previous
menu. 93
1 Function only available in telephone menu.

2 AMG vehicles only.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 28
28 Center console
Function Page Center console

Press button & or * Upper part
At a glance
briefly:
to move within a menu
to select previous or next
track, scene or stored
station within Audio/DVD
menu 100
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Telephone
menu 110
Press and hold button
& or *:
track with quick search or
station in station list or
wave band within Audio/
DVD menu 100
to start the quick search in Function Page
the phone book within
Telephone menu 110 : Cup holder 176
; Audio system 112
or
COMAND system (see
separate operating
instructions)
= AIRSCARF switch,
passenger side 65
? Seat heating switch,
passenger side 65
A Central unlocking switch 59
B Hazard warning flasher
switch 74
C Central locking switch 59
Alarm system indicator
lamp 51
D Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch 49
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 29
Center console 29
Function Page Lower part

E Seat heating switch,
At a glance
driver‘s side 65
F AIRSCARF switch, driver‘s
side 65
G Passenger front air bag off 37,
indicator lamp 263
H Climate control system 162
Rear window defroster
switch 170
I Cigarette lighter 177
J Ashtray 177
Function Page
: Gearshift lever (manual
transmission) 84
Gear selector lever
(automatic transmission) 85
; Retractable hardtop switch 170
= Tow-away alarm switch 52
? Parking brake lever 83
A Storage compartment 175
B Passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror button 68
C Driver’s side exterior rear
view mirror button 68
D Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment button 68
E Program mode selector
switch (automatic
transmission) 88
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 30
30 Door control panel
Overhead control panel Door control panel

At a glance

: Interior lighting switch 75 : Inside door handle 58
; Automatic interior lighting 75 ; Power window switch,
passenger-side window 78
= Right reading lamp switch 75
= Power window switch,
? SOS button (Tele Aid driver’s side window 78
system) 180
A Garage door opener 183
B Sensor for auto-dimming
rear view mirrors 69
C Interior rear view mirror 68
D Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) and telephone 178
E Left reading lamp switch 75
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 31
31
Vehicle equipment .............................. 32

Occupant safety .................................. 32
Panic alarm .......................................... 47
Driving safety systems ....................... 47
Anti-theft systems .............................. 51
Safety and security

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 32
32 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices

(ETDs), for example, could deploy
i This Operator’s Manual describes all inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
features, standard or optional, potentially although the deceleration threshold for air
available for your vehicle at the time of bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
Safety and security
purchase. Please be aware that your never modify the restraint systems. Do not
vehicle might not be equipped with all tamper with electronic components or their
features described in this manual. software.
i See “Children in the vehicle”

Occupant safety (Y page 45) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
Introduction
the vehicle
In this section you will learn the most Rrestraint systems for infants and children
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: SRS indicator lamp
RSeat belts
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
RChild restraints the ignition is switched on and in regular
Additional protection potential is provided by: intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with
The SRS indicator lamp + in the
- Air bags instrument cluster comes on when the
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for than a few seconds after the engine has been
seat belts started.
The SRS components are in operational
- Seat belt force limiter
readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
RAir bag system components with + is not lit while the engine is running.
- Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp G Warning!
- Passenger seat with Occupant The SRS self-check has detected a
Classification System (OCS) malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp
+
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with Rdoes not come on at all
each other. Rfailsto go out after approximately
G Warning! 4 seconds after the engine was started
Modifications to or work improperly Rcomes on after the engine was started or
conducted on restraint system components while driving
or their wiring, as well as tampering with For your safety, we strongly recommend that
interconnected electronic systems, can lead you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
to the restraint systems no longer functioning Center immediately to have the system
as intended. checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 33
Occupant safety 33
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS and passenger to always be in a properly
might also deploy unexpectedly and seated position and to wear their seat belts.
unnecessarily which could also result in injury For maximum protection in the event of a
as well. collision always be in normal seated position
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates with your back against the seat backrest.
Safety and security

a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work properly positioned on your body.
on the SRS must therefore only be performed Since the air bag inflates with considerable
by qualified technicians. Contact an speed and force, a proper seating position
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. and correct positioning of the hands on the
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
to accommodate a person with disabilities, distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance properly or are too close to the air bag can be
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
(1-800-367-6372) for details. inflates with great force instantaneously:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
Air bags your back against the seat backrest.
G Warning! RMove the driver’s seat as far back as
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential possible, still permitting proper operation
of injury and fatality in certain of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver’s chest to the center of
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags and knee the air bag cover on the steering wheel
bags) must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
Rside impacts (head-thorax air bags) You should be able to accomplish this by
However, no system available today can adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. you have any difficulties, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air RDo not lean your head or chest close to the
bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful steering wheel or dashboard.

to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
vehicle. The dust might cause some wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
temporary breathing difficulty for people with the rim can increase the risk and potential
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as front air bag inflates.
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
RAdjust the passenger seat as far as possible
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
rearward from the dashboard when the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
seat is occupied.
air by opening a window or door.
ROccupants, especially children, should
G Warning! never place their bodies or lean their heads
To reduce the risk of injury when the front air in the area of the door where the head-
bags inflate, it is very important for the driver thorax air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the head-
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 34
34 Occupant safety
thorax air bag be deployed. Always sit as authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an

upright as possible, wear the seat belt additional cost.
properly and use an appropriately sized Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or Center or call the Customer Assistance
booster seat recommended for the size and Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Safety and security
weight of the child. (1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in

Failure to follow these instructions can result Canada) at 1-800-387-0100 for details.
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you frontal impacts (front air bags and knee bags)
make the buyer aware of this safety and in side impacts (head-thorax air bags) if
information. Be sure to give the buyer this the system determines the need for air bag
Operator’s Manual. deployment. Only in the event of such a
situation will they provide their supplemental
G Warning! protection.
There is a possibility of a head-thorax air bag-
The driver and passenger should always wear
related injury if occupants, especially
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible
children, are not properly seated or restrained
for the air bags to provide their supplemental
when next to a head-thorax air bag which
protection.
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
order to do its job. In case of other types of impacts and impacts
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger
follow these guidelines:
will then be protected to the extent possible
(1) Occupants, especially children, by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly
should never place their bodies or fastened seat belt is also needed to provide
lean their heads in the area of the the best possible protection in a rollover.
door where the head-thorax air Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
bag inflates. This could result in Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
serious injuries or death should whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
the head-thorax air bag be air bags.
deployed.
It is important to your safety and that of your
(2) Always sit as upright as possible, passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
wear the seat belt properly, and for and to have any malfunctioning air bags
children 12 years old and under, repaired. This will help to make sure the air
use an appropriately sized infant bags will continue to provide supplemental
restraint, toddler restraint, or crash protection for occupants.
booster seat recommended for the
size and weight of the child. Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
(3) Always wear seat belts properly. Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
If you believe that, even with the use of these and air bag
guidelines, it would be safer for your
passenger seat occupants to have the
G Warning!
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
passenger side head-thorax air bag
deactivated, then deactivation can be carried been subjected to stress in an accident
out upon your written request at an must be replaced. Their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 35
Occupant safety 35
installed or supplied by an authorized RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

Mercedes-Benz Center. risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency causing unintended air bag deployment.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain Work on the SRS must therefore only be
perchlorate material, which may require performed by qualified technicians.
Safety and security

special handling and regard for the Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
environment. Check with your local Center.
government’s disposal guidelines. RFor your protection and the protection of
California residents, see others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ ETD, our safety instructions must be
Perchlorate/index.cfm. followed. These instructions are available
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD Center.
that has deployed must be replaced. RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. required inflation volume, and the material
They could tear. of the air bags, there is the possibility of
abrasions or other, potentially more serious
RDo not make any modification that could injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
severely weaken them. In a crash they may recommend that you inform the subsequent
not be able to provide adequate protection. owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
Also refer them to the applicable section in
RNo modifications of any kind may be made the Operator’s Manual.
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
RDo no change or remove any component or Front air bags
part of the SRS.
RDo
G Observe Safety notes, see page 33.
not install additional trim material, seat
covers, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front air bag cover,
outboard sides of the seat backrests, door
trim panels, or door frame trims.
RDo not install additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
RAir bag system components will be hot after Driver’s front air bag : and passenger front
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. air bag ; are designed to provide increased
protection for the driver and passenger
RNever place your feet on the instrument
against the risk of injuries to the head and
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
thorax.
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 36
36 Occupant safety
Driver and passenger front air bags and knee Knee bags
bags are deployed The knee bags are designed to provide
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts increased protection for the driver and
Rif
passenger against the risk of injuries to the
the system determines that air bag
knees, thighs and lower legs.
deployment can offer additional protection
Safety and security
to that provided by the seat belt Driver side knee bag ? is located on the
driver side lower instrument panel. Passenger
Rdepending on whether the respective seat side knee bag = is located on the passenger
belt is in use side below the glove box. They are designed
Rindependently of the head-thorax air bags to operate together with the front air bags in
The front air bags in this vehicle have been certain frontal impacts if the system
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows determines that air bag deployment can offer
the air bags to have different rates of inflation. additional protection to that provided by the
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle seat belt. The knee bags operate best in
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag conjunction with properly positioned and
control unit. fastened seat belts.
The passenger front air bag deployment is
additionally influenced by the passenger’s Head-thorax air bags
weight category as identified by the Occupant G Observe Safety notes, see page 33.
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 37).
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
for second stage inflation of the passenger
front air bag.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deploy in the event
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration Head-thorax air bags : are designed to
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for provide increased protection for the head and
the front air bags. thorax but not for the arms.
The passenger air bag will only be deployed if Head-thorax air bags : are deployed
Rthe system, based on OCS weight sensor Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
readings, detects that the passenger seat
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
is occupied
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Rthe 04 indicator lamp in the
Rif the system determines that air bag
center console is not lit (Y page 37)
deployment can offer additional protection
Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment to that provided by the seat belt
threshold Rdepending on whether the seat belt is in
use
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 37
Occupant safety 37
Rindependently of the front air bags the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Rindependently of the ETDs Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
The passenger head-thorax air bag : will
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
only deploy if the OCS senses that the
Both the driver and the passenger should
passenger seat is occupied and the impact
Safety and security

always use the 04 indicator
exceeds a preset deployment threshold.
lamp as an indication of whether or not the
Head-thorax air bags : are not deployed in
passenger is properly positioned.
side impacts which do not exceed the
system’s deployment threshold. G Warning!
If the 04 indicator lamp
G Warning!
illuminates when an adult or someone larger
Only use seat covers which have been tested than a small individual is in the passenger
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your seat, have the passenger reposition himself
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may or herself in the seat until the
interfere with or prevent the deployment of 04 indicator lamp goes out.
the head-thorax air bags. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for In the event of a collision, the air bag control
availability. unit will not allow passenger front air bag
deployment when the OCS has classified the
passenger seat occupant as weighting as
much as or less than a typical 12-month-old
Occupant Classification System
child in a standard child restraint or if the
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) passenger seat is classified as being empty.
activates or deactivates the passenger front When the OCS senses that the passenger seat
air bag and passenger-side knee bag occupant is classified as being up to or less
automatically. The respective status is based than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
on the classified occupant weight category child in a standard child restraint, the
determined by weight sensor readings from 04 indicator lamp will illuminate
the passenger seat. when the engine is started and remain
The system does not deactivate the illuminated, indicating that the passenger
passenger head-thorax air bag and the front air bag is deactivated.
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs). When the OCS senses that the passenger seat
To be classified correctly, the passenger must is classified as being empty, the
sit 04 indicator lamp will illuminate
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the passenger
Rin a position that is as upright as possible front air bag is deactivated.
with the back against the seat backrest
When the OCS senses that the passenger seat
Rwith the feet on the floor occupant is classified as being heavier than
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to the weight of a typical 12-month-old child
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning seated in a standard child restraint or as being
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to a small individual (such as a young teenager
properly approximate the occupant’s weight or a small adult), the 04
category. indicator lamp will illuminate for
If your seat, including the trim cover and approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take started and then, depending on occupant
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 38
38 Occupant safety
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain Occupants, especially children, should always
illuminated or go out. With the sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
04 indicator lamp illuminated, properly and use an appropriately sized infant
the passenger front air bag is deactivated. restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
With the 04 indicator lamp out, recommended for the size and weight of the
Safety and security
the passenger front air bag is activated. child.

When the OCS senses that the passenger seat Children can be killed or seriously injured by
occupant is classified as an adult or someone an inflating air bag. Note the following
larger than a small individual, the important information:
04 indicator lamp will illuminate RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
for approximately 6 seconds when the engine technology designed to deactivate the
is started and then go out, indicating that the passenger front air bag in your vehicle
passenger front air bag is activated. when the system senses the weight of a
If the 04 indicator lamp is typical 12-month-old child or less along
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is with the weight of a standard appropriate
deactivated and will not be deployed. child restraint on the passenger seat.
If the 04 indicator lamp is not RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is passenger seat will be seriously injured or
activated and will be deployed even killed if the passenger front air bag
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts inflates in a collision which could occur
under some circumstances, even with the
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
threshold
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on
Rindependently of the head-thorax air bag
the passenger seat, make sure the
If the passenger front air bag is deployed, the 04 indicator lamp is
rate of inflation will be influenced by illuminated, indicating that the passenger
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as front air bag is deactivated. Should the
assessed by the air bag control unit 04 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
Rthe passenger’s weight category as
installed, please check installation.
identified by the OCS
Periodically check the 04
For more information on air bag display indicator lamp while driving to make sure
messages in the multifunction display, see the 04 indicator lamp is
(Y page 239). illuminated. If the 04 indicator
lamp goes out or remains out, do not
G Warning! transport a child on the passenger seat
Children 12 years old and under must be until the system has been repaired.
seated and properly secured in an appropriate A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster passenger seat will be seriously injured or
seat recommended for the size and weight of even killed if the passenger front air bag
the child. inflates.
The infant or child restraint must be properly RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt fully in restraint on the passenger seat, move the
accordance with the child seat seat as far back as possible, use the proper
manufacturer’s instructions. child restraint recommended for the age,
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 39
Occupant safety 39
size and weight of the child, and secure G Warning!

child restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt If the red SRS indicator lamp + in the
according to the child seat manufacturer’s instrument cluster and the 04
instructions. For children larger than the indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there
typical 12-month-old child, the passenger is a malfunction in the OCS. The passenger
Safety and security

front air bag may or may not be activated. front air bag will be deactivated in this case.
Have the system checked by qualified
Deployment of the driver front air bag does
technicians as soon as possible. Contact an
not mean that the passenger front air bag also
should have deployed.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
The OCS may have determined
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
weight up to or less than that of a typical bag system and OCS:
12-month-old child seated in a standard
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
child restraint – both of which are instances
where the system suppresses deployment position that is as upright as possible with
of the passenger front air bag even though your back against the seat backrest.
the impact met the criteria and was of RWhile seated, an occupant should not
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front position him/herself in such a way as to
air bag cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
Rthat the seat was occupied by a small from the seat bottom as this may result in
individual (such as a young teenager or a the OCS being unable to correctly
small adult) or a child who weighs more approximate the occupant’s weight
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old category.
child in a standard child restraint – both of RRead and observe all warnings in this
which are instances where the system may chapter.
suppress deployment of the passenger
front air bag even though the impact met OCS Self-test
the criteria and was of sufficient severity to
deploy the driver front air bag After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 the
04 indicator lamp illuminates. If
an adult occupant is properly sitting on the
passenger seat and the system classifies the
occupant as an adult, the 04
indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after
approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
classifies the passenger seat as being empty,
the 04 indicator lamp will
illuminate and not go out.
04 indicator lamp : will be G Warning!
illuminated, except with the SmartKey If the 04 indicator lamp does not
removed from the starter switch or with the illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
starter switch in position 0. must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 40
40 Occupant safety
Center before seating any child on the risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
passenger seat. accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
For more information, see the “Practical
be considerably more severe without your
hints” section (Y page 263).
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
G Warning!
Safety and security
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit

Never place anything between seat cushion the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
back of the child seat must make full contact death is lessened if you are properly wearing
with the passenger seat cushion and your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
backrest. as intended if the occupants are properly
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger wearing their seat belts.
seat backrest.
G Warning!
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
injuries to the child in case of an accident, Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
instead of increasing protection for the child. backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
installation of child seats.
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
Seat belts seat belt provide the best restraint when the
Safety notes wearer is in a position that is as upright as
possible and the seat belt is properly
The use of seat belts and infant and child positioned on the body.
restraint systems is required by law in all 50
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. G Warning!
territories and all Canadian provinces. Never let more people ride in the vehicle than
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle there are seat belts available. Make sure
occupants should have their seat belts everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion. restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at a
i See “Children in the vehicle”
time.
(Y page 45) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
G Warning!
the vehicle Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
Rrestraint systems for infants and children been subjected to stress in an accident must
be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
G Warning! points must be checked.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Only use seat belts which have been approved
Always make sure your passenger is properly by Mercedes-Benz.
restrained. You and your passenger should
Do not make any modifications to the seat
always wear seat belts.
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
Failure to wear and properly fasten and of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when
position your seat belt greatly increases your necessary.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 41
Occupant safety 41
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
severely weaken them. In a crash they may your hips and not across the abdomen. If
not be able to provide adequate protection. the lap belt is positioned across your
Have all work carried out only by qualified abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
technicians. Contact an authorized a crash.
Safety and security

Mercedes-Benz Center. RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
Proper use of seat belts such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
G Warning! RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY snugly. Take special care of this when
RSeat belts can only protect when used wearing loose clothing.
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other RNever use a seat belt for more than one
way than as described in this section, as person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
that could result in serious injuries in case around a person and another person or
of an accident. other objects at the same time.
REach occupant should wear their seat belt RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
at all times, because seat belts help reduce crash, you would not have the full width of
the likelihood of and potential severity of the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The twisted seat belt against your body
The integrated restraint system includes could cause injuries.
SRS (driver front air bag, knee bags,
RPregnant women should also always use a
passenger front air bag, head-thorax air
bags), Emergency Tensioning Devices lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
(ETDs) and seat belt force limiters. should be positioned as low as possible on
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
The system is designed to enhance the
the abdomen.
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
knee bags and ETDs) and side (head-thorax as upright as possible.
air bags and ETDs) impacts which exceed RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
preset deployment thresholds. sure it is properly positioned.
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your RNever place your feet on the instrument
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
In a frontal crash, your body would move keep both feet on the floor in front of the
too far forward. That would increase the seat.
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
belt would also apply too much force to the
ribs or abdomen, which could severely restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
injure internal organs such as your liver or booster seats, always follow the child seat
spleen. manufacturer’s instructions.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
G Warning!
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder could tear.
portion of the seat belt under your arm.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 42
42 Occupant safety
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. clicks.
This could damage the seat belt. X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
Never attempt to make modifications to seat snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of The passenger lap/shoulder belt has a
Safety and security
the seat belts. special seat belt retractor to secure child

restraints properly. For more information on
Fastening the seat belts special seat belt retractors, see “Infant and
child restraint systems” (Y page 45).
G Warning! To release the seat belt with seat belt release
Children 12 years old and under must be button ?, see (Y page 42).
seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler Releasing the seat belts
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For additional X Press seat belt release button ?
information, see section “Children in the (Y page 42).
vehicle”. Allow the retractor to completely rewind
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is the seat belt by guiding latch plate ;
significantly increased if the child restraints (Y page 42).
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ ! Make sure the seat belt retracts
or the child is not properly secured in the child
completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
restraint.
latch plate could get caught or pinched in
the door or in the seat mechanism. This can
damage the seat belt and impair its
effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the
door and/or door trim panel. Such damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Enhanced seat belt reminder system

When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale 7 will always illuminate for
6 seconds to remind you and your passenger
to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out the engine is started, an additional warning
of the seat belt outlet. chime will sound. The warning chime goes out
Loop : guides the seat belt. after approximately 6 seconds or once the
X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt driver’s seat belt is fastened.
across the top of your shoulder and the lap
portion across your hips.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 43
Occupant safety 43
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the The ETDs are designed to activate in the
passenger’s seat belt (with the passenger following cases:
seat occupied) is not fastened with both Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
doors closed, the system’s preset deployment threshold
Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains Rif the restraint systems are operational and
Safety and security

illuminated for as long as either the driver’s functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator
or passenger’s seat belt is not fastened. lamp” (Y page 32)
Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds Rin certain vehicle rollovers if the system
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale determines an additional degree of
7 starts flashing and a warning chime protection
sounds with increasing intensity for a
maximum of 60 seconds or until the The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts are
driver’s and passenger’s seat belt are fastened (latch plate properly inserted into
fastened. buckle).
If you and/or your passenger release the In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the
seat belt during driving, the seat belt seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
telltale 7 starts flashing and the more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
warning chime sounds as described before. limiters, when activated, are employed to
help reduce the peak force exerted by the
If the driver’s or the passenger’s seat belt seat belts on occupants during a crash.
remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the
warning chime stops sounding, the seat i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
continues to be illuminated. The ETDs do not pull occupants back
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime toward the seat backrest.
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
G Warning!
7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
replaced.
The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if For your safety, when disposing of the
both the driver’s and the passenger’s seat pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
belt (with the passenger seat occupied) are instructions. These are available at any
fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(Y page 259). Correct driver seat adjustment
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), G Warning!
seat belt force limiter In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the
The seat belts are equipped with ETDs and
vehicle is put into motion:
seat belt force limiters.
Rseat adjustment
Rhead restraint adjustment
Rsteering wheel adjustment
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 44
44 Occupant safety
Rrear view mirror adjustment Make sure:

Rfastening of seat belts RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder.
Safety and security
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low

as possible on your hips.
Seat and head restraint

XPosition seat = and head restraint
properly. See (Y page 63) for seat and
head restraint adjustment.
Observe the following points:
RAlways be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in the steering wheel as
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
Steering wheel
position that still allows you to reach the
G Observe Safety notes, see page 66. accelerator/brake pedal safely.
XPosition steering wheel : properly. See RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can
(Y page 66) for manual adjustment and correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
(Y page 66) for electrical adjustment. RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
Make sure: is as nearly upright as possible.
RYou can reach the steering wheel with your RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front
arms slightly bent at the elbows. edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
RYou can move your legs freely. your legs.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
RAll displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster close to the head as possible and the
are clearly visible. center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
Seat belt
any moving parts while the seat is being
G Observe Safety notes, see page 40. adjusted.
X Fasten and position your seat belt ;
correctly (Y page 42).
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 45
Occupant safety 45
Children in the vehicle Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo

increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
Safety notes of
If an infant or child is traveling with you in the Rstrong braking maneuvers
vehicle: Rsudden changes of direction
Safety and security

X Secure the child using an infant or child Ran accident
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
Infant and child restraint systems
secured at all times while the vehicle is in G Observe Safety notes, see page 45.
motion.
We recommend all infants and children be
G Warning! properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always The passenger lap/shoulder belt has a
take the SmartKey with you and lock the special seat belt retractor for secure
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in fastening of child restraints.
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
restraint system, or with access to an restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised mounting.
access to a vehicle could result in an accident To activate the special seat belt retractor:
and/or serious personal injury. The children
X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and
could
let it retract.
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through sound can be heard to indicate that the
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold special seat belt retractor is activated.
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with The seat belt is now locked.
vehicle equipment that can be operated X Push down on child restraint to take up any
even if the SmartKey is removed from the slack.
starter switch or removed from the vehicle, To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
X Release the seat belt buckle and let the
adjustment, or the memory function
seat belt retract completely.
If children open a door, they could injure other The seat belt can then again be used in the
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure usual manner.
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to G Warning!
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s Never release the seat belt buckle while the
metal parts, for example, could become very vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
hot, and the child could be burned by these retractor will be deactivated.
parts.
The use of infant or child restraints is required
G Warning! by law in all 50 states, the District of
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
passenger compartment unless they are Canadian provinces.
firmly secured in place.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 46
46 Occupant safety
Infants and small children should be seated typical 12-month-old child or less along
in an appropriate infant or child restraint with the weight of a standard appropriate
system. They must be properly secured by a child restraint on the passenger seat.
lap/shoulder belt in accordance with the RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
manufacturer’s instructions for the child
passenger seat will be seriously injured or
restraint. All infant or child restraint systems
Safety and security
even killed if the passenger front air bag

must comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
inflates in a collision which could occur
Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
under some circumstances, even with the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and
air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
210.2.
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on
A statement by the child restraint
manufacturer of compliance with these the passenger seat, make sure the
standards can be found on the instruction 04 indicator lamp is
label on the restraint and in the instruction illuminated, indicating that the passenger
manual provided with the restraint. front air bag is deactivated. Should the
04 indicator lamp not
When using any infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat, make sure to illuminate or go out while the restraint is
carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s installed, please check installation.
instructions for installation and use. Periodically check the 04
indicator lamp while driving to make sure
Please read and observe warning labels
the 04 indicator lamp is
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
illuminated. If the 04 indicator
infant or child restraints.
lamp goes out or remains out, do not
G Warning! transport a child on the passenger seat
Children 12 years old and under must be until the system has been repaired.
seated and properly secured in an appropriate A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster passenger seat will be seriously injured or
seat recommended for the size and weight of even killed if the passenger front air bag
the child. inflates.
The infant or child restraint must be properly RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt fully in restraint on the passenger seat, move the
accordance with the child seat seat as far back as possible, use the proper
manufacturer’s instructions. child restraint recommended for the age,
Occupants, especially children, should always size and weight of the child, and secure
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt child restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant according to the child seat manufacturer’s
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat instructions. For children larger than the
recommended for the size and weight of the typical 12-month-old child, the passenger
child. front air bag may or may not be activated.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following G Warning!
important information: Infants and small children should never share
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag a seat belt with another occupant. During an
technology designed to deactivate the accident, they could be crushed between the
passenger front air bag in your vehicle occupant and seat belt.
when the system senses the weight of a
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 47
Driving safety systems 47
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.

significantly increased if the child restraints or
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
Safety and security

Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not following two conditions:
face or neck. A booster seat may be 1. This device may not cause harmful
necessary to achieve proper seat belt interference, and
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
2. this device must accept any
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
interference received, including
fits properly without a booster.
interference that may cause undesired
When the child restraint is not in use, remove operation.
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from Any unauthorized modification to this
becoming a projectile in the event of an device could void the user’s authority to
accident. operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Panic alarm Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
X Activating: Press and hold !
button : for at least 1 second. Driving safety systems
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate. Introduction
This section contains information about the
i Without the antenna on the left rear side
following driving safety systems:
of the vehicle installed, the SmartKey
signaling range for the panic alarm is RABS (Antilock Brake System)
considerably reduced. The panic alarm RBAS (Brake Assist System)
then only functions if the SmartKey is held
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
in close proximity towards the antenna
base.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 48
48 Driving safety systems
i In winter operation, the maximum ABS

effectiveness of most of the driving
systems described in this section is only G Observe Safety notes, see page 48.
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains G Warning!
as required.
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
Safety and security
brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the

Safety notes brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS
G Warning! and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents: The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
RExcessive speed, especially in turns the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to
RWet and slippery road surfaces
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
RFollowing another vehicle too closely The ABS is functional above a speed of
The driving safety systems described in this approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent of road surface conditions.
the natural laws of physics from acting on the On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or respond even to light brake pressure.
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by The ABS indicator lamp ! in the
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires instrument cluster comes on when you switch
or the traction afforded. on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can is running.
prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the Braking
driving safety systems described in this
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
section must never be exploited in a reckless
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ABS is in the regulating mode.
Always adjust your driving style to the
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
prevailing road and weather conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users and pedal while you feel the pulsation.
objects on the street. Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
safety systems may also switch off. Observe namely braking power and the ability to steer
indicator and warning lamps that may come the vehicle.
on as well as messages in the multifunction The pulsating brake pedal can be an
display that may appear. indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver

X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
pedal.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 49
Driving safety systems 49
G Warning! wheels and by limiting the engine output, the

If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also ESP® is especially useful while driving off and
switched off. Observe indicator and warning on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
lamps that may come on as well as messages also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and
Safety and security

in the multifunction display that may appear. steering maneuvers.
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock The ESP® warning lamp d in the
during hard braking, reducing steering instrument cluster comes on when you switch
capability and extending the braking distance. on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
is running.
The ESP® warning lamp d in the
BAS instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
engaged.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in G Warning!
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
very quickly, the BAS provides full brake ESP® warning lamp d flashing in the
boost automatically, thereby potentially instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
reducing the braking distance. follows:
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as
the emergency braking situation is over. possible.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
locking.
pedal.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
function again as normal. The BAS is then RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
deactivated. prevailing road conditions.
G Warning! Failure to observe these guidelines could

If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
functions, but without the additional brake prevent accidents resulting from excessive
boost available that the BAS would normally speed.
provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
Therefore, the braking distance may increase. ! Because the ESP® operates
automatically, the engine and ignition must
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
ESP®
being tested on a brake test dynamometer
G Observe Safety notes, see page 48. or when the vehicle is being towed with the
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is front axle raised.
operational as soon as the engine is running. Active braking action through the ESP®
It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of may otherwise seriously damage the brake
adhesive friction between the tires and the system which is not covered by the
road surface) and handling. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviates
! The ESP® will only function properly if you
from the direction of travel as intended by the
use wheels of the recommended tire size
driver. By applying brakes to individual
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 50
50 Driving safety systems
as specified in the “Technical data” section When you switch off the ESP®,
of this Operator’s Manual. Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
i The cruise control switches off Rthe engine output is not limited, which
automatically when the ESP® engages. allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
into surfaces for better grip
Safety and security
Electronic Traction System (ETS) Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a
spinning wheel
The ETS (Electronic Traction System) is a
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you
component of the ESP®. The ETS improves are braking
the vehicle’s ability to utilize available Rthe cruise control cannot be activated
traction, especially under slippery road Rthe cruise control switches off if activated
conditions by applying the brakes to a
spinning wheel. i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
When you switch off the ESP®, the ETS is still more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
enabled. warning lamp d in the instrument
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will
Switching off the ESP® then not stabilize the vehicle.
G Warning!
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the
circumstances described below. Disabling
the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off

the ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for X With the engine running, press ESP®
example switch : until the ESP® warning lamp
Rwhen driving with snow chains d in the instrument cluster comes on.
Rin deep snow The ESP® is switched off.
Rin sand or gravel G Warning!
When the ESP® warning lamp d is
G Warning!
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the switched off or is not operational due to a
aforementioned circumstances do not apply malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not driving maneuvers is reduced.
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
or a wheel is spinning.
road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 51
Anti-theft systems 51
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an Anti-theft alarm system

extended period with the ESP® switched
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
off. This may cause serious damage to the
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
drivetrain which is not covered by the
someone opens
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Ra door
Safety and security

Switching on the ESP® Rthe trunk
X Press ESP® switch : until theESP® Rthe hood
warning lamp d in the instrument Rthe glove box
cluster goes out. Rthe storage compartment under the
You are now again in normal driving mode
armrest
with the ESP® switched on.
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element, a door, for example, is closed
immediately.
Anti-theft systems
The alarm system will also be triggered when
Immobilizer Rthe vehicle is raised (tow-away alarm)
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
persons from starting your vehicle. key
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Ra door is opened from the inside
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid Rthe trunk is opened with the emergency
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. release button
To cancel the alarm after it has been
Activating triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter (Y page 53).
switch. i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
Deactivating call to the Customer Assistance Center
automatically. The Tele Aid system will
X Switch on the ignition. initiate the call provided that
i Starting the engine will also deactivate Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid
the immobilizer. service
In the event that the engine cannot be Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is properly
charged), the system is not operational.
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the supply and GPS coverage are available
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 52
52 Anti-theft systems
i If the alarm stays on for more than

30 seconds, a call to the Customer
Assistance Center is initiated automatically
by the Tele Aid system provided that you
have subscribed to the Tele Aid service and
that it has been activated properly, and that
Safety and security
the necessary mobile phone, power supply

and GPS coverage are available.
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm is armed after about
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
30 seconds automatically.
SmartKey.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
The turn signal lamps flash three times and
an acoustic warning sounds three times to SmartKey.
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until
lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm you lock the vehicle again.
system is armed.
Disabling tow-away alarm
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times and the acoustic warning does not To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
sound three times, a door or the trunk may disable the tow-away alarm feature before
not be properly closed. towing the vehicle, or when parking on a
surface subject to movement, such as a ferry
Close the respective element.
or auto train.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The turn signal lamps flash once and an
acoustic warning sounds once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
i Unless you open a door or the trunk within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
rearmed. X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
X Press tow-away alarm switch ;.
Tow-away alarm
Indicator lamp : comes on briefly.
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual X Exit and lock the vehicle.
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle. The tow-away alarm remains disabled until
you lock the vehicle again.
To cancel the alarm after it has been
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
(Y page 53).
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 53
Anti-theft systems 53
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
X Press button % or & on the
Safety and security

SmartKey.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 54
54
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 55
55
Vehicle equipment .............................. 56

Locking and unlocking ....................... 56
Starter switch positions ..................... 61
Seats .................................................... 62
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 66
Mirrors ................................................. 68
Memory function ................................. 70
Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 70
Wipers .................................................. 76
Power windows ................................... 78
Driving and parking ............................ 79
Manual transmission .......................... 84
Automatic transmission ..................... 85
Instrument cluster .............................. 92
Control system .................................... 93
Audio system .................................... 112
Driving systems ................................ 159
Climate control system .................... 162
Rear window defroster ..................... 170
Retractable hardtop ......................... 170
Loading and storing .......................... 174
Useful features ................................. 176
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 56
56 Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle

(Y page 265).
i This Operator’s Manual describes all X Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
features, standard or optional, potentially battery connections checked at an
available for your vehicle at the time of authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
purchase. Please be aware that your If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
vehicle might not be equipped with all Roadside Assistance or an authorized
features described in this manual. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking SmartKey

Notes Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
G Observe Safety notes, see page 45. removable mechanical key.
When unlocking or locking the vehicle with The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
Rthe doors
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If
you wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust Rthe trunk lid
its signal volume, contact an authorized Rthe fuel filler flap
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rthe glove box
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. An acoustic signal sounds Rthe storage compartment under the
once, and the locking knobs in the doors armrest
move up. The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. An acoustic signal sounds
three times, and the locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm
system is armed.
All doors and the trunk must be closed.
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey
are discharged, the SmartKey is
: & Lock button
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is
drained. ; F Unlock button for trunk lid
X
= % Unlock button
Check the batteries in the SmartKey
(Y page 57) and replace them if When you open a door, the windows on that
necessary. side lowers slightly. Once you close the door,
X Use the mechanical key to unlock the the windows move up again.
driver’s door and the trunk (Y page 264). ! A window will not work if it is blocked with
ice or if the vehicle battery is discharged. If
you cannot shut a door, do not force it or
you could damage the door or the window.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 57
Locking and unlocking 57
Fix whatever is affecting the window before Unless you open a door or the trunk within
trying to shut the door. approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
i Without the antenna on the left rear side RThe vehicle will be locked again.
of the vehicle installed, the SmartKey
signaling range is considerably reduced. RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
Hold the SmartKey in close proximity rearmed.
towards the antenna base when locking or X Global locking: Press button &.
Controls in detail
unlocking the vehicle.
i USA only: Selective setting

This device complies with Part 15 of the If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing
following two conditions: button % will then only unlock the driver’s
1. This device may not cause harmful door, interior lockable storage
interference, and compartments, and the fuel filler flap.
2. this device must accept any X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
interference received, including % and & simultaneously for
interference that may cause undesired approximately 6 seconds until the battery
operation. check lamp (Y page 57) flashes twice.
Any unauthorized modification to this The SmartKey will then function as follows:
device could void the user’s authority to X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
operate the equipment. flap: Press button % once.
X Global unlocking: Press button %
i Canada only:
twice.
X Global locking: Press button &.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
and Checking SmartKey batteries
Factory setting
X Global unlocking: Press button %.
X Press button & or % on the
SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 58
If the battery check lamp does not come on If you are an authorized person:
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries Rthe vehicle’s current state registration
are discharged.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
X Replace the batteries (Y page 266).
license for the authorized individual
i You can obtain the required batteries at Rsigned and dated authorization from the
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. owner of the vehicle for which the key is
being requested
Controls in detail
i If the batteries are checked within signal

range of the vehicle, pressing button i Duplicated or photocopied
& or % will lock or unlock the vehicle documentation will not be accepted.
accordingly.
Activating the key
Once you, or an authorized person, has
Loss of the SmartKey
provided the appropriate documents, the
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key, Mercedes-Benz Center will need to
you should do the following: synchronize the key to your vehicle before it
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an can be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Benz Center need access to your vehicle.
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key to your car insurance
company immediately. Opening the doors from the inside
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if You can open a locked door from the inside.
necessary. Open door only when conditions are safe to
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be do so.
glad to supply you with a replacement. For
information on replacing the SmartKey, see
“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 58).
Replacing the SmartKey

Only you, or someone authorized by you can
order a replacement key from any Mercedes-
Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-
Benz Center will require proof of identity and
vehicle ownership with original documents,
Example illustration driver’s door
including the following:
If you are the current owner of the vehicle: If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 53).
license X Pull on inside door handle ; on the
respective door.
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
move up.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 59
Locking and unlocking 59
When you open a door, the windows on that

side lowers slightly. Once you close the
door, the windows move up again.
! A window will not work if it is blocked with
ice or if the vehicle battery is discharged. If
you cannot shut a door, do not force it or
you could damage the door or the window.
Fix whatever is affecting the window before
Controls in detail
trying to shut the door.
X Locking: Press central locking switch :.

Automatic central locking When all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
You can switch the automatic central locking
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
on or off using the control system
(Y page 108). switch ;.
The doors and the trunk lock automatically You can open a locked door from the inside.
when the vehicle is set into motion. Open door only when conditions are safe to
You can open a locked door from the inside. do so.
Open door only when conditions are safe to If the vehicle was previously locked with the
do so. central locking switch
The doors are designed to unlock Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
automatically after an accident if the force of the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
the impact exceeds a preset threshold. door is opened from the inside
The vehicle locks automatically when the Rand the SmartKey is set to selective
ignition is switched on and the wheels are settings, only the door opened from inside
turning at a vehicle speed of above 9 mph is unlocked
(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the
on a test stand.
central unlocking switch.
Locking and unlocking from the inside

Opening the trunk
G Warning!
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine
inside using the central locking or unlocking
is running and while driving. Among other
switch. This can be useful, for example, if you
dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
want to lock the vehicle before starting to
may enter vehicle interior resulting in
drive.
unconsciousness and death.
The central locking or unlocking switch does
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or the ! When you open the trunk, the trunk lid
interior storage compartments, such as the
swings open upwards. Always make sure
glove box.
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 60
You can open the trunk when the vehicle is automatically when closed. All turn signal
stationary and the retractable hardtop is fully lamps flash three times to confirm locking.
opened or closed.
i When the hardtop is retracted, it must be
A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft completely lowered in the trunk before the
(1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid. trunk can be closed (Y page 170).
Controls in detail
X Press and hold button F on the

X Lower the trunk lid using handle :.
SmartKey.
The trunk lid is unlocked and opens slightly. X Close trunk lid with hands placed flat on
or trunk lid.
X Pull on handle :.
The vehicle must be unlocked.
Trunk lid emergency release
X Lift the trunk lid and swing it open.
The trunk lid can be opened from inside the
trunk with the emergency release button.
Closing the trunk
G Warning!
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine
is running and while driving. Among other
dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
X Briefly press emergency release
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
button :.
especially careful when small children are
The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.
around.
X Push up the trunk lid to fully open.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 45. The emergency release button unlocks the
Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk. trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in
You may lock yourself out. motion.
If the vehicle was previously locked centrally
with the SmartKey, the trunk lid will lock
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 61
Starter switch positions 61
Illumination of the emergency release button: You can then only open the trunk with the
RThe button flashes for 30 minutes after mechanical key.
opening the trunk. X Canceling: Insert the mechanical key in
RThe the trunk lid lock.

button flashes for 60 minutes after
X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise
closing the trunk.
to neutral position 1 and remove the
The emergency release button does not
mechanical key in that position to unlock
unlock the trunk, if the vehicle battery is
the trunk.
Controls in detail
discharged or disconnected.
You can now open the trunk.
If the vehicle has previously been locked
centrally with the SmartKey, opening the
trunk from the inside using the emergency Starter switch positions
release button will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. SmartKey
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 53).
Valet locking
You can lock the trunk separately with the
mechanical key. This denies unauthorized
access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet park
the vehicle.
X Leave only the SmartKey less its
mechanical key with the vehicle.
Starter switch
g For removing SmartKey
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Gear selector lever must be in park
position P.
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, e.g. wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
X Valet locking: Close the trunk. 3 Starting position
X Remove the mechanical key from the When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in
SmartKey (Y page 264). the instrument cluster come on. The high-
X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn
lock. signal indicator lamps will only come on if
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to activated. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
position 2 and remove the mechanical fails to come on when the ignition is switched
key in that position to lock the trunk. on, have it checked and replaced if necessary.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on
The trunk remains locked even when the
after starting the engine or comes on while
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 62
62 Seats
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
(Y page 256). backrest in an excessively reclined position as
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch this can be dangerous. You could slide under
position 0 for an extended period of time, it the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
can no longer be turned in the starter switch. it, the seat belt would apply force at the
In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
remove SmartKey from the starter switch and or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
reinsert. belts provide the best restraint when the
Controls in detail
The steering is locked when the SmartKey is wearer is in a position that is as upright as
removed from the starter switch. possible and seat belts are properly
positioned on the body.
X Always remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch when the engine is not in G Warning!
operation.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle
correctly fasten your seat belt.
battery discharge or a completely
discharged vehicle battery. Observe the following points:
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be slightly angled when holding the steering
sufficiently charged. wheel.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
necessary (Y page 283). position that still allows you to reach the
or accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
X Get a jump start (Y page 283).
with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
Seats
close to the head as possible. The center of
Safety notes the head restraint must support the back of
the head at eye level.
G Warning!
RNever place hands under the seat or near
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the any moving parts while a seat is being
vehicle is put into motion: adjusted.
Rseat adjustment Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Rhead restraint adjustment
Rsteering wheel adjustment G Warning!
Rrear
Children 12 years old and under must be
view mirror adjustment
seated and properly secured in an
Rfastening of seat belts appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
G Warning! the size and weight of the child. For additional
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. information, see section “Children in the
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause vehicle”.
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 63
Seats 63
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ X Check for proper engagement before
or the child is not properly secured in the child driving.
restraint. X Seat height: Pull or push handle ; up or
down and adjust the seat height until your
G Warning! legs are lightly supported.
For your protection, drive only with properly X Seat backrest tilt: Pull handle = and
positioned head restraints. adjust the seat backrest until your arms are
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close slightly angled when holding the steering
Controls in detail
to the head as possible and the center of the wheel.
head restraint supports the back of the head X Release handle = when the desired seat
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for backrest tilt is reached.
injury to the head and neck in the event of an When you hear an audible click, the seat
accident or similar situation. backrest is again fixed into place.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
Power seats
help reduce injuries during an accident.
G Warning!
The power seats can be operated at any time.
Seat adjustment Therefore, do not leave children unattended
The seats can be adjusted either manually or in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
electrically, depending on the vehicle’s vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
equipment. vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
! When moving the seats, make sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind the i Vehicles without memory function:
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes
seats and/or the items.
after either front door has been opened.
The counter resets each time
Manual seat adjustment
Ryou open or close a front door
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch
Ryou remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
Ryou switch the ignition on or off
Just like in vehicles with memory function,
the power seats can be operated at any
time when the ignition is switched on.
i The memory function (Y page 70) lets

X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Pull you store the settings for the seat position
handle :. together with the settings for the steering
X Slide the seat to the desired position. wheel (electrical) and exterior rear view
X Allow handle : to reengage with an mirrors.
audible click.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 64
64
Controls in detail Seats
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the X Adjust the height of head restraints
switch forward or backward in direction of manually by pulling them upwards or
arrow :. pushing them downwards.
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
forward or backward in direction of arrow
=. Lumbar support
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down You can adjust the contour of the seat’s
in direction of arrow ;. lumbar support to help enhance support to
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or your spine.
down in direction of arrow ? until your
upper legs are lightly supported.
Head restraint height adjustment,

manual
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for X Switch on the ignition.
injury to the head and neck in the event of an X Turn adjustment wheels : and ; until
accident or similar situation. you have reached the desired seat
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head curvature.
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 65
Seats 65
Seat heating with a heated air stream flowing from

openings in the head restraints.
G Warning!
When switching on the AIRSCARF neck-level
heating, the air streaming from the openings
may be very hot. When in close proximity to
the openings, you could be seriously burned.
Controls in detail
To help avoid serious personal injuries, switch
the AIRSCARF to a lower heating level.
The red indicator lamps in seat heating

switch : come on to show which heating
level you have selected.
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
seat heating switches off automatically.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Switching on: Press AIRSCARF switch :
X Switching on: Press seat heating
for the desired side.
switch :.
All three indicator lamps on respective
Three red indicator lamps in seat heating AIRSCARF switch : come on. After a
switch : come on. preheating time of approximately
X Press seat heating switch : repeatedly 7 seconds, the blower starts.
until the desired seat heating level is set. X Press AIRSCARF switch : repeatedly until
X Switching off: Press seat heating the desired AIRSCARF heating level for the
switch : repeatedly until all indicator corresponding seat is reached.
lamps go out. X Switching off: Press AIRSCARF
If one or more of the indicator lamps in seat switch : repeatedly until all indicator
heating switch : are flashing, there is lamps on AIRSCARF switch : go out.
insufficient voltage available since too many After switching off the AIRSCARF neck-level
electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heating, the AIRSCARF fan continues to
heating switches off automatically. operate for approximately 10 seconds to cool
The seat heating will switch back on again down the heater elements.
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is If one or more indicator lamps on AIRSCARF
available. switch : are flashing, there is insufficient
voltage available since too many electrical
consumers are turned on. The AIRSCARF
AIRSCARF neck-level heating neck-level heating switches off automatically.
The AIRSCARF neck-level heating provides
the area surrounding the occupants’ necks
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 66
66 Multifunction steering wheel
The AIRSCARF neck-level heating will switch Steering wheel adjustment, manual
back on again automatically as soon as
sufficient voltage is available.
Multifunction steering wheel

Safety notes
Controls in detail
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose : Release handle
control of the vehicle. ; Adjusting steering wheel, up or down
The electrical steering wheel adjustment = Adjusting steering wheel, in or out
feature can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended X Unlocking: Pull release handle : out to
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked its stop limit.
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a X Move steering wheel to the desired
vehicle could result in an accident and/or position.
serious personal injury. X Locking: Push release handle : back to
Make sure its original position.

X Make sure the steering wheel is securely
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
locked by trying to move it up and down as
arms slightly bent at the elbows
well as in and out before driving off.
Ryou can move your legs freely
Rall displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster Steering wheel adjustment, electrical
are clearly visible
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move

stalk in direction of arrows :.
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
Move stalk in direction of arrows ;.
i The memory function (Y page 70) lets
you store the settings for the steering
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 67
Multifunction steering wheel 67
wheel together with the settings for the The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
seat position and the exterior rear view you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
mirrors. in starter switch position 0 or 1.
i When the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
Easy-entry/exit feature
steering wheel will no longer be able to
This feature allows the driver an easier entry move upward when the easy-entry/exit
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering feature is activated.
Controls in detail
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is The adjustment procedure is briefly
in its uppermost position. interrupted when the engine is started.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Convenience submenu G Warning!
of the control system (Y page 108). Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
G Warning! motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
You must make sure no one can become be completed before setting the vehicle in
trapped or injured by the moving steering motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
activated. control of the vehicle.
To stop steering wheel movement do one of
the following: Crash-responsive exit aid
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk. When you open the driver’s door after an
RPress one of the memory position buttons. accident has occurred, the steering column
moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the
RPress memory button M. starter switch is insignificant. This function
Do not leave children unattended in the facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. occupants.
Children could open the driver’s door and The crash-responsive exit aid can only be
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is
feature, which could result in an accident activated via the control system.
and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,

Heated steering wheel
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with The steering wheel heating warms up the
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel leather area of the steering wheel.
will also return to its last set position when
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch.
i The last set steering wheel position is
stored when the ignition is switched off or
the position is stored in memory
(Y page 70).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 68
68 Mirrors
X Switch on the ignition. Interior rear view mirror, antiglare

X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the position
stalk in direction of arrow :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
i The steering wheel heating may be
suspended temporarily. However, indicator
lamp ; remains on. The steering wheel
Controls in detail
heating is suspended when the

temperature of the vehicle interior is above
86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
temperature of the steering wheel is above
95‡ (35†).
When these conditions do not apply X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by
anymore, steering wheel heating
moving lever towards the windshield.
continues.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
stalk in direction of arrow =.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. Exterior rear view mirrors
i Indicator lamp ; flashes or goes out in G Warning!
case of power surge or undervoltage or if Exercise care when using the passenger-side
the steering wheel heating malfunctions. exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a
i The steering wheel heating switches off wider field of view). Objects in mirror are
automatically when you remove the closer than they appear. Check your interior
SmartKey from the starter switch. rear view mirror and glance over your
For more information on the steering wheel, shoulder before changing lanes.
see “Multifunction steering wheel”
(Y page 94).
Mirrors
Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.
Interior rear view mirror X Switch on the ignition.

X Press button : for the driver’s side
X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually. exterior rear view mirror or button = for
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 69
Mirrors 69
the passenger-side exterior rear view you may not be able to observe traffic
mirror. conditions and could cause an accident.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
comes on for approximately 10 seconds.
If you do not make adjustments to the Exterior rear view mirror parking
selected exterior rear view mirror within position
10 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
You will then have to select the desired To assist during parking maneuvers, you can
Controls in detail
exterior rear view mirror again before set the passenger-side exterior rear view
adjustments can be made. Adjustments mirror so that you can see the rear wheel and
can only be made with the indicator lamp the road curb.
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated. Setting and storing the parking position
X Press adjustment button ; up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors X Switch on the ignition.

X Press button =, to select the passenger-
The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
side exterior rear view mirror.
side and the interior rear view mirror will
X Shift the automatic transmission into
respond automatically to glare when the
ignition is switched on and incoming light reverse gear R (manual transmission to
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the reverse gear).
interior rear view mirror. The passenger-side exterior rear view
The rear view mirrors will not react if reverse mirror moves to the preset parking
gear R is engaged or the interior lighting is position.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
switched on.
view mirror with adjustment button ; so
G Warning! that you see the rear wheel and the road
The auto dimming function does not react if curb.
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors X Press memory button M (Y page 70) and
in the interior rear view mirror. within 3 seconds, press one of the arrows
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior of adjustment button ;.
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not The parking position is stored if the exterior
react, for example, if the cloth wind screen is rear view mirror does not move.
installed.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 70
70 Lighting
Calling up the parking position

X Press button ;, to select the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R (manual transmission to
reverse gear).
Controls in detail
The passenger-side exterior rear view

mirror moves to the stored parking
position.
The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
returns to its previously stored driving Storing positions into memory
position
X Adjust the seats.
R10 seconds after you have put the gear
X On the driver’s side, also adjust the
selector lever out of reverse gear R (manual
steering wheel and exterior rear view
transmission out of reverse)
mirrors to the desired positions.
Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a X Press memory button M once and within
speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) 3 seconds press memory position button
Rimmediately when you press button : to 1, 2 or 3.
select the driver’s side exterior rear view When the settings are stored to the
mirror selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
Memory function
Recalling positions from memory
Notes
X Press and hold desired memory position
With the memory function you can store up
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved
to three different configurations per front
to the stored position completely. On the
seat.
driver’s side, also wait for the steering
Each memory position button on the driver’s wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
side can store all of the following settings: move to the stored position.
RSeat position
i Releasing the memory position button
RSteering wheel position stops movement to the stored positions
RExterior rear view mirrors’ position immediately.
G Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while Lighting
driving. Activating the memory function while
driving could cause the driver to lose control Notes
of the vehicle. i If you drive in countries with left-hand
Each memory position button on the driving, you must have the headlamps
passenger side can store the setting of the modified for symmetrical low beams.
seat position.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 71
Lighting 71
Relevant information can be obtained at In addition, the message Switch Off

any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Lights appears in the multifunction
display.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon Switch off the low-beam headlamps or the
headlamps: parking lamps.
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase If the message Switch off lights or
usable illumination over conventional remove key appears in the multifunction
headlamps because they follow the display remove the SmartKey from the
Controls in detail
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of starter switch or switch off the headlamps.
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to
either side according to the vehicle’s ! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps
steering angle and speed. when leaving the vehicle may result in a
discharged battery.
Exterior lamp switch Low-beam headlamps

The low-beam headlamps can be switched on
and off with the exterior lamp switch.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position L.
The following lamps come on:
RLow-beam headlamps
RTail lamps
RParking lamps
RLicense plate lamps
1 W Standing lamps, left
RSide marker lamps
2 X Standing lamps, right
RInstrument panel lamps
3 $ Off
Daytime running lamp mode RGreen indicator lamp T in the exterior
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode lamp switch
Daytime running lamp mode X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
5T Parking lamps (also tail lamps, switch to position $.
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps and instrument panel lamps)
Automatic headlamp mode
6L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
headlamps The following lamps come on and go out
7N Front fog lamps automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
8R Rear fog lamp
RLow-beam headlamps
i If you hear a warning signal you have RTail lamps
forgotten to switch off the low-beam
RParking lamps
headlamps or the parking lamps before
opening the driver’s door. RLicense plate lamps
RSide marker lamps
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 72
72 Lighting
G Warning! X Activate the daytime running lamp mode

If the exterior lamp switch is set to Ã, the using the control system, see “Switching
headlamps will not automatically come on daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA
under foggy conditions. only)” (Y page 106).
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to $ or Ã.
L when driving or when traffic and/or When the engine is running, the low-beam
ambient lighting conditions require you to do headlamps come on.
Controls in detail
so. In low ambient lighting conditions, the

In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch following lamps will come on additionally:
from position Ã to L with the vehicle RTail lamps
at a standstill in a safe location. Switching RParking lamps
from Ã to L will briefly switch off the
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an RSide marker lamps
accident. With the daytime running lamp mode
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid activated and the engine running, you cannot
to the driver. The driver is responsible for the switch off the low-beam headlamps manually.
operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.
Canada only
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp With the exterior lamp switch in position
switch to position Ã. $ or Ã, you cannot switch on the
The following lamps come on and go out high-beam headlamps.
depending on the brightness of the ambient The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
light with the SmartKey in starter switch X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
position 1: switch to position L to permit activation
RTail lamps of the high-beam headlamps.
RParking lamps When the engine is running, and you
RLicense plate lamps Rshift from a driving position to neutral
RSide
position N or park position P with the
marker lamps
vehicle at a standstill (vehicles with
When the engine is running, the low-beam automatic transmission), the low-beam
headlamps will also come on and turn off headlamps will go out with a delay of
automatically. 3 minutes
Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
available with the exterior lamp switch in T, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
position L. and parking lamps, the license plate lamps
and the side marker lamps come on
Daytime running lamp mode Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is L, the manual headlamp mode has
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. priority over the daytime running lamp
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode mode
is deactivated by default. The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 71).
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 73
Lighting 73
USA only X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the

With the exterior lamp switch in position exterior lamp switch to second stop.
$ or Ã, you cannot switch on the high- The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
beam headlamps. green N and the yellow indicator lamp
The high-beam flasher is available at all times. R in the exterior lamp switch come on.
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position L to permit activation lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop.
Controls in detail
of the high-beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you turn the
exterior lamp switch to position T or Locator lighting and night security
L, the manual headlamp mode has illumination
priority over the daytime running lamp mode. Locator lighting and night security
The corresponding exterior lamps come on illumination are described in the “Control
(Y page 71). system” section, see “Switching locator
lighting on or off” (Y page 106) and
Fog lamps “Switching night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the off” (Y page 107).
exterior lamp switch in position Ã.
G Warning!
Combination switch
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position Ã to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from Ã to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps

and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
regarding permissible lamp operation. Turn signals
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position X Press the combination switch in direction
T or L (Y page 71). of arrow ; or ?.
X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the The corresponding turn signal indicator
exterior lamp switch to first stop. lamp ! or # in the instrument
The green indicator lamp N in the cluster flashes.
exterior lamp switch comes on. The combination switch resets automatically
after major steering wheel movements.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 74
74 Lighting
To signal minor directional changes:

X Press the combination switch only to the
point of resistance in direction of
arrow ; or ? and release.
The corresponding turn signal lamps will
flash three times.
High beam
Controls in detail

L (Y page 71).
X Switching on: Push the combination X Switching on: Press hazard warning
switch in direction of arrow :. flasher switch :.
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp All turn signal lamps are flashing.
K in the instrument cluster comes on. i With the hazard warning flasher activated
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch and the combination switch set for either
in direction of arrow = to its original left or right turn, only the respective left or
position. right turn signals will operate when the
ignition is switched on.
i Also note the information on high-beam
headlamps with activated automatic X Switching off: Press hazard warning
headlamp mode (Y page 71) or the daytime flasher switch : again.
running lamp mode (Y page 72).
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard
High-beam flasher
warning flasher switch : to switch it off.
X Switching on: Pull the combination switch
briefly in direction of arrow =.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-
Hazard warning flasher pressure water jet automatically when the
The hazard warning flasher can be switched engine is running and you have
on at all times, even with the SmartKey Rswitched on the headlamps
removed from the starter switch. and
The hazard warning flasher comes on Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the
automatically when an air bag deploys.
windshield with washer fluid five times
The counter resets when you switch off the
headlamps.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 196).
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 75
Lighting 75
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps The corner-illuminating front fog lamps

temporarily come on on both sides of the
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
improve illumination of the area in the direction and then again in the other direction
direction into which you are turning. shortly thereafter.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
only operate remains lit for a short time only. It then goes
Rin low ambient lighting conditions out automatically.
Controls in detail
Rat vehicle speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) Switching off
Rwith the front fog lamps switched off X Switch off the left or right turn signal.
Rwhen the engine is running or
X Steer straight ahead.
Switching on
i There may be a brief delay before the
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
L or Ã.
or
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode Interior lighting
(Y page 72).
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning left
or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If
you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
other direction, the corner-illuminating
front fog lamp on the side of the turn signal
comes on.
or : c Interior lighting on/off
X Turn the steering wheel in the desired
; q Automatic control on/off
direction.
Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the = p Right reading lamp on/off
side of your steering direction comes on. ? p Left reading lamp on/off
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp
opposite to your steering direction comes Automatic control
on. X Activating: Press switch q.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will The interior lighting comes on in darkness,
come on automatically depending on the when you
steering angle, even if you did not switch on Runlock the vehicle
either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
Rremove the SmartKey from the starter
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
will also go out automatically depending on switch (Interior Lighting Delayed
the steering angle and vehicle speed.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 76
76 Wipers
Shut-off must be switched on Wipers

(Y page 107))
Ropen
Notes
a door
The interior lighting goes out after a short ! Do not operate the wipers when the
time. windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
a windshield might scratch the glass and/
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps or damage the wiper blades when wiping
go out automatically after approximately occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary
Controls in detail
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed to operate the wipers in dry weather
or in starter switch position 0. conditions, always operate the wipers with
X
washer fluid.
Deactivating: Press switch q.
Manual control Windshield wipers

! An interior lamp switched on manually X Observe notes on page (Y page 76).
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an Switching on/off
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
X Switching interior lighting on/off: Press
switch c.
i The footwell lighting is switched on and
off simultaneously with the manual control.
The standard reading lamps are located to the
left and right of the overhead control panel.
Reading lamps as part of the interior lighting
package are located on the lower edge of the Combination switch
interior rear view mirror. 1 0 Windshield wipers off
X Switching reading lamps on/off: Press 2 I Intermittent wiping
respective switch p. 3 II Normal wiper speed
4 III Fast wiper speed
Emergency lighting A í Single wipe/ î Wiping with
The interior lighting comes on automatically washer fluid
if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X Switch on the ignition.
Switching off: X Turn the combination switch to the desired
X Press switch q. position, depending on the intensity of the
or rain.
X Press hazard warning flasher switch
(Y page 74). Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
weather conditions or in the presence of
precipitation.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 77
Wipers 77
! Vehicles with rain sensor: Do not leave Single wipe

windshield wipers on an intermittent X Press the combination switch briefly in
setting when the vehicle is taken to an
direction of arrow A to the resistance
automatic car wash or during windshield
point.
cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in
The windshield wipers wipe one time
the presence of water sprayed on the
without washer fluid.
windshield, and windshield wipers may be
damaged as a result.
Controls in detail
Wiping with washer fluid
! Vehicles with rain sensor: If you have set
X Press the combination switch in direction
intermittent wiping, dirt on the surface of
of arrow A past the resistance point.
the rain sensor or optical effects may cause
The windshield wipers operate with washer
the windshield wipers to wipe in an
fluid.
undesired fashion. This could then damage
the windshield wiper blades or scratch the i To prevent smears on the windshield or
windshield. You should therefore switch off noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
the windshield wipers when weather washer fluid every now and then even when
conditions are dry. it is raining.
Vehicles with rain sensor: Intermittent wiping For information on filling up the washer
interval is dependent on the wetness of the reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
windshield. After the initial wipe, pauses cleaning system” (Y page 196).
between wipes are controlled by the rain For information on cleaning the headlamps
sensor automatically. with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
X Turn the combination switch to position I. system” (Y page 74).
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened.
This protects persons getting into or out of Problems with wipers
the vehicle from being sprayed. ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
doors are closed and immediately.
Rthe clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with
For safety reasons, do the following before
manual transmission) attempting to remove any blockage:
or RStop the vehicle in a safe location.
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive RRemove the SmartKey from the starter
position D or reverse gear R (vehicles with
switch.
automatic transmission)
REngage the parking brake.
the automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R RRemove blockage.
or RTurn the windshield wipers on again.
Rthe wiper setting is changed using the
combination switch
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 78
78 Power windows
If the windshield wipers fail to function at holding button & on the SmartKey the
all with the combination switch in position automatic reversal function will not operate.
I,
Rset the combination switch to the next i You can also open or close the windows
higher wiper speed using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
Rhave the windshield wipers checked at feature” (Y page 172) and “Convenience
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz closing feature” (Y page 172).
Controls in detail
Center
i After switching off the ignition or
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch, you can operate the windows until
Power windows you open a door. If no door was opened you
Opening and closing can operate the windows for up to
5 minutes.
The windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all windows are
located on the driver’s door. The switch for
operating the passenger-side windows is
located on the passenger door.
G Warning!
When closing the windows, make sure there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The door windows are equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal Door windows
function. If in express operation mode a door
window encounters an obstruction that X Switch on the ignition.
blocks its path, the automatic reversal X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold
function will stop the door window and open switch : or ; to the resistance point.
it slightly. The corresponding door window moves
The door windows operate differently when downward or upward until you release the
the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing switch.
when a door window is blocked” section for X Express operation: Press or pull
details.
switch : or ; past the resistance point
The closing of the door windows can be and release.
immediately halted by releasing the switch or, The corresponding door window opens or
if the switch was pulled past the resistance closes completely.
point and released, by pressing or pulling the
X Stopping during express operation:
respective switch.
Press or pull the respective switch again.
The closing of the rear side windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch.
If a window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path in a circumstance where you
are closing the windows by pressing and
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 79
Driving and parking 79
Closing when a door window is blocked Synchronizing power windows

G Warning! The windows must be synchronized after the
Make sure that nobody can become trapped battery has been disconnected or if the
and be seriously or even fatally injured when windows cannot be fully closed (express
closing a door window with greater force or operation).
without automatic reversal function. Each window must be synchronized
separately.
If the upward movement of a door window is
Controls in detail
X Close all doors.
blocked during the closing procedure, the
door window will stop and open slightly. X Switch on the ignition.
X Pull and hold switch : or ; (Y page 78)
X Immediately after the door window has
stopped because it was blocked, pull and until the respective window is closed.
hold the respective switch upward until the The window opens again slightly.
door window is fully closed. X Pull and hold the respective switch once
The door window closes with greater force. more immediately until the window is
closed completely.
If the door window is blocked again and opens
X Hold the respective switch for
slightly:
approximately 1 second.
X Immediately after the door window was The window is synchronized.
blocked, pull and hold the respective
switch upward until the door window is fully
closed. Driving and parking
The door window closes without automatic
reversal function. Safety notes
G Warning! G Warning!
Pulling and holding the switch to close the Make sure absolutely no objects are
door window immediately after it had been obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
blocked two times will cause the door window Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
to close without any reversal function for as obstacles. If there are any floormats or
long as you hold the switch. carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
Opening and closing the rear side During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
windows when the hardtop is closed the objects could get caught between or
under the pedals. You could then no longer
X Opening: Open the door window. brake or accelerate. This could lead to
X Press switch : or ; again. accidents and injury.
The corresponding rear side window will
open completely. G Warning!
X Closing: Close the door window. With the engine not running, there is no power
X Pull and hold switch : or ;. assistance for the brake and steering
The corresponding rear side window moves systems. In this case, it is important to keep
upward until you release the switch. in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 80
80 Driving and parking
Starting the engine Automatic transmission
G Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
Controls in detail
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.

If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
conditions, drive only with at least one j Park position with gear selector lever lock
window fully open at all times. k Reverse gear
i Neutral position
Manual transmission
h Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (Y page 85).
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
Starting
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 (Y page 61) and hold until the
Gearshift pattern for manual transmission engine starts.
k Reverse gear
i Vehicles with automatic transmission:
1 to 6 Forward gears
You can also use the “touch-start” function.
For more information, see “Manual Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
transmission” (Y page 84). position 3 and release it again immediately.
X Depress the brake pedal. The engine then starts automatically.
X Make sure the manual transmission is in
the neutral position (no gear selected). Starting difficulties
X Fully depress the clutch pedal. ! Remember that extended starting
Otherwise the engine cannot be started attempts can drain the battery.
due to the integrated safety interlock.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the starter switch.
In this case, the steering is locked.
X To unlock, remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch and reinsert.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 81
The engine does not start. You can hear of the engine. This is not covered by the
the starter. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
There could be a malfunction in the engine
electronics or in the fuel supply system. ! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
message Release Parking Brake
appears in the multifunction display when
position 0 and repeat the starting driving off, you have forgotten to release
procedure. the parking brake.
Controls in detail
If the engine does not start after several Release the parking brake.
starting attempts:
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
Center or call Roadside Assistance. cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
The engine does not start. You cannot Limited Warranty.
hear the starter.
! Simultaneously depressing the
The battery may not be charged sufficiently.
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
X Get a jump start (Y page 283). reduces engine performance and causes
If the engine will not start despite a jump premature brake and drivetrain wear which
start: is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance. i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
The starter has been exposed to excessive automatic central locking function engages
temperatures. and the locking knobs in the doors move
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes. down.
X Repeat the starting procedure. The automatic central locking function can
be switched off (Y page 108).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts:
Manual transmission
X Depress the brake pedal.
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
! Only shift the manual transmission into
Driving off reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped.
G Warning! Otherwise the manual transmission could
be damaged.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could X Shift the manual transmission into 1st gear
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle or reverse gear R.
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent X If engaged, release the parking brake.
this type of loss of control.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Simultaneously slowly release the clutch
! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
pedal and carefully depress the accelerator
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
pedal.
engine speeds may shorten the service life
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 82
82 Driving and parking
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds. the catalytic converter to reach its operating
This may result in serious engine damage temperature earlier.
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz For more information on driving, see “Driving
Limited Warranty. instructions” (Y page 221).
Shift gear in a timely manner.
For more information on driving, see “Driving
instructions” (Y page 221). Problems while driving
Controls in detail
The engine runs erratically and misfires

Automatic transmission
RAn ignition cable may be damaged.
G Warning! RThe engine electronics may not be
It is dangerous to shift the automatic operating properly.
transmission out of park position P or neutral RUnburned gasoline may have entered the
position N if the engine speed is higher than
catalytic converter and damaged it.
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate X Give very little gas.
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose X Have the problem checked at an authorized
control of the vehicle and hit someone or Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right The coolant temperature is above
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 248‡ (120†)
! Only shift the automatic transmission into The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
reverse gear R or park position P when the the engine.
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
automatic transmission could be damaged. as possible.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
The gear selector lever lock is released. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
necessary (Y page 196).
position D or reverse gear R.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of In case of accident
park position P is only possible with the
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
brake pedal depressed.
Only depressing the brake pedal releases X Do not start the engine under any
the gear selector lever lock. circumstances.
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
X Wait for the gear selection process to roadway.
complete before setting the vehicle in X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
motion.
X If engaged, release the parking brake. If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission
shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 83
If no damage on major assemblies, fuel Parking brake

system, and engine mount can be
determined: G Warning!
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
X Start the engine in the usual manner.
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s
Parking brake lights do not light up when the parking
Controls in detail
G Warning! brake is engaged.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where G Warning!
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
leaves can come into contact with the hot
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
exhaust system. These materials could be
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
Vehicle movement can cause serious access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
personal injury or damage to the vehicle or release the parking brake and/or shift the
the vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do automatic transmission out of park position
the following before turning off the engine and P (manual transmission: shift into the neutral
leaving the vehicle: position), either of which could result in an
RKeep right foot on the brake pedal. accident and/or serious personal injury.
REngage the parking brake.
RManual transmission: Shift the manual
transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear
R.
RAutomatic transmission: Shift the
automatic transmission into park position
P.
RSlowly release the brake pedal.
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to X Releasing: Pull up slightly on parking brake
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from lever : and press release button ;.
the starter switch. X Push parking brake lever : down to its
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the original position.
vehicle when leaving. When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the brake warning lamp
G Warning! $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in
Manual transmission: the instrument cluster goes out.
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before X Engaging: Pull up parking brake lever :
removing the SmartKey from the starter firmly.
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when When the engine is running, the brake
the SmartKey is removed from the starter warning lamp $ (USA only) or J
switch. (Canada only) in the instrument cluster
comes on.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 84
84 Manual transmission
Turning off the engine obstacles. If there are any floormats or

carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
G Warning! still have sufficient clearance.
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
has come to a complete stop. With the engine the objects could get caught between or
not running, there is no power assistance for under the pedals. You could then no longer
the brake and steering systems. In this case, brake or accelerate. This could lead to
it is important to keep in mind that a accidents and injury.
Controls in detail
considerably higher degree of effort is

necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. G Warning!
When working on the vehicle, engage the
X Manual transmission: Shift the manual
parking brake and shift the manual
transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear
transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear R.
R.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
X Automatic transmission: Shift the could result in an accident and/or serious
automatic transmission into park position personal injury.
P.
X Engage the parking brake. ! Allow the engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
i Always engage the parking brake in engine until the operating temperature has
addition to shifting the automatic been reached.
transmission into park position P (manual Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
transmission: shifting into 1st gear or extended period when driving off on
reverse gear R). slippery road surfaces.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to This may cause serious damage to the
position 0. engine and the drivetrain which is not
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
switch. Warranty.
The immobilizer is activated.
Automatic transmission:
Gearshift lever
The SmartKey can only be removed from the
starter switch with the automatic
transmission in park position P.
Manual transmission
Introduction
For information on driving with a manual
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
(Y page 79).
G Warning! Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
Make sure absolutely no objects are k Reverse gear
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. 1 to 6 Forward gears
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 85
Automatic transmission 85
G Warning! Automatic transmission

Introduction
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle For information on driving with an automatic
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent transmission, see “Driving and parking”
this type of loss of control. (Y page 79).
G Warning!
! When you are shifting the manual
Controls in detail
Make sure absolutely no objects are
transmission into the 5th or 6th gear,
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
make sure you move the gearshift lever to
the right. Otherwise, you could accidentally
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
shift into the 3rd or 4th gear and damage
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
the manual transmission.
still have sufficient clearance.
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the engine can result in engine damage that
the objects could get caught between or
under the pedals. You could then no longer
Limited Warranty.
brake or accelerate. This could lead to
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by accidents and injury.
using the clutch pedal. The clutch may be
damaged which is not covered by the ! Allow the engine to warm up under low
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. load use. Do not place full load on the
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds. engine until the operating temperature has
been reached.
This may result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
Limited Warranty. extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces.
Shift gear in a timely manner.
This may cause serious damage to the
Shifting into reverse gear R engine and the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
! Only shift the manual transmission into Warranty.
reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped.
Otherwise the manual transmission could i During the brief warm-up, transmission
be damaged. upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more quickly
X Stop the vehicle completely. to operating temperature.
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
X Shift the manual transmission into the
neutral position (no gear selected).
X Move the gearshift lever to the left until you
feel a certain resistance.
X Push the gearshift lever past this resistance
and hold.
X Move the gearshift lever forward to select
reverse gear R.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 86
86 Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever The current transmission position P, R, N,

or D appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 87).
There are additional indicators on the cover
of the shifting gate showing the current gear
selector lever position.
The indicators come on when you insert the
SmartKey into the starter switch, and go out
Controls in detail
when you remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch.
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission Shifting procedure

j Park position with gear selector lever lock
The automatic transmission selects individual
k Reverse gear
gears automatically, depending on
i Neutral position Rthe selected gear range (Y page 88)
h Drive position Rthe selected program mode:
G Warning! C/S (Y page 88)
It is dangerous to shift the automatic or
transmission out of park position P or neutral M (vehicles with AMG Sport Package and
position N if the engine speed is higher than SLK 55 AMG only) (Y page 90)
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose Rthe vehicle speed
control of the vehicle and hit someone or With drive position D selected, you can
something. Only shift into gear when the influence transmission shifting by
engine is idling normally and when your right
Rlimiting the gear range
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Rextending the gear range
! Only shift the automatic transmission into Rchanging the gears manually (vehicles with
reverse gear R or park position P when the AMG Sport Package and SLK 55 AMG only)
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
automatic transmission could be damaged.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of

park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Only depressing the brake pedal releases
the gear selector lever lock.
i The current gear selector lever position

corresponds with the current transmission
position.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 87
Transmission positions Effect

The current transmission position appears in A Neutral position
the multifunction display.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle can
be moved freely (pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the
Controls in detail
transmission, never shift the
automatic transmission into neutral
position N while driving.
Exception: If the ESP® is switched
off or malfunctioning, shift the
: Transmission position indicator position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding.
Effect
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
B Park position for any other reason with the
Shift the automatic transmission automatic transmission in neutral
into park position P only when the position N can result in
vehicle is stopped. The park position transmission damage that is not
is not intended to serve as a brake covered by the Mercedes-Benz
when the vehicle is parked. Rather, Limited Warranty.
the driver should always engage the 7 Drive position
parking brake in addition to shifting
the automatic transmission into The automatic transmission shifts
park position P to secure the automatically. All forward gears are
vehicle. available.
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in park position P.
Driving tips
With the SmartKey removed from Kickdown
the starter switch, the gear selector
lever is locked in park position P. Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
malfunctioning, the gear selector X U.S. vehicles except AMG vehicles:
lever could remain locked in park Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
position P. To unlock the gear Depending on the engine speed the
selector lever manually, see automatic transmission shifts into a lower
“Manually unlocking the gear gear.
selector lever” (Y page 266). X Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles:
Depress the accelerator pedal past the
C Reverse gear
point of resistance.
Shift the automatic transmission Depending on the engine speed the
into reverse gear R only when the automatic transmission shifts into a lower
vehicle is stopped. gear.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 88
Working on the vehicle Automatic shift program

G Warning!
When working on the vehicle, engage the
parking brake and shift the automatic
transmission into park position P. Otherwise
the vehicle could roll away which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Gear ranges
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D and driving in automatic program Program mode selector switch
mode C or S, you can limit or extend the gear
C Comfort For comfort driving
range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 89). S Sport For sporty driving
The current gear range appears in the
multifunction display.
Program mode selector switch on vehicles with

: Gear range indicator AMG Sport Package and SLK 55 AMG
Effect C Comfort For comfort driving

= With this selection you can use the S Sport For standard driving
braking effect of the engine.
M Manual For manual gearshifting
5 Allows the use of the engine’s (Y page 90)
braking effect when driving
Ron steep downgrades
Rin mountainous regions

Runder extreme operating
conditions
4 For maximum use of the engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 89
The current program mode appears in the mode C or S, you can limit or extend the gear
multifunction display. range using the gear selector lever or the
steering wheel gearshift control.
Vehicles with AMG Sport Package and
SLK 55 AMG: For information on using the
gear selector lever or the steering wheel
gearshift control in manual program mode
M, see “Manual shift program”
Controls in detail
(Y page 90).
: Program mode indicator

You should only change the program mode
when the automatic transmission is in park
position P.
Automatic program mode S will not be stored.
When the engine is turned off with the
automatic program mode S selected, the
Steering wheel gearshift control (example
automatic transmission will go to the illustration)
automatic program mode C when the engine
is restarted. i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
X Press the program mode selector switch gearshift control when the automatic
repeatedly until the letter of the desired transmission is in park position P, neutral
program mode appears in the multifunction position N, or reverse gear R.
display.
Selecting program mode C means: Limiting gear range
RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both G Warning!
forward and reverse, except when driving On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
off with full throttle. order to obtain braking action. This could
RTraction and driving stability are improved result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
on icy roads. control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control.
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give
more gas. The engine then operates at X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
lower revolutions and the wheels are less left in the D- direction.
likely to spin.
or
Selecting program mode S means that X Briefly pull left gearshift control :.
upshifts occur later. The automatic transmission will shift into
the next lower gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously
One-touch gearshifting limits the gear range of the automatic
With the automatic transmission in drive transmission.
position D and driving in automatic program
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 90
i To avoid overrevving the engine when Manual shift program

downshifting, the automatic transmission
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s The manual shift program is available on
maximum speed would be exceeded. vehicles with AMG Sport Package and on
SLK 55 AMG only.
Extending gear range Manual program mode M differs with regard
to spontaneity, response time, and shifting
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the smoothness from automatic program mode
right in the D+ direction.
Controls in detail
S.
or In manual program mode M, system-
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;. controlled automatic gearshifting is switched
The automatic transmission will shift into off. You need to change the gears by manually
the next higher gear as permitted by the upshifting or downshifting using the gear
shift program. This action simultaneously selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift
extends the gear range of the automatic control.
transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator pedal
when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit

X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction until D
reappears in the multifunction display. Program mode selector switch on vehicles with
AMG Sport Package and SLK 55 AMG
or
X Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until C Comfort For comfort driving
D reappears in the multifunction display. S Sport For standard driving
The automatic transmission will shift from
the current gear range directly into drive M Manual For manual gearshifting
position D.
The current program mode appears in the
Shifting into optimal gear range multifunction display (Y page 89).
X Press and hold the gear selector lever to For information on automatic program mode
the left in the D- direction. (C or S), see “Automatic shift program”
(Y page 88) and “One-touch gearshifting”
or
(Y page 89).
X Pull and hold left gearshift control :.
The automatic transmission will select the
gear range suited for optimal acceleration
and deceleration automatically. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 91
Activating manual shift program Upshift indicator

X Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until M appears in the
The automatic transmission switches to
manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range is
not limited.
Controls in detail
You can change the gears manually with drive In manual program mode M, upshift
position D selected. You can upshift or indicator ; in the multifunction display
downshift through the gears in succession. advises you to upshift before the engine
reaches the overspeed range. In addition,
i Manual program mode M will not be symbol ^ may appear instead of manual
stored. When the engine is turned off with program mode symbol M in the multifunction
manual program mode M selected, the display. Thus you can drive at the maximum
automatic transmission will go to engine speed for each gear without
automatic program mode C when the overrevving the engine.
engine is restarted.
X Shift the automatic transmission from
current gear : into the next higher gear.
Upshifting
The fuel supply will otherwise be
! In manual program mode M, the interrupted to prevent the engine from
automatic transmission will not upshift, overrevving.
even if the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Shift up into the next Downshifting
gear before the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Make absolutely certain G Warning!
that the engine speed does not reach the On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
red marking on the tachometer. Otherwise order to obtain braking action. This could
the engine could be damaged which is not result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
Warranty. this type of loss of control.
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction. left in the D- direction.
or or
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ; X Briefly pull left gearshift control :
(Y page 89). (Y page 89).
The automatic transmission shifts into the The automatic transmission shifts into the
next higher gear. next lower gear.
i For maximum acceleration, press and
hold the gear selector lever to the left in the
D- direction or pull and hold the left
gearshift control. Depending on the engine
speed the automatic transmission selects
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 92
92 Instrument cluster
the optimal gear for maximum Instrument cluster

acceleration.
Introduction
i When you brake or stop, the automatic
For a full view illustration of the instrument
transmission shifts down into a gear from cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
which you can easily accelerate or take off. (Y page 26).
Kickdown G Warning!
Controls in detail
No messages will be displayed if either the

Using the kickdown while driving in manual
instrument cluster or the multifunction
program mode M is not possible.
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
Deactivating manual shift program
information about your driving conditions,
X Press the program mode selector switch such as
repeatedly until C or S appears in the Rspeed
Routside temperature
or
Rwarning/indicator lamps
XRestart the engine.
The automatic transmission will go to Rmalfunction/warning messages
automatic program mode C. Rfailure of any systems
Manual program mode M is not stored.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
Emergency operation (limp-home caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
mode) Benz Center as soon as possible.
If vehicle acceleration becomes less

responsive or sluggish or the automatic
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
transmission is most likely operating in limp-
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X Turn off the engine. : To brighten instrument cluster
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting. illumination (knob +)
X Restart the engine. ; To dim instrument cluster illumination
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive (knob -)
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear = Reset button .
R.
For information on changing the instrument
X Have the automatic transmission checked
cluster settings, e.g. the language, see
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as (Y page 103).
soon as possible.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 93
Control system 93
Activating the instrument cluster Tachometer

The instrument cluster is activated when you The red marking on the tachometer
Ropen the driver’s door (Y page 26) denotes excessive engine speed.
Rswitch on the ignition ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
as it may result in serious engine damage
Rpress reset button . that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Rswitch on the exterior lamps Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
i Opening the driver’s door or pressing the To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
reset button . without switching on the interrupted if the engine is operated within
ignition or the exterior lamps activates the the red marking.
instrument cluster illumination only for
30 seconds.
Clock
In vehicles with the audio system, the clock
Adjusting the instrument cluster can be set via the control system
illumination (Y page 105).
X To brighten illumination: Press knob : For setting the time with the COMAND
briefly. system, see separate COMAND system
X To dim illumination: Press knob ;
operating instructions.
briefly.
The illumination brightness for the instrument Control system
cluster changes each time you press
knob : or ;. Several settings are possible. Introduction
i The instrument cluster illumination is The control system is activated as soon as the
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit starter switch is in position 1.
ambient light conditions. The control system enables you to call up
You can only adjust the brightness of the information about your vehicle and to change
instrument cluster illumination when it is vehicle settings.
dark outside. For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
i With the exterior lighting switched on, the maintenance service, to set the language for
brightness of the switches in the center messages in the instrument cluster display,
console will also be adjusted when using and much more.
knob : or ;.
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
Resetting trip odometer conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
X Make sure you are viewing the standard
For your safety and the safety of others,
display (Y page 96) in the multifunction
selecting features through the multifunction
display.
steering wheel should only be done by the
X Press and hold reset button . until the trip
driver when traffic and road conditions permit
odometer is reset. it to be done safely.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 94
94 Control system
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Press button

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
W to select submenus in the
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
X Settings menu
14 m) every second.
to set values
The control system relays information to the to operate the RACETIMER4
to set the volume
Controls in detail
= Press button
Multifunction steering wheel
V to select next or previous menu
The displays in the multifunction display and U
the settings in the control system are
controlled by using the buttons on the Press button briefly
multifunction steering wheel. & to move within a menu
* Within Audio/DVD menu to
select previous or next track,
scene or stored station
Within Telephone menu to
switch to the phone book and
select a name or number
Press and hold button

& Within Audio/DVD menu to
* select previous or next track
with quick search or to select
previous or next station in
station list or wave band
Within Telephone menu to
start the quick search in the
phone book
Depending on the selected menu, pressing

: Multifunction display the buttons on the multifunction steering
; Press button wheel will alter what appears in the
6 to answer a call The information available in the multifunction
to dial3 display is arranged in menus and
to redial3 accompanying functions and submenus.
~ to end a call The individual functions are then found within
to reject an incoming call the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
These functions serve to call up relevant
3 Function only available in telephone menu.

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 95
Control system 95
information or to customize the settings for = Automatic transmission program mode

your vehicle. indicator5
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the ? Outside temperature/digital
functions within each menu, as being speedometer
arranged in a circular pattern. A Transmission position/gear range
X Press button V or U repeatedly to indicator5
pass through each menu one after the For more information on menus displayed in
other.
Controls in detail
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
X Press button * or & repeatedly to submenus” (Y page 96).
pass through each function display, one
after the other, in the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
you will find a number of submenus for calling
up and changing settings. For instructions on
using these submenus, see “Settings menu”
(Y page 102).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.
Multifunction display
: Main odometer
; Trip odometer
5 Automatic transmission only
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 96
96 Control system
Menus and submenus

Controls in detail
i The headings used in the menus table are Standard display menu
designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to
those shown in the multifunction display.
The first function displayed in each menu
will automatically show you which part of
the system you are in.
Function
Standard display
: Standard display menu In the standard display, main odometer :
(Y page 96) and trip odometer ; appear in the
; AMG6 menu (Y page 97) multifunction display.
X If you see another display, press button
= Audio/DVD menu (Y page 100) V or U repeatedly until the standard
? Navigation menu (Y page 101) display appears.
X Press button & or * to select the
A Vehicle status message memory7
menu (Y page 101) functions in the Standard display menu.
B Settings menu (Y page 102)

C Trip computer menu (Y page 109)
D Telephone menu (Y page 110)

7 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 97
Control system 97
The following functions are available: The engine should not be operated with a
RChecking tire inflation pressure with the coolant temperature above 248‡
Advanced TPMS (Y page 201) (USA only) (120†). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
RChecking coolant temperature Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
(Y page 97)
RCalling up digital speedometer or outside Calling up digital speedometer or
temperature (Y page 97) outside temperature
Controls in detail
RCalling up maintenance service indicator You can select whether the digital
display (Y page 226) speedometer or the outside temperature
RChecking engine oil level (SLK 55 AMG appears in the multifunction display
only) (Y page 194) (Y page 104).
G Warning!
Checking coolant temperature The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
G Warning!
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Driving when your engine is overheated can
Indicated temperatures just above the
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
could be seriously burned.
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine the digital speedometer or the outside
if you see or hear steam coming from it. temperature appears in the multifunction
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from display.
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until

the coolant temperature appears in the
Digital speedometer
AMG menu
This function is only available in AMG
vehicles.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-
and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may the AMG menu appears in the
rise close to 248‡ (120†). multifunction display.
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 98
98 Control system
RACETIMER
G Warning!
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is
prohibited under all circumstances. The driver
The main screen of the AMG menu shows you is and must always remain responsible for
Controls in detail
the gear currently engaged : as well as the following posted speed limits.
engine oil temperature ;. The RACETIMER allows you to time and save
The engine oil temperature flashes if the driving stretches.
engine oil temperature has not yet reached X Press button V or U repeatedly until
80†. During this time, avoid driving at full
the AMG menu appears in the
engine speed.
If the engine reaches the overspeed range in X Press button & repeatedly until the
the manual shift program, the menu will be
RACETIMER appears in the multifunction
shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next
display.
to gear indicator : as a reminder to upshift.
Use buttons & or * to select the
following functions in the AMG menu:
RVehicle supply voltage (Y page 98)
RRACETIMER (Y page 98)
ROverall analysis (Y page 99)
RLap analysis (Y page 99) : Gear indicator
; RACETIMER
Vehicle supply voltage = Lap number
X Press button V or U repeatedly until You can start the RACETIMER when the
the AMG menu appears in the engine is running or the starter switch is in
multifunction display. position 2 (Y page 61).
X Press button & repeatedly until the While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you
vehicle supply voltage appears in the cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons
multifunction display. W or X.
X Starting: Press button W.
X Displaying intermediate time: Press
button X while the timer is running.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
X Stopping: Press button W.
: Gear indicator When you stop the vehicle and turn the
SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 61), the
; Vehicle supply voltage indicator
RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
when you switch the ignition back on or
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 99
Control system 99
restart the engine and then press button X Press button W while the timer is
W. running.
The timer stops.
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
X Press reset button . twice (Y page 92).
You can save up to nine laps.
X Press button W.
X Press button X while the timer is
The timer starts. The saved laps are
running. deleted.
The intermediate time will be shown for
Controls in detail
5 seconds.
Overall analysis
X Press button X within 5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be saved This function is only available if you have
as a lap time. saved at least one lap and have stopped the
The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap. RACETIMER.
The new lap begins to be timed as soon as X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the intermediate time is called up. the AMG menu appears in the
X Press button & repeatedly until the
overall analysis appears in the
: Gear indicator
; RACETIMER
= Best lap time
? Lap number
: Overall analysis of RACETIMER
Resetting current lap ; Overall driving time
X Press button W while the timer is = Maximum speed
running. ? Overall distance driven
The timer stops.
A Average speed
X Press button X.
The lap time is reset to “0”. Lap analysis
Deleting all laps This function is only available if you have
It is not possible to delete a single saved lap. saved at least two laps and have stopped the
When you turn off the engine, the RACETIMER RACETIMER.
will be reset to “0” after 30 seconds. All laps X Press button V or U repeatedly until
are deleted. the AMG menu appears in the
X Press button & repeatedly until the lap
analysis appears in the multifunction
display.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 100
100 Control system
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The X Switch on the audio system (Y page 112)
fastest lap is indicated by flashing and select radio.
symbol :. Vehicles with COMAND system:
Refer to separate COMAND system
the currently tuned station appears in the
Controls in detail
: Lap number
; Lap time
= Maximum speed during lap
? Lap length
A Average speed during lap
Example illustration
X Press button & or * to see other lap : Wave band setting and stored memory
analyses. position
; Station frequency
Audio/DVD menu X Selecting next or previous stored

station: Press button * or & briefly
The functions in the Audio/DVD menu to select a stored station.
operate the audio or video equipment which
X Selecting next or previous station in the
you have currently switched on.
station list: Press and hold button * or
The following functions are available: & to select a station.
RSelecting radio station (Y page 100) X Selecting next or previous station in
ROperating audio devices/audio media wave band (Only if no station list is
(Y page 100) available): Press and hold button * or
ROperating video DVD (Y page 101) & to select a station.
You can only store new stations using the
If no audio equipment is currently switched
corresponding feature on the radio
on, the message AUDIO Off appears in the
(Y page 124).
Vehicles with COMAND system:
Selecting radio station Refer to separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
i The SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio is treated
as a radio application. Operating audio devices/audio media
For more information on satellite radio X Switch on the audio system and select the
operation, see “Satellite radio” audio device (Y page 131) or audio media
(Y page 125). (Y page 139).
Vehicles with COMAND system: Vehicles with COMAND system:
Refer to separate COMAND system
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 101
Control system 101
Refer to separate COMAND system Navigation menu

The Navigation menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
the Navigation menu appears in the
The message shown in the multifunction
Controls in detail
display depends on the status of the
navigation system:
RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message NAVI Off appears in the
: Disc number RWith the COMAND system switched on
; Current track but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the
X Selecting next or previous track: Press name of the street currently traveled on
button * or & briefly. appear in the multifunction display.
X Selecting a track from the track list RWith the COMAND system switched on
(quick search): Press and hold button and route guidance activated, the
* or &. direction of travel and maneuver
The current track does not appear during instructions appear in the multifunction
Audio AUX mode operation. display.
Please refer to separate COMAND system
Operating video DVD operating instructions for instructions on how
to activate the route guidance system.
This function is only available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system.
X Switch on the COMAND system and select Vehicle status message memory
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND menu
system operating instructions.
Use the Vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
messages that may be stored in the memory.
Such messages appear in the multifunction
display and are based on conditions or
system status the vehicle’s system has
recorded.
The Vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if messages have been stored.
G Warning!
: Disc number Malfunction and warning messages are only
; Current scene indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
X Press button * or & to select a malfunction and warning messages are
scene.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 102
102 Control system
simply a reminder with respect to the Settings menu

operation of certain systems. They do not
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s Introduction
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s In the Settings menu there are two
operating safety. Have all required functions: The function To reset, push
maintenance and safety checks performed on reset button for 3 seconds, with which
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized you can reset all the settings to the original
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the factory settings and a collection of submenus
Controls in detail
malfunction and warning messages. with which you can make individual settings
for your vehicle.
The following settings and submenus are
the Vehicle status message memory available in the Settings menu:
menu appears in the multifunction display.
RResetting to factory settings
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of (Y page 102)
messages appears in the multifunction RSubmenus in the Settings menu
display. (Y page 103)
RInstrument cluster submenu
(Y page 103)
RTime/Date submenu (Y page 105)
RLighting submenu (Y page 105)
RVehicle submenu (Y page 108)
RConvenience submenu (Y page 108)
: Number of recorded status messages
X Press button & or *. Resetting to factory settings

The stored messages will now be displayed You can reset the settings of all submenus to
in the order in which they have occurred. the factory settings.
For malfunction and warning messages, For safety reasons, the function Headlamp
see “Vehicle status messages in the Mode in the Lighting submenu cannot be
multifunction display” (Y page 236). reset while driving.
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction the Settings menu appears in the
display when the SmartKey in the starter multifunction display.
switch is turned to position 0 or removed
from the starter switch.
Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
status message memory will be cleared when
you switch off the ignition.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 103
Control system 103
X Press the reset button . in the instrument * to move to the previous function
cluster for approximately 3 seconds. within that submenu.
The message Reset to factory X Use button W or X to change the
settings? Push reset button to settings of the respective function.
confirm appears in the multifunction The following lists show what settings can be
display. changed within the various menus. Detailed
X Press the reset button . once more. instructions on making individual settings can
The settings of all the submenus will be be found on the following pages.
Controls in detail
reset to factory settings.
Instrument cluster submenu
The settings you have changed will not be RSelecting speedometer display mode
reset unless you confirm the action by
(Y page 104)
pressing the reset button . a second time.
After approximately 5 seconds, the RSelecting language (Y page 104)
Settings menu reappears in the RSelecting display (digital speedometer or
multifunction display. outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 104)
Submenus in the Settings menu
Time/Date submenu
X Press button V or U repeatedly until RSetting the time (Y page 105)
the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display. RSetting the date (Y page 105)
X Press button &.
Lighting submenu
The collection of the submenus appears in
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
the multifunction display. There are more
submenus than can be displayed or off (USA only) (Y page 106)
simultaneously. RSwitching locator lighting on or off
(Y page 106)
RSwitching night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or
off (Y page 107)
RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
on or off (Y page 107)
X Press button X. Vehicle submenu

RSwitching automatic central locking on or
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu. off (Y page 108)
X Scroll down with button X, scroll up
Convenience submenu
with button W. RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
X With the selection marker on the desired (Y page 108)
submenu, use button & to access the
individual functions within that submenu. Instrument cluster submenu
X Once within the submenu, use button
& to move to the next function or button Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Instr.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 104
104 Control system
Cluster submenu to change the instrument X Move the selection marker with button
cluster display settings. W or X to the Instr. Cluster
The following functions are available: submenu.
RSelecting X Press button & or * repeatedly until
speedometer display mode
(Y page 104) the message Language appears in the
RSelecting language (Y page 104) The selection marker is on the current
RSelecting display (digital speedometer or setting.
Controls in detail
outside temperature) for status indicator

(Y page 104)
Selecting speedometer display mode

X Press button &.
X Press button W or X to select the
X Move the selection marker with button
language to be used for the multifunction
W or X to the Instr. Cluster display messages.
submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until Selecting display (digital speedometer or
the message Display Unit Speed-/ outside temperature) for status indicator
Odometer appears in the multifunction X Press button V or U repeatedly until
display. the Settings menu appears in the
The selection marker is on the current multifunction display.
setting. X Press button &.
W or X to the Instr. Cluster
submenu.
the message Select Display appears in
The selection marker is on the current
X Press button W or X to set setting.
speedometer unit to Km or Miles.
Selecting language
X Press button &.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 105
Control system 105
X Press button W or X to select the

desired setting.
The selected display is then shown
continuously in the status indicator (lower
display).
The other display now appears in the
Standard display menu (Y page 96).
Example illustration for setting the hour
Controls in detail
Time/Date submenu X Press button W or X to set the hours
or minute(s).
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
X Press reset button . to confirm.
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
submenu to change the time and date display
Setting the date
settings.
The following functions are available:
RSetting the time (Y page 105) multifunction display.
RSetting the date (Y page 105) X Press button &.
Setting the time
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
This function is only available in vehicles with
audio system.
the message Set Date Month, Set Date
Vehicles with COMAND system:
Day, or Set Date Year appears in the
For information on setting the time in the
COMAND system, refer to the separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
setting.
X Press button &.
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
the message Time-Hours Press R To Example illustration for setting the month
Confirm or Time-Minute(s) Press R X Press button W or X to set the
To Confirm appears in the multifunction
month, day, or year.
display.
setting. Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 106
106 Control system
The following functions are available: RLicense plate lamps

RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on RSide marker lamps
or off (USA only) (Y page 106) For more information on the daytime running
RSwitching locator lighting on or off lamp mode, see (Y page 72).
(Y page 106) For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
RSwitching night security illumination of all submenus to the factory settings while
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or driving (Y page 102) will not deactivate the
Controls in detail
off (Y page 107) daytime running lamp mode.

RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off The following message appears in the
on or off (Y page 107) multifunction display:
Lighting Cannot be completely reset
Switching daytime running lamp mode on to factory settings while driving.
or off (USA only)
Switching locator lighting on or off
With the locator lighting feature activated and
the Settings menu appears in the the exterior lamp switch in position Ã, the
multifunction display. following lamps will come on during darkness
X Press button &. when the vehicle is unlocked using button
X Move the selection marker with button % on the SmartKey:
W or X to the Lighting submenu. RParking lamps
X Press button & or * repeatedly until RTail lamps
the message Headlamp Mode appears in RLicense plate lamps
The selection marker is on the current RSide marker lamps
setting. RFront fog lamps
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
door is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
lamps will go out automatically after
approximately 40 seconds.
X Press button W or X to select the Settings menu appears in the
manual operation (Manual) or daytime multifunction display.
running lamp mode (Constant). X Press button &.
With daytime running lamp mode switched on X Move the selection marker with button
and the exterior lamp switch in
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
position $ or Ã, the low-beam
headlamps are switched on when the engine
is running. the message Surround Lighting
Function appears in the multifunction
In low ambient light conditions the following
display.
lamps will come on additionally:
RParking lamps setting.
RTail lamps
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 107
Control system 107

the message Headlamps Delayed Shut-
off appears in the multifunction display.
setting.
X Press button W or X to switch the
Controls in detail
locator lighting function On or Off.
Ã when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activated.
Switching night security illumination

(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on
or off X Press button W or X to switch the
Use this function to set whether you would headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
like the exterior lamps to remain on for Off.
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
vehicle and closing all doors. Ã before turning off the engine.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
activated and the exterior lamp switch in activated.
position Ã before the engine is turned off, You can temporarily deactivate the
the following lamps will come on when the headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
engine is turned off:
X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
RParking lamps SmartKey in the starter switch to position
RTail lamps 0.
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to
position 0.
RSide marker lamps The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
RFront fog lamps deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
you start the engine.
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
open a door or do not close an opened door, Switching interior lighting delayed shut-
the lamps will automatically go out after off on or off
60 seconds.
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain on for
the Settings menu appears in the 10 seconds during darkness after you have
multifunction display. removed the SmartKey from the starter
X Press button &. switch.
X Press button &.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 108
108 Control system

the message Interior Lighting
Delayed Shut-off appears in the
setting. X Press button W or X to switch the
Controls in detail
automatic central locking On or Off.
Convenience submenu
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Convenience
submenu to activate the easy-entry/exit
feature.
X Press button W or X to switch the
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
On or Off. Use this function to activate and deactivate
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 67).
Vehicle submenu G Warning!
Access the Vehicle submenu via the You must make sure no one can become
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu trapped or injured by the moving steering
to set the automatic central locking. wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
Switching automatic central locking on or To stop steering wheel movement do one of
off the following:
Use this function to switch the automatic RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
central locking on or off. With the automatic
RPress one of the memory position buttons.
central locking activated, the vehicle is
locked centrally at a vehicle speed of RPress memory button M.
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
Do not leave children unattended in the
X Press button V or U repeatedly until vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
the Settings menu appears in the Children could open the driver’s door and
multifunction display. unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
X Press button &. feature, which could result in an accident
X Move the selection marker with button and/or serious personal injury.
W or X to the Vehicle submenu.
the message Automatic Door Lock multifunction display.
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press button &.
setting.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 109
Control system 109

W or X to the Convenience
submenu.
the message Easy-entry Function
: Statistics called up: since start
setting.
Controls in detail
; Time elapsed since start
= Average fuel consumption since start
? Average speed since start
A Distance driven since start
All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
X Press button W or X to activate (On) position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
or deactivate (Off) the easy-entry/exit Resetting will not occur if you turn the
feature. SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics since last

reset
Use the Trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle. X Press button U or V repeatedly until
The following information is available: the message From Start appears in the
RFuel consumption statistics since start
(Y page 109)
the message From Reset appears in the
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 109)
RResetting fuel consumption statistics
(Y page 110)
RDistance to empty (Y page 110)
Fuel consumption statistics since start

X Press button U or V repeatedly until : Statistics called up: since last reset
the message From Start appears in the ; Time elapsed since last reset
= Average fuel consumption since last reset
? Average speed since last reset
A Distance driven since last reset
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 110
110 Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics telephone call. If you choose to use the
X Press button U or V repeatedly until telephone while driving, please use the hands-
free device and only use the telephone when
the message From Start appears in the
weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
the reading that you want to reset appears
in the multifunction display. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Controls in detail
X Press and hold the reset button . in the

instrument cluster until the respective 14 m) every second.
values are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset You can connect your telephone to the audio
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or system (Y page 146) or to the COMAND
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first. system via Bluetooth®, see separate
Distance to empty X Switch on the audio system (Y page 117)
X Press button U or V repeatedly until or the COMAND system, see separate

the message From Start appears in the
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
the Telephone menu appears in the
the message Range: appears in the
One of the following messages will appear
in the multifunction display:
The calculated remaining driving range
RNo Service: No network is available.
based on the current fuel tank level
appears in the multifunction display. RBluetooth Ready: The telephone has
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a not been connected to the audio system
vehicle at the fuel pump C appears or COMAND system via Bluetooth® yet.
instead of the remaining driving range. X Connect the telephone to the audio
system or COMAND system via
Bluetooth®.
RReady or name of the network provider
(if available): The telephone has found a
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.
Answering a call
Telephone menu
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
G Warning! you can answer a call at any time. In the
A driver’s attention to the road must always multifunction display you will then see the
be his/her primary focus when driving. For following message, or if available, the caller
your safety and the safety of others, we ID (number or name):
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 111
Control system 111
X Press button 6.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
your phone book) you are calling will
X Press button 6. appear in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
You have answered the call. The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming or
call X Press button ~ if you do not want to
X Press button ~. make the call.
Dialing a number from the phone book

When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book. You can add new numbers to the
phone book with the telephone
(Y page 153). Vehicles with COMAND, see
separate operating instructions. Redialing
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
The control system stores the most recently
the Telephone menu appears in the dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
multifunction display. need to search through your entire phone
X Press button & or * repeatedly until book.
the desired name appears in the X Press button U or V repeatedly until
multifunction display. the Telephone menu and the standby
If you press and hold button & or message appears in the multifunction
* for longer than 1 second, the system display.
scrolls rapidly through the list of names X Press button 6.
until you release the button again. The first number in the redial memory
The stored names are displayed in appears in the multifunction display.
alphabetical order.
the desired number or name appears in the
X Press button 6.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
: Selected name from the phone book
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 112
112 Audio system
Audio system We recommend that you have any service

work on electronic components carried out at
Audio and telephone operation an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
These instructions are intended to help you
become familiar with your Mercedes-Benz
audio system. They contain useful tips and a Audio system components
detailed description of the user functions.
With the audio system you can operate the
G Warning!
Controls in detail
following main functions:

In order to avoid distraction which could lead RAudio function with the radio, Satellite
to an accident, the driver should enter system radio, disc (CD audio or MP3 mode), Audio
settings with the vehicle at a standstill and AUX and external audio devices
operate the system only when road and traffic
Rthe mobile phone with the phone book
conditions permit. Always pay full attention to
traffic conditions first before operating Rvarious system settings
system controls while driving. In addition, the audio system can also be
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph operated with the multifunction steering
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is wheel (Y page 94).
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately In these instructions, the keypad (right side
14 m) every second. of audio control unit) and the function buttons
are referred to as “buttons”.
Operating safety Audio control unit

G Warning! With the audio control unit you can
Any alterations made to electronic Rswitch the audio system on/off
components can cause malfunctions.
Radjust the volume
The radio, amplifier, CD changer, satellite
radio, and telephone are interconnected. Rselect the operating modes
When one of the components is not Renter telephone numbers and accept,
operational or has not been removed/ reject, initiate and end telephone calls
replaced properly, the function of other
Rload and eject CDs
components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 113
Audio system 113
Audio control unit overview
Controls in detail
Item D Keypad
: Switching to radio mode Tuning to a station via the station
(Y page 122) memory (Y page 123)
Calling up wave bands Storing stations manually
(Y page 122) (Y page 124)
Switching on Sat mode Entering a passcode (Y page 150)
(Y page 127) Entering a phone number
(Y page 156)
; Calling up the System Settings menu Sending DTMF tones (Y page 159)
(Y page 120)
CD changer: Selecting a CD
= Switching to CD and MP3 mode (Y page 137)
(Y page 131) or media interface CD: Selecting a track (Y page 138)
mode (Y page 139)
E Back button
? Switching to telephone mode
(Y page 146) F Clear button for deleting digits or
entire entries (Y page 157)
A Load/eject button (Y page 134)
G Confirmation button
B Disc slot
H Navigation buttons for moving within
C Display menus and for exiting menus
I Adjusting the volume (Y page 117)
J Switching audio system on/off
(Y page 117)
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 114
114 Audio system
K Tuning to a station via station search

(Y page 123)
Fast rewind (Y page 138)
Skipping backwards to a track
(Y page 138)
L Tuning to a station via station search
(Y page 123)
Controls in detail
Fast forward (Y page 138) Example illustration: Radio selected

Skipping forwards to a track Status line = displays the current settings
(Y page 138) for radio and telephone mode.
You can request the required function using
M Rejecting a call (Y page 158) menu bar :.
Ending an active call (Y page 158)
The selection is made using buttons
N Confirming a passcode 9:;=.
(Y page 150) Mobile phone readiness is indicated by
Accepting a call (Y page 158) additional information being shown in the
Initiating a call (Y page 156) status line:
Redial (Y page 157) RIn the telephone main menu: Name of the
Bluetooth® device (calls made and
O Switching sound on/off
received via the Bluetooth® interface)
(Y page 118)
(Y page 151).
Switching hands-free microphone
RMobile phone network signal strength
on/off (Y page 158)
r. This information will only be shown
P Sound settings (Y page 118) with suitable mobile phones.
RThe receiver symbol indicates whether a
Audio display call is active or not.
! Avoid touching the audio display at all ¢ No active call
times. The display has a very sensitive high- ö Active call
gloss surface, there is a risk of it being In this example, the audio main function is set
scratched. Do not press directly in the to the FM radio mode and main area ; is
display face. Otherwise, the audio display active.
will be damaged.
i The layout of the menus may vary
i For information about cleaning and care depending on your vehicle’s equipment.
of the audio display, see “Audio or This manual shows the menus for a fully
COMAND display” (Y page 231). equipped vehicle.
Display Instrument cluster multifunction

The currently selected mode and the display
associated menus are shown on the audio
display. The audio display is divided into Please refer to the “Control system” section
several areas. of this manual (Y page 93) for function
descriptions and operation of the instrument
cluster multifunction display and
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 115
Audio system 115
multifunction steering wheel buttons as they

relate to audio functions described in this
section.
Menu
The table below shows the structure of the
modes and their menus. Each mode has a
Controls in detail
basic menu. Each menu item in turn has Illustration: Radio function basic menu
several submenu items. X Moving to the menu bar: Press
Button Mode/Menu button :.
$ Radio mode
Horizontal menus
Radio (FM/AM) (Y page 121)
Weather Band (Y page 121)
Satellite radio (Y page 125)
h Disc mode
CD/MP3 mode (Y page 131)
Media interface operation
(Y page 139) X Moving through the menu bar: Press
button = or ;.
Audio AUX mode (Y page 145)
The currently selected item is highlighted.
% Telephone mode X Confirming the selected menu item:
Telephone mode (Y page 146) Press button 9.

X Exiting the menu bar without
i System menu confirming a selection: Press button
System settings (Y page 119) 9 or k.
Display on/off (Y page 120) Vertical submenus
Calling up an operating mode

X Press the respective button ($, h,
%, or i) on the audio control unit.
The basic menu of the selected mode
appears in the audio display. The main area
is active. The active area is highlighted.
i The following screens show the audio
display’s day design. The appearance of the
highlighted items in the menu will vary
depending on the display design.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 116
116 Audio system
X Moving through the submenu: Press

button 9 or :.
The currently selected item is highlighted.
X Confirming the selected submenu
item: Press button 9.
X Exiting the submenu without
confirming a selection: Press button
= or ;.
Controls in detail
X Selecting Radio in the menu bar: Press

Back button button =.
X Moving to the superordinate menu:
Press back button k briefly.
X Moving to the main menu of the current
operating mode: Press and hold back
button k.
Clear button
Use clear button 2 for deleting digit or X Confirming selection: Press button 9.
entire entries (Y page 157). The Radio menu is selected and a list of
X Deleting a single digit: Press button submenus appears.
2 briefly.
X Deleting entire entry: Press and hold
button 2.
Example of how to use the audio system

Example: direct frequency input,
FM 104.5 MHz.
$ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency X Enter Frequency is selected.
The individual steps for the above-mentioned X Confirming selection: Press button 9.
example are described below. The Enter Frequency submenu appears.
X Press button $ on audio control unit
repeatedly until desired wave band FM has
been selected.
X Switching to the menu bar: Press
button :.
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in

the respective wave band which is outside
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 117
Audio system 117
the frequency range. Frequencies within X Switching on: Press push button q.
the current frequency range, but outside or
the current frequency step width are X If the audio system was on as you switched
rounded to the next lower allowed off the ignition, turn the SmartKey in the
frequency. starter switch to position 1.
X Enter 1045 with the keypad on the audio The audio system will come back on with
control unit. the last selected function.
The audio system tunes in to the frequency
Controls in detail
i If the audio system is switched on without
entered.
the SmartKey in the starter switch, it will
automatically switch off again after
approximately 30 minutes.
Operation
X Switching off: Press push button q.
In the following description, an operation step
is described as in the example below. or
X $ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency
position 0 and remove SmartKey from
is the short for starter switch.
repeatedly until desired wave band has i Should excessively high temperatures
been selected. occur while the audio system is being
operated, Temperature Too High -
X Press button :.
Device switching off now. will appear
X Press button = to select Radio. in the audio display, after which the audio
X Press button 9. system will be switched off for a cooling-
The Radio menu is selected and a list of down period.
submenus appears.
X Enter Frequency is selected. If it is not
i When you switch off the audio system,
you also switch off the currently playing
selected, press button 9 to select
audio source. Also, telephone operation via
Enter Frequency.
the audio control unit is not possible.
X Press button 9.
The Enter Frequency submenu appears Adjusting volume
in the audio display.
Switching audio system on or off
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 118
118 Audio system
X Adjusting: Turn rotary control :. Adjusting bass or treble

The volume will increase or decrease X J Q Bass or Treble.
depending on the direction turned.
or
Adjusting volume for telephone calls X Select Sound Q Bass or Treble.
In hands-free mode, you can adjust the A longer and brighter bar indicates the
volume of a telephone call while the call is previously stored setting. The red pointer
currently active. indicates the currently selected setting.
Controls in detail
During a telephone call:

X Turn rotary control :.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i The volume of the audio system or a
telephone call can also be adjusted by
pressing the button W or X on the
multifunction steering wheel (Y page 94). Example for adjusting bass
X Changing setting: Press button 9
Sound
or : until desired treble or bass setting
X Switching on/off: Press button 8 on is reached.
the audio control unit (Y page 113). X Saving setting: Press button 9 or k.
The sound of the current audio source is The setting is stored and the menu is
switched on or off. exited.
i When the sound is switched off, the Adjusting balance
symbol 8 appears in the status line.
Balance is used to determine whether the
If you change the audio source, or alter the sound focus should be shifted toward the
volume, the sound is automatically driver’s side or the passenger side.
switched on again.
X J Q Balance.
In CD and MP3 mode, button 8
switches the pause function on or off. or
X Select Sound Q Balance.
Selecting sound settings The current setting is indicated by a red

line.
You can select different bass and treble
settings for each individual audio source. The
particular Sound menu can be opened from
the basic menu for the desired operating
mode, or by pressing the button J on the
audio control unit.
Example:
$ Q Sound Q Bass
Adjusting balance
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 119
Audio system 119
X Changing setting: Press button = X Saving setting: Press button 9.

or ; until desired balance setting is The setting is stored and the menu is
achieved. exited.
X Saving setting: Press button 9 or k. X Exiting menu without saving: Press
The balance setting is stored for all audio button = or ;.
sources and the menu is exited.
i Please note the following:
RFor an optimal sound experience from all
Surround sound
Controls in detail
seats, the balance should be adjusted to
If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/ the center setting with Logic 7® switched
kardon Logic 7® Surround Sound system, you on.
can choose between Logic7® On and RThe best sound results are achieved
Logic7® Off for surround sound. when playing high-quality audio CDs.
harman/kardon Logic 7® Surround Sound is RFor MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
available for the following operating modes:
least 128 kbit/s.
RRadio (FM only) RSurround playback cannot be activated
RSatellite radio in mono-signal sources as AM or
RCD audio Weatherband. It will not function for
mono-signal sources as, e.g. mono audio
RMP3
tracks on some specific audio CDs.
RMedia interface RIn the case of poor radio reception
RAUX quality, e.g. during long tunnel passages,
Logic 7® should be switched off, as
i By selecting Logic7® Off, all compatible
otherwise a dynamic switchover from
formats are played back as they are stereo to mono and thus temporary
present on the medium. sound characteristic shifts can occur.
Adjusting surround sound RWith certain stereo recordings, the
With surround sound, you can choose resulting sound characteristic may
between Logic7® On and Logic7® Off. deviate from conventional stereo
X J Q Sound.
playback.
or
X Select Sound Q Sound.
SYS menu
System settings menu overview
Menu
System Settings
Language (Y page 121)
Display (Y page 120)
X Changing setting: Press button 9. Brightness
X Press button 9 or : to switch Day Mode
Logic 7® on or off.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 120
120 Audio system
X Switching display on: Press button 9,

Menu
button k, or either of the navigation
Night Mode buttons =, ;, 9, :.
Automatic or
X Press button q.
Bluetooth® (Y page 120) The System menu appears.
Reset (Y page 121) i Pressing any of the function buttons, for
Controls in detail
Display off (Y page 120) example button h, will also switch on

the display. The system will then switch to
Calling up the System Settings menu the respective function.
X Press button i. Bluetooth® settings

The System menu appears.
General information about Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® technology is the standard for
short-range wireless technologies, suitable
for transmitting voice and data. It is possible
to connect Bluetooth® devices wirelessly.
Bluetooth® can be used to exchange vCards
or to make calls using a hands-free device.
Bluetooth® technology uses the freely
: Calling up menu options available ISM (Industrial Scientific Medical)
; Switching off display wave band that works at 2.45 GHz.
Bluetooth® works within a range of up to 33 ft
Display settings (10 m).
You can adapt the brightness of the audio Activate or deactivate Bluetooth®
display to the prevailing light conditions. X i Q System Settings Q
Setting the display design Bluetooth Q Activate Bluetooth.
X i Q System Settings Q Display.
X Select Brightness, Day Mode, Night
Mode or Automatic.
i When you select Brightness, a scale
appears on which you can set the
brightness manually.
In the Automatic setting, the audio system
analyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor You have activated or deactivated
and switches between the display designs Bluetooth®. A checkmark O appears when
automatically.
Bluetooth® is activated.
Switching display on/off
X Switching display off: Select Display
Off.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 121
Audio system 121
Reset Radio operation

i You can reset the audio system back to G Warning!
its factory settings. In this case, all personal Please devote your attention first and
data (e.g. address book entries, call lists, foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
paired mobile phones, and presets) are
Before your journey, please familiarize
deleted. We recommend that you reset the
yourself with the radio functions.
values before selling your vehicle.
Only use the audio system when road and
Controls in detail
X i Q System Settings Q Reset. traffic conditions permit you to do so.
A prompt appears asking whether you Otherwise you could be involved in an
really want to reset. accident in which you or others could be
X Select Yes or No. injured.
If you select Yes another prompt will
appear asking whether you really want to ! Do not attach metallic window tinting film
reset. to the inside or outside of windows which
X Select Yes or No. are fitted with an aerial. Obstructing the
If you select Yes, the audio system will be metallic aerial structure on the window will
reset and restarted. interfere with radio reception. Cutting the
film on the window can permanently
damage the aerial wires.
Setting the system language
X i Q System Settings Q i The radio mode is interrupted by an
Language. incoming call on the mobile phone
(Y page 146).
Menu overview
i The components and operating principles
of the audio system can be found on
(Y page 112) and (Y page 116). Information
about sound settings can be found on
(Y page 118).
The language list appears. A dot # in front Menu Function
of an entry indicates the current setting.
Radio Enter frequency
X Changing setting: Press button 9
(except Weather
or : to select desired language. Station information
Band/satellite
X Saving setting: Press button 9. radio) (in FM wave band
The setting is stored and the menu is only)
exited. Presets Autostore (except
X Exiting menu without saving: Press (except Weather satellite radio)
button =. Band)
List of stored
When choosing setting Language
stations
Synchronization, the audio system
switches to the same language that is used in Channel List of channels
the multifunction display. (only Weather Band)
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 122
122 Audio system
Menu Function Information displayed in the status line

(example)
Sound Treble
Station name (e.g. WNYC) and mobile phone
Bass readiness are displayed in the status line.
Mobile phone readiness is indicated by
Balance
additional information being shown:
Surround Sound RMobile phone network signal strength
Controls in detail
r
Switching to radio mode RReceiver symbol ¢ ö
X Press button $ on audio control unit.
The radio basic menu appears in the audio Calling up wave bands
display. The radio switches to the last
station you have listened to. You can select FM, AM, and WB wave bands
as well as the Sat mode (Y page 125). When
Weather Band will automatically tune to the
you have selected the Sat mode, pressing
strongest station in the area.
button $ will switch back to FM radio
mode.
Wave band Frequency
FM 87.7......107.9 MHz
AM 530.......1710 KHz
WB (Weather Band) Weather channels
Illustration: Radio mode in FM wave band Satellite radio Satellite radio

: Status line channels
; Station name or other information from
the station X Press button $ on audio control unit
= Station frequency and stored position repeatedly until the desired wave band has
? Main area with wave band been selected.
The FM, AM, and WB wave bands and the
i Station name or other information ;, satellite radio mode are called up one after
available for the FM wave band, can only be another.
seen when the station transmits the name The wave band currently selected appears
or other information and the function Show in the main area of the audio display. The
Station Info in the Radio menu is last selected station in the selected wave
activated. band is heard.
X $ Q Radio Q Show Station
Info Selecting a station/channel
In the WB wave band, the audio system The following functions are available:
displays the channel number, e.g.
RStation search function
Channel 6, instead of the station names
and/or frequency. RChannel list (Weather Band/satellite radio)
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 123
Audio system 123
RStation memory (except Weather Band) X Select a station in the memory menu using
RManual frequency entry (except Weather the buttons 9 and : and press 9.
Band/satellite radio) or
X Press desired station button j to
For using satellite radio see (Y page 125).
The station search proceeds in the following x, with the keypad in audio control unit
frequency increments: briefly.
R200 kHz in FM range Tuning to a station by entering the
Controls in detail
R10 kHz in AM range frequency manually
i This function is not available for Weather
Tuning to a station/channel via station/
Band/satellite radio.
channel search function
X $ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency
i The search function searches for the next
receivable station in the FM or AM wave The menu for manual frequency entry
band. In Weather Band (WB) the search appears.
function switches to the next channel in the
channel list. For tuning to a station/
channel you can also use the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel, see
Audio/DVD menu (Y page 100).
repeatedly until the FM/AM/WB wave
band is selected.
X Press buttons EF or =; on or
audio control unit. X Press button l on the keypad in audio
Depending on the pressed button, the control unit briefly.
system searches downward or upward and The Enter Frequency submenu appears.
stops at the next station/channel.
Selecting a station using station memory

i This function is not available for Weather
Band.
repeatedly until desired wave band has
been selected.
X Select Presets.
The memory menu appears. The dot # in
front of a memory position indicates that
the currently selected station is saved
there.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 124
124 Audio system
X Entering frequency with keypad: Enter

desired frequency with buttons j to
x on the keypad in audio control unit.
The audio system tunes in to the frequency
entered.
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in
the respective wave band which is outside
Controls in detail
the frequency range.

The dot # in front of a memory position
X Exiting menu without making an entry: indicates that the currently tuned station is
Press button k. stored there.
X Selecting a memory position: Press
Storing stations button 9 or :.
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in X Storing a station to a selected memory
the memory. position: Press and hold button 9 until a
brief signal tone sounds.
i If you select a memory preset which is
already in use, it will be overwritten by the or
new station. X Press and hold desired station button
j to x on keypad, until a brief signal
Storing stations manually with keypad tone sounds.
X Tune in desired station. The station is stored.
The basic menu appears in the audio
display. Autostore – automatic station memory
X Press and hold desired station button i This function is not available for Weather
j to x until a brief signal tone Band/satellite radio. The autostore
sounds. function automatically assigns receivable
The station is stored. stations to the memory. The stations are
sorted according to reception quality at the
Storing stations manually with station moment of performing the autostore. The
memory menu stations which were stored in the station
X Tune in desired station. memory manually are overwritten in this
The basic menu appears in the audio process. If less than ten stations are found,
display. the remaining entries are left empty.
X Press button 9 when the main area is X Press button $ on audio control unit
active. repeatedly until desired wave band has
or been selected.
X Select Presets. The basic menu appears in the audio
The station memory display appears in the display.
audio display. X Press button 9 when the main area is
active.
or
X Select Presets.
The station memory display appears in the
audio display.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 125
Audio system 125
X Press button 9 or : to select Menu Submenu

Autostore.
X Press button 9. Sat Channel List
The audio system searches for receivable Channel Entry
stations. A corresponding message is
displayed. The available stations are Service
automatically stored in the station Presets Station presets
memory. The first received station will be
Controls in detail
automatically played. Info Information menu (if
X Canceling storage procedure: Select available)
Cancel and press 9 while the message Category (Cat.) All channels
Rewriting memory... is being displayed.
Select category
Displaying information Sound Treble
You can display program information or other Bass
additional information when provided by the
radio station you are listening to. Balance
X Press button m. Surround Sound
The available information appears. The
content and scope of the information Satellite radio
depends on the radio station.
X Closing screen: Press button m, k, i Additional satellite radio equipment and a
=, ;, or 9. subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio
service provider are required for the
satellite radio operation described in this
Satellite radio chapter.
G Warning! Center for details and availability for your
Please devote your attention first and vehicle.
foremost to the traffic situation you are in. SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio provides over
Before your journey, please familiarize 130 channels of digital-quality radio,
yourself with the radio functions. including 100 % commercial-free music,
Only use the audio system when road and sports, news and entertainment. SIRIUS XM
traffic conditions permit you to do so. Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-power
Otherwise you could be involved in an satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day,
accident in which you or others could be coast to coast, in the contiguous U. S. and
injured. Canada.
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming
Submenu overview is available for a monthly subscription fee.
For more information and service availability
i The components and operating principles call the SIRIUS XM Service Center at
of the audio system can be found on 1-888-539-7474 (Y page 130), or visit
(Y page 112) and (Y page 116). www.sirius.com (USA) or
www.siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 126
126 Audio system
i Note that categories and channels shown

in illustrations are dependent on
programming content delivered by the
service provider. Programming content is
subject to change. Therefore, channels and
categories shown in illustrations and
descriptions contained in this manual may
differ from the channels and categories
Controls in detail
delivered by the service provider.

X Closing screen: Press button 9 or k.
i Satellite radio service may be unavailable X Activating satellite radio service:
or interrupted from time to time for a Contact satellite radio service provider at
variety of reasons, such as environmental the telephone number displayed in the
or topographic conditions and other things service display.
we cannot control. Service might also not
After the connection is made:
be available in certain places (e.g. in
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees, X Follow the instructions given by the
or within or next to buildings) or near other operator.
obstructions. In such situations, the The activation process may take up to
satellite radio’s main menu shows the No 10 minutes. If it is successful, you will see
Service screen. At this point, the radio’s the display with the message Updating
functions are restricted. Channels... followed by the satellite
radio basic menu.
Subscribing to satellite radio i Activating the satellite radio service might
X Press button $ on audio control unit not be available in certain places (e.g. in
repeatedly until Sat is selected. tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,
The following conditions are possible: or within or next to buildings). If a
subscription is not included with system
RSatellite radio service is not activated purchase, credit card information is
(only the preview channel is displayed). required to activate your account.
RSatellite radio service is activated. The activation process takes
approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling
i If a satellite receiver is not installed or not the SIRIUS XM Service Center.
properly installed: If a satellite receiver is not installed or not
The message Device Unavailable will properly installed: The message Device
appear. Unavailable will appear.
If the satellite radio service is not activated,
the “SIRIUS Preview” display appears. i It is also possible to activate the satellite
Satellite radio service is not activated radio service online. To do so please visit
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio’s website at
The telephone number of the SIRIUS XM
www.sirius.com (USA) or
Service Center and the twelve-digit electronic
www.siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular
receiver are required when calling the SIRIUS
XM Service Center for an activation request.
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Sat
Q Service.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 127
Audio system 127
Preview Channel A Sound settings

B Selecting program category
C Current artist and title
D Channel information
E Preset options
F Satellite radio options
Controls in detail
i Main area : displays only channels that
you have subscribed to. Which channels
i If the satellite radio service has not been are shown depends on the selected
subscribed to, only the preview channel is program category ;. Only the currently
available. You cannot tune in another selected channel ? is displayed.
channel. If you try to do this, the message Note that categories and channels shown
Call SIRIUS to activate: appears. in illustrations are dependent on
programming content delivered by the
Satellite radio service is activated service provider. Programming content is
The basic satellite radio menu appears. You subject to change.
will hear the last tuned channel, provided that Therefore, channel and categories shown
it can be received. in illustrations and descriptions contained
in this manual may differ from the channels
Switching on Sat mode and categories delivered by the service
For important subscription information see provider.
“Subscribing to satellite radio” (Y page 126).
Selecting program category
repeatedly until Sat is selected. i The channels are categorized. Categories
The message No Service will appear when allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
the signal is not available. After the audio a certain type of program.
system acquires the signal, the satellite Satellite radio channels are split up into
radio basic menu will appear. The last categories such as News, Sports, Rock, or
tuned station will begin to play. Country, if available. The category list is
sorted alphabetically.
Main satellite radio menu
X Calling up category list: $
(repeatedly, if necessary) Q Cat.
or
X In Sat mode, press button = or ;
until Cat. is highlighted and press button
9.
The category list appears.
: Main area with channel display

; Selected program category
= Number of selected channel
? Selected channel
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 128
128 Audio system
X Selecting a category: Press button 9 multifunction steering wheel, see “Audio

or :. menu” (Y page 100).
X Setting the selected category: Press
Tuning in channels using manual channel
button 9. number entry
The selected program category
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Sat
(alphabetical order) will appear in the audio
display. The last tuned channel in the new Q Enter Channel.
category will begin to play. The menu for manual channel number entry
Controls in detail
appears.
When searching, tuning in, or selecting
from the channel list, the All Channels or
option accesses all of your subscribed X In Sat mode, press button l on the
channels. keypad in audio control unit briefly.
X Channel number entry with keypad:
i When you select the category All
Enter desired channel number with buttons
Channels, you have access to all the j to x with the keypad in audio
channels you subscribed to, regardless of
control unit briefly.
category.
Further operation depends on whether the
selected channel number is valid or if the
Tuning in channels
channel is included in your subscription.
You have the following selection options: X Exiting menu without making an entry:
Rthe channel search function Press button k.
Rthe manual channel number entry Channel number is valid and channel is
Rthe
included in subscription: The audio system
channel list
tunes in the channel entered.
Rthe channel presets Channel number is invalid: The message
Invalid Channel appears in the audio
Tuning in channels using channel search
display.
function
X Press button 9, k, = or ; to
X Press button = or ; when the main
close the message.
area in the basic menu is active.
Depending on the pressed button, the Channel number is valid, but channel is
system searches upward or downward and not included in subscription: The message
stops at the next subscribed channel. Call SIRIUS to activate: appears
(Y page 126).
or
X Press button 9, k, = or ; to
X Press button E or F on audio control
unit. close the message in the audio display.
Depending on the pressed button, the
system searches upward or downward and
stops at the next subscribed channel.
i Which channels are available depends on
which channels you have subscribed to and
the program category you have selected
(Y page 127). For tuning in channels you
can also use the buttons on the
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 129
Audio system 129
Tuning in channels using the satellite X Select station in memory by pressing

radio channel list button 9 or :.
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Sat X Press button 9 to confirm.
Q Channel List. or
The channel list appears. The dot # in X Press desired station button j to
front of a list entry indicates the currently x, with the keypad in audio control unit
selected channel. briefly.
X Select channel by pressing button 9
Controls in detail
The audio system tunes in the corresponding
or :. channel as long as it is included in your
X Press button 9 to confirm. subscription and is still available.
If the channel is not included in your
i The contents of the channel list depends
subscription, the message Call SIRIUS to
on which channels are included in your
activate: appears.
subscription and which program category
you have selected (Y page 127). The If the channel is no longer available, the
channel list contains only the preview message Invalid Channel appears.
channel if the satellite radio service has not X Closing message: Press button 9.
been subscribed to.
Tuning in channels using satellite radio Storing channels
channel presets i There are ten preset positions available.
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q
X Press button 9 when the main area is
Presets.
selected.
or
or
X Press button 9 when the main area is
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q
selected in Sat mode.
The preset menu appears. The dot # in Presets.
front of a preset position indicates that this In both cases, the preset menu will appear in
is the channel currently selected and being the audio display. The dot # in front of a
listened to. preset position indicates that the channel
currently selected is stored there.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 130
130 Audio system
X Selecting a preset position: Press button Calling SIRIUS XM Service Center

9 or :.
i It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS XM
X Storing a preset position: Press and hold
Service Center if, for example:
button 9 until you hear a signal.
RYou want to cancel the subscription or
The channel is stored.
re-subscribe at a later date.
or
RYou have questions regarding billing.
X Press and hold desired channel button
j to x on keypad, until a brief signal
Controls in detail
RYou sell the car.

tone sounds.
The channel is stored. X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Sat
Q Service.
Displaying information The telephone number of the SIRIUS XM
Service Center and the twelve-digit
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Info (if electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the
available). particular receiver are displayed.
X Closing screen: Press button k,
i If the program provider does not offer any
information, the Info menu item cannot be =, ;, or 9.
selected.
You will see a screen that may contain the Channel update
following information: The service provider may conduct a channel
Rthe selected program category update.
During the update, the message Updating
Rthe selected channel
Channels... will appear on the audio
Rthe artist of the track currently being played display.
Rthe name of the current track The last tuned channel will be muted until the
update is completed. You cannot operate the
i SIRIUS XM determines what information satellite radio during the update.
is displayed on the screen. If the After completion of the update, the satellite
information is too long, the audio system radio basic menu will appear. The last tuned
shortens it. station will begin to play. If not available, the
With the telephone keypad button m you next subscribed channel starts beginning
can call up a popup screen, if provided by with channel 1.
SIRIUS XM, that shows the artist and title of
the current track being played on the selected Sound settings
channel. For sound adjustment see:
X Closing screen: Press button k,
RVolume (Y page 117)
=, ;, or 9.
RBalance control (Y page 118)
RBass and treble control (Y page 118)
RSurround sound (Y page 119)
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 131
Audio system 131
CD and MP3 mode if you open the casing, or if the casing is faulty
or damaged.
Submenu overview
The CD changer does not contain any parts
Menu Submenu that you are able to maintain yourself. For
safety reasons, all maintenance work must be
CD or MP3 Normal Track carried out by qualified technicians.
Sequence
G Warning!
Controls in detail
Random Tracks
In order to avoid distraction which could lead
Random Folders to an accident, the driver should insert or
(MP3 mode only) eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the audio system only if permitted by
AUX road, weather and traffic conditions.
Track list (Audio Select track (CD Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
CD) or Folder mode only) (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
(MP3) covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
Select folder and/or 14 m) every second.
tracks (MP3 mode
only)
General notes
CD changer or Media selection
other media i Audio CDs with copy protection are not
compatible with the CD audio standard and
Sound Treble therefore may not be able to be played by
the CD changer. There may be playback
Bass problems when playing copied discs.
Balance There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing
software and writers available. This variety
Surround sound means that there is no guarantee that the
system will be able to play discs that you
i The components and operating principles have written/copied yourself.
of the audio system can be found on There may be playback problems if you use
(Y page 112) and (Y page 116). CD-R or CD-RW type discs you have
compiled yourself with a storage capacity
The audio system is fitted with a CD changer.
of more than 700 MB. These CDs are not
The CD changer can play audio CDs as well
compatible with currently applicable
as CDs with MP3 or WMA files.
standards.
The available menu options will vary
depending on the equipment and the type of ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the CDs,
CD. they can become warped due to the heat
that develops in the CD changer.
Safety precautions In certain situations, the CDs can then no
G Warning! longer be ejected and cause damage to the
CD changer. Such damage is not covered
The CD changer is classified as a Class 1 laser
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
product. You must not open the casing. There
is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiation
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 132
132 Audio system
! Your CD changer has been designed to Notes about MP3 mode

play CDs which correspond to the
The CD changer can play audio CDs as well
IEC 60908 standard. You can therefore
as CDs with MP3/WMA files.
only use CDs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm. i Due to the branched data structure,
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. ones that playback of the first track may be delayed
have data on both sides (one side with DVD slightly.
data, the other side with audio data), they Permissible media for MP3/WMA files
Controls in detail
cannot be ejected and will damage the CD

RCD-R
changer.
RCD-RW
Do not use CDs with a diameter of 8 cm.
Attempting to play CDs with a diameter of Permissible file systems
8 cm or playing such CDs with an adapter may
RISO9660/Joliet for CDs
cause damage to the CD changer. Such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Multisession CDs
Limited Warranty.
For multisession CDs, the first session type
Only use round discs with a diameter of of the CD determines how the audio system
12 cm. will process the CD.
Should excessively high or low temperatures For example, if the first session type is
occur while in CD changer mode, a message according to the audio CD standard and the
will appear in the display, and the CD will be second session type is according to the data
muted until the temperature has reached an CD standard containing MP3/WMA tracks,
acceptable level for the system to continue the audio system will treat the CD as a
operation. conventional audio CD. This means that it is
Tips on handling CDs only possible to access the audio CD tracks.
ROnly touch the CDs at the edges. Access to the MP3/WMA tracks is not
possible.
RHandle CDs carefully to prevent Similarly, if the first session type is according
interference during playback. to the data CD standard containing MP3/
RAvoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on WMA tracks and the second session type is
the CDs. according to the audio CD standard, the audio
RThe CDs must only be labeled using pens system will treat the CD as a data CD. This
specially designed for this purpose. means that it is only possible to access the
MP3/WMA tracks. Access to the audio CD
RClean CDs from time to time with a tracks is not possible.
commercially available cleaning cloth.
Never wipe the CD in a circular motion; File structure on a disc
instead, wipe it in a straight line starting in When you create an MP3/WMA disc, the
the center and moving outward. Do not use MP3/WMA tracks can be organized in
solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for folders.
cleaning. A folder can also contain other folders.
RReplace the CD in its case after use. A disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders.
RProtect CDs from heat and direct sunlight. A folder can contain a maximum of 255 tracks
and 255 subfolders.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 133
Audio system 133
A data medium may contain a maximum of i If music files of file formats other than
500 tracks. MP3 are stored together with MP3 files on
The directory depth may not exceed a one disc, the loading process may take
maximum of 8 levels. The system will ignore longer.
files in lower levels.
Permissible MP3 formats
Track and folder names The audio system supports the MPEG1 Audio
When you create an MP3/WMA disc, you can Layer 3 format.
Controls in detail
assign names to the MP3/WMA tracks and i This format is generally known as “MP3”.
folders.
Permissible bit and sampling rates are:
The audio system uses these names for the
corresponding display in MP3 mode. Empty Rfixed and variable bit rates up to
folders or folders which contain data other 320 kbit/s
than MP3/WMA tracks are not displayed by RSampling rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz
the audio system.
If MP3/WMA files are saved in the root i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at
directory itself (uppermost directory on least 128 kbit/s or higher and a sampling
storage medium), the root directory will also rate of at least 44.1 kHz or higher. Smaller
be treated as a folder. The audio system will rates can cause a noticeable deterioration
then show the name of the root directory as in sound quality. This is especially the case
the folder name. if you have the surround sound function
You must observe the following when activated.
assigning track names:
WMA (Windows Media® Audio)
RTrack names must have at least one Windows Media® Audio (WMA) is an audio
character. data compression technology developed by
RTrack names must have the extension Microsoft®.
“mp3” or “wma”. The audio system supports the following
RThere must be a period between the track types of audio files:
name and the extension. Rfixed bit rates of 5 kbit/s up to
Example of a correct track name: 384 kbit/s

Track1.mp3 RSampling rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz
The audio system is unable to recognize an The audio system does not support the
MP3/WMA track if following WMA files:
Rthere RDRM (Digital Rights Management) coded
is no period between the track title
and the extension files
Rthere Rvariable bit rates
is no extension
RWMA Pro
i The audio system does not support ID3
R5.1 Surround
tags.
Supported file formats Notes on copyright
Supported file formats are: The music tracks that you create and play
RMP3 back in the MP3 and WMA format are
generally subject to copyright protection in
RWMA
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 134
134 Audio system
accordance with the applicable international G Warning!

and national regulations. In order to avoid distraction which could lead
In many countries, reproductions are not to an accident, the driver should insert or
permitted without the prior consent of the eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
copyright holder, not even for private use. operate the audio system only if permitted by
Make sure you know the applicable copyright road, weather and traffic conditions.
regulations and that you comply with these. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Controls in detail
own compositions and recordings, or the covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately

copyright holder has granted you permission, 14 m) every second.
these restrictions do not apply.
i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this
Operating the CD changer side must face upwards when loaded. If
neither side is printed, the side to be played
must face downwards.
If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or
cannot be read, Disc Unreadable
appears in the display.
Loading an individual magazine
compartment:
X Press load/eject button V.
A menu indicates which magazine
compartments are currently loaded.
: CD slot X Press desired button j to p in the
; Load/eject button V keypad to select a magazine compartment.
= Forward F or
? Rewind E X Press button = or ; to select a
The CD changer can hold up to a total of six magazine compartment.

audio CDs. The selected magazine compartment is
indicated by a red number.
X Switching to CD mode: Press button
X Press button 9 to confirm.
h on the audio control unit.
The CD changer will switch to the selected
The CD mode display appears when you
magazine compartment. The message
switch to CD mode. If there is a CD in one
Please Wait... appears in the display.
of the magazine trays, it will start to play
automatically. The following message will i Only insert a CD after the audio system
appear if no CDs are inserted. has prompted you to do so with the
message Please Insert Disc <X>. Only
insert one CD per magazine compartment.
X Insert CD into CD slot.
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD
into the CD slot and places it in the selected
magazine compartment. The message
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 135
Audio system 135
Loading Disc <X>... appears in the magazine compartment. The message

display. Please Wait... appears in the display. If
the CD is loaded, the CD changer will
i The loading process may take a while, switch to the next empty magazine
depending on the type of disc. If you do not compartment. The message Please
insert a disc, the display will switch back to Insert Disc <X> appears in the display.
the CD changer menu after approximately
X Repeat the steps until all compartments
20 seconds.
have been loaded.
Controls in detail
X Press button h, or the load/eject X Press load/eject button V on the audio
button V on the audio control unit to control unit to finish the loading process.
finish the loading process. The CD changer plays the last loaded disc
The CD changer plays the disc if it has been if it has been inserted correctly and is
inserted correctly and is permissible. permissible.
X Interrupting loading procedure: Press X Interrupting loading procedure: Press
the load/eject button again. load/eject button V again.
The loading process has not been
Filling an empty magazine compartment completed, the audio system will play the
X Press load/eject button V. last inserted CD.
A menu indicates which magazine
compartments are currently loaded. A red Ejecting CDs from CD changer
number indicates the last magazine
compartment that has been played or G Warning!
selected. In order to avoid distraction which could lead
to an accident, the driver should insert or
eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the audio system only if permitted by
road, weather and traffic conditions.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
14 m) every second.
X Press button : to select the menu bar. i If you eject a CD while another is being
X Press button ; to select Fill Empty played, the audio system interrupts
Slots. playback.
X Press button 9. X Ejecting one CD: Press load/eject button
The message Please Insert Disc <X> V.
appears in the display. The magazine menu with active main area
i Only insert a CD after the audio system appears in the audio display. The magazine
has prompted you to do so with the compartment with the current CD is
message Please Insert Disc <X>. Only highlighted.
insert one CD per magazine compartment.
X Insert CD into CD slot.
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD
into the CD slot and places it in an empty
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 136
136 Audio system
If you do not remove the CD from CD

slot :, the CD changer will automatically
pull the CD back in after a short while.
i If audio source is changed during eject
procedure (e.g. pressing button $) the
eject procedure will be aborted and any
CDs being ejected will be drawn back into
Controls in detail
the unit.
X Press desired button j to p in the
X Repeat the last step until the magazine is
keypad to select a magazine compartment.
empty.
or
X Press button = or ; to select the Switching to audio CD or MP3 operation
desired CD.
X Load a CD.
The CD is ejected. The audio system loads the inserted audio
source and starts playback.
X Remove the CD from CD slot :.
or
If you do not remove the CD from the CD
X Press function button h repeatedly until
slot, the CD changer will automatically pull
the CD back in after a short while. the main menu of the CD or MP3 mode
X Ejecting all CDs: Press load/eject button
appears.
V. i The function button switches directly to
The magazine menu with active main area the last selected disc operation mode
appears in the audio display. The magazine (audio or MP3 CD). In doing so, the audio
compartment with the current CD is system accesses all media in the CD
highlighted. changer.
i Pressing the function button repeatedly

switches from CD or MP3 mode to the
media interface mode and than to the AUX
mode. Pressing again switches back to CD
or MP3 mode.
Display example for audio CD operation
X Press button : to select the menu bar.

X Press button = to select Eject All.
The CDs are ejected one after the other.
X Remove the CD from CD slot :.
The CD changer switches to the next
occupied magazine compartment and : Media type
ejects the CD. ; Medium position in the media list
= Track number
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 137
Audio system 137
? Track name (only if stored on the medium Selecting audio CD or MP3 medium
as CD text) X Switching to audio CD or MP3 operation
A Elapsed track time (Y page 136).
B Elapsed track time (graphical display) X Select Changer or Media.
C Sound settings or
D Media selection (Changer or Media) X In audio CD operation only: Press button
E Current playback option (visible if 9 when the main area is selected in the
Controls in detail
activated) display.
F Medium name (only if stored on the The media list appears. A dot # indicates the
medium as CD text) currently selected medium.
G Calling up track list
H Playback options
Display example for MP3 operation
Media list
The media list displays all media that are
currently available:
Rin the CD changer (magazine
: Media type
compartments 1 through 6)
; Medium position in the media list
The following media can be read:
= Track number
audio and MP3 CDs
? Track name
Rdevices connected to the media interface
A Elapsed track time (Y page 139).
B Elapsed track time (graphical display)
C Sound settings
i The message Disc unreadable appears
behind the magazine compartment number
D Media selection (Changer or Media)
if a medium cannot be read.
E Current playback option (visible if
activated) X Selecting medium: Press button 9
F Current folder or :.
G Calling up folder list X Press button 9.
H Playback options or
X Selecting medium directly: In CD mode
Pause function you can select a disc directly by pressing
X Pausing playback: Press 8 briefly. the respective number of the magazine
X Continuing playback: Press 8 again compartment on the keypad (j through
briefly. p).
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 138
138 Audio system
Selecting a track then omit the next step by pressing button

X Skipping forwards or backwards to a 9.
track: Press button = or ; when the X Completing input: Press button 9.
main area is selected in the display. The track is played.
or
X Briefly press button E or F on audio
Fast forward/rewind
control unit. X Main area is selected: Press and hold
button = or ; until desired place is
Controls in detail
i Skipping forwards through the tracks reached.

skips to the next track. Skipping backwards or
through the tracks skips to the beginning
X Press and hold button E or F on
of the current track if the track has been
playing for more than 8 seconds. If the audio control unit.
track has been playing for less than
Selecting a folder
8 seconds, it skips to the start of the
previous track. If you have switched on the i This function is only available in audio
Random Tracks playback option, the order MP3 mode.
of the tracks is random.
X Switch to MP3 operation (Y page 136).
Selecting via track list X Select Folder.
X In audio CD operation: Select Track or
List. X Press button 9 when the main area is
or selected in the display.
X In MP3 operation: Press button 9 when The folder list appears.
the main area is selected in the display.
The track list appears. A dot # indicates the
current track.
X Selecting a track: Press button 9
or :.
i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks

in alphabetical order. : Current folder name
; Moving to superordinate folder
Selecting via keypad
= Current track
X Press button l on the keypad. ? Track symbol
A numerical input field appears. The
number of available digits depends on the X Move to the superordinate folder: Select
number of tracks on the CD. You can only the U symbol and press button 9.
enter digits that correspond with the The display now shows the next higher
number of tracks on the CD. folder level.
X Select the desired track number.
i When you press a keypad button for

longer than 2 seconds, input is completed
and the respective track is played. You can
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 139
Audio system 139
X Selecting options: Switch to audio CD or

MP3 operation.
X Select CD or MP3 and press button 9.
The option list appears. A dot # indicates
which option is switched on.
X Select an option and press 9.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal Track Sequence, you will
Controls in detail
: Current folder
see a corresponding indicator in the main
; Folder symbol area.
X Selecting a folder: Press button 9 i The Normal Track Sequence option is
or :. automatically activated when you select a
X Press button 9 to confirm. different medium. If an option is activated,
You will see the tracks in the folder. it remains activated after the audio system
is switched on/off.
i Due to the large amount of information
found on an MP3 disc it may take a while
before all folder and track information Media interface
becomes available. During this time the
folder list may be unavailable or slow. G Warning!
X Selecting a track: Press button 9 Operating an external audio source while the
vehicle is in motion will distract you. You may
or :.
not notice changing road and/or traffic
conditions which may cause an accident.
The track is played and the corresponding Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
folder is now the active folder. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Playback options covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
The following options are available:
For your safety and the safety of others, pull
RNormal Track Sequence over to a safe location and stop before
Tracks playback in the order on the disc operating an external audio source.
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
RRandom Tracks
Tracks playback in a random order (e.g.
track 3, 8, 5, etc.).
RRandom Folder (in MP3 mode only)
Tracks in the active folder playback in
random order.
: Media interface
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 140
140 Audio system
Notes Rvisit www.mbusa-mobile.com

Rcall the Mercedes-Benz Customer
i The media interface allows for connection
of the following media with the audio Assistance Center at
system: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RiPod®
(1-800-367-6372) (in the USA)
Rcall Customer Service at
RUSB storage media
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
RAudio devices with analog output (AUX),
Controls in detail
e.g. MP3 or tape players. Special characteristics of USB storage

media
i Do not leave external devices in the RIf the storage medium contains other data
vehicle under extremely high or low than audio data, the time required for
temperatures. Read and observe the initialization increases. Initialization may
operating instructions of the respective then take several minutes. Therefore, audio
device. Damage to external devices due to data should be stored on a separate
excessive temperature is not covered by partition.
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. RUp to 8 folder levels containing up to
Do not operate iPods® or USB storage media 1 000 tracks per folder are supported.
with a remote control such as Bluetooth® in RDo not use USB extension cables or
addition to the media interface control. connectors as they may impair
Otherwise malfunctions may occur. functionality.
Always use the latest firmware for the iPod® RThe playlists on the device are searched for
or USB storage media. in the background. They are provided in a
Only use genuine software for uploading to separate category once they are available.
your iPod® or MP3 player as otherwise certain RThe media interface does not support files
functions may not be available or the system
that are protected by DRM (Digital Rights
may not recognize the device.
Management).
Connecting a completely discharged iPod® or
USB storage medium can increase the Supported USB storage media
initialization time. The following USB storage media are
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz supported:
connectors. RUSB Flash Drives
i Suitable connector cables are located in RUSB hard disks, 1", 1.8", and 2.5" drives
the vehicle or can be purchased at any with a starting/continuous current rating
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. of maximum 800 mA (otherwise a separate
Depending on the device, loading large audio power supply will be necessary)
files may take several minutes. RMP3 players
When the power consumption of the external - basic MP3 player are treated as USB
device is too high or the media interface is not storage media
functioning properly, malfunction messages - for selected MP3 players additional
will be displayed.
functions are supported
i For information on compatible
The media interface supports USB storage
multimedia devices and iPod® versions
media of USB Device SubClass 6. Information
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 141
Audio system 141
on USB Device SubClasses of storage required cable :, ;, or = while the

medium are available from the manufacturer vehicle is standing still.
of the device. X Store the audio device carefully in the glove
Supported file formats on USB storage box and make sure not to clamp or pitch
media the cables.
The following file formats are supported: i You can control playback of devices that
Rmp3: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s) are connected by USB cable = or iPod®
Controls in detail
Rwma: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s) cable ; via the audio system.
Devices that are connected by an AUX
Rm4a: low complexity (LC) codec cable : must be controlled on the device
Rplaylists: m3u, pls itself.
ID3 Tags (version 1.x, 2.3, 2.4) and WMA tags
in ASCII and UTF16 coding are supported to Media interface operation
display meta data during playback.
Selecting device
Connecting external audio devices X Press button h repeatedly until the
main menu for media interface operation
G Observe Safety notes, see page 139. appears (Y page 142).
! External devices that you take into the X Select Media.
vehicle can interfere with radio reception. X Press button 9.
The media list appears.
i You can also select Media to open the
media list when CD mode is active.
: 3.5 mm stereo jack AUX cable (4-pin) for

connecting external devices via a The following are available:
headphone port or a separate audio out
port (AUX), e.g. MP3 or tape player
RList number 0: iPod® or USB storage
medium (The name of the device appears
; iPod® cable
or, if no device is connected, Media
= USB cable for supported USB storage Interface.)
media (optional)
? Example device iPod®
RList numbers 1 - 6: CD magazine
RList number 7: Device connected to the
X Connect the audio device to the media AUX socket
interface in the glove box using the
A dot # indicates the currently selected
device.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 142
142 Audio system
X Select the desired device by pressing Selecting AUX device

button : and/or 9. G Observe Safety notes, see page 139.
G Warning!
The main menu for media interface operation
Due to the different volumes of the external
appears. The selected device starts to
audio sources, system messages of the
playback.
vehicle may be much louder. You may need to
i You can also select external devices disable these system messages or adjust the
Controls in detail
directly: Press button x when CD mode volume of these messages manually.

is active.
When you have connected a new device, the i The volume of external audio sources is
audio system initializes it. The respective extremely variable. It is possible that a
message appears. device connected as an external audio
source will sound quieter or louder in the
vehicle or that the usual maximum volume
cannot be achieved. On certain devices the
volume can be set separately. In this case,
start at a moderate volume and increase it
slowly. In this way, you can determine
whether the system is capable of playback
without distortion, even at high volume.
Main menu for media interface operation Selecting an AUX device:
: Current track number X Press button h repeatedly until the
; Name of artist (if stored on the medium) main menu for AUX operation appears.
= Track name
? Elapsed track time (graphical display)
A Sound settings
B Name of current album (if stored on the
medium)
C Medium list
D Music (categories)
E Settings menu
F Symbol of connected medium X Select Media.
X Press button 9.
i When you connect a medium via iPod® or The media list appears.
USB cable while the audio function is
active, the audio system initializes the i You can also select Media to open the
device and starts to playback. media list when CD mode is active.
X Select AUX device at list number 7 of the
media list.
i You can also select an AUX device
directly: Press button q when CD mode
is active.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 143
Audio system 143
Deselecting an AUX device: Fast forward/rewind

X Press h to switch back to CD mode. X Main area is selected: Press and hold
button = or ; until desired place is
Selecting audio files reached.
or
i The audio system lists the stored data on X Press and hold button E or F on
an iPod®, MP3 player, or USB storage audio control unit.
medium according to their own respective
Controls in detail
file structure. i With an iPod® the function “fast rewind”
is only available within the current track.
Selecting via track skipping
X Skipping backwards or forwards to a Selecting categories and folders
track: Press button = or ;.
or iPod® and selected MP3 players
X Briefly press button E or F on audio iPods® and selected MP3 players let you
control unit. select tracks via categories and folders.
The following categories may be available:
i Skipping forwards through the tracks
RCurrent Track List
skips to the next track. Skipping backwards
through the tracks skips to the beginning RPlaylists
of the current track if the track has been RArtists
playing for more than 8 seconds. If the
track has been playing for less than RAlbums
8 seconds, it skips to the start of the RTracks

previous track. When you have chosen a RPodcasts
playback option other than Normal Track
Sequence, the track sequence is random. RGenres
RComposers
Selecting via keypad
RAudiobooks
X Initiating input: Press button l.
A numerical input field appears. The i Some categories contain the entry All.
number of available digits depends on the When you select this entry, the category is
number of stored tracks. played completely.
X Entering track number: Press a keypad
button, e.g. q. USB storage media
The digit appears in first place of the entry With USB storage media you can select
line. folders and, if available, playlists. When
playing playlists, the audio system can display
i The audio system will reject invalid the respective album name and artist, e.g.
entries and does not display them. meta data, if such information has been read
X Enter additional digits as required. into the system.
X Completing input: Press button 9. Playlists are displayed using a particular
or symbol. When you open a playlist, the
contained tracks are opened and playback
X Press and hold keypad button for last digit begins. The available playback option is now
of desired track number. Random Categories instead of Random
The track is played. Folder.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 144
144 Audio system
You can determine whether the meta data or

the file name and folder are to be displayed
during playback for USB storage media.
X Displaying artist name: Select Media
Inter Q Display Metadata.
Selecting category and opening folder

X Opening category/folder: Press button
Controls in detail
9 when the main area is selected. : Symbol of the connected medium

; Name of current album, folder or category
or
X Select Music.
= Symbol for superordinate folder
The available categories or folder content, ? Current track (not available for all
e.g. subfolders, are displayed. The status devices)
line displays the selected category or folder A Track symbol
name.
X Playback track: Press button : or
i To select Music, the external device must 9 and confirm selection by pressing
be activated. button 9.
X Moving to superordinate folder: Press
button : or 9 until U is selected
and press button 9.
Playing category or folder content

X Select category or folder.
X Press button 9 for more than 2 seconds.
The category or folder content is played
: Device name and symbol according to the selected playback option
; Available categories (Y page 145).
X Selecting category, folder, album: Press Alphabetical track selection

button 9 or : and confirm selection
by pressing button 9. iPods® and selected MP3 players
The content of the category or folder is
i This function is only available for
displayed.
alphabetically ordered categories. It is not
i If the data has not been read-in available for albums or playlists for
completely, the message Please example.
Wait... appears. X Select a category, for example Artists.
X If necessary repeat the above step until the The available artists are displayed.
tracks of the selected category, folder, or X Press the respective keypad button once or
album appear. multiple times to enter the initial letter of
the desired artist name.
The available initial letters are displayed.
X Press button 9.
While the data is being read, the message
Please Wait... appears. Once the data
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 145
Audio system 145
has been read-in completely, the first list Tracks are played in random order.
entry with the entered initial letter is RRandom Categories or Random Folder
highlighted. (when folder was selected on USB storage
i If no match is found, the last entry that medium)
matches a previous initial letter is Tracks of the current category or of the
highlighted. current folder are played in random order.
The quality of the search results depends
on the version and the language of the
Controls in detail
software, e.g. iTunes™ used to store data Audio AUX mode
on the iPod® or MP3 player. i This section applies to vehicles without
USB storage media media interface only.
i This function is only available for An external audio source can be connected
alphabetically ordered files. It is not to the AUX socket of the audio system. Please
available for playlists. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for more information.
X Press the respective keypad button once or
multiple times to enter the initial letter of
the desired artist name.
The available initial letters are displayed.
If the file system contains folders only, the
system searches for folders and the
message Please Wait... appears. Once
the search is concluded, the first list entry
with the entered initial letter is highlighted.
If this is not the case, the system searches
for tracks. The message Please Wait...
appears. Once the search is concluded, the AUX socket : is designed for a 3.5 mm
first list entry with the entered initial letter stereo jack (3-pin), for devices with dedicated
is highlighted. analog audio output or connection via
headphone port, e.g. MP3 or tape player.
Select active partition
G Warning!
USB storage media may contain up to Operating an external audio source while the
4 partitions (primary or logical; formatted to vehicle is in motion will distract you. You may
FAT16 or FAT32). not notice changing road and/or traffic
X Selecting partition: h Q Media conditions which may cause an accident.
Inter QSelect Active Partition. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Playback options
14 m) every second.
The following options are available: For your safety and the safety of others, pull
RNormal Track Sequence over to a safe location and stop before
Tracks are played in standard order (e.g. operating an external audio source.
numerical or alphabetical order).
RRandom Tracks
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 146
146 Audio system
Calling up AUX mode You should set the system back to

Standard before connecting a different audio
G Warning! device to the AUX socket.
Due to the different volumes of the external X Select Volume in AUX mode.
audio sources, system messages of the
The selection list appears. The dot #
vehicle may be much louder. You may need to
indicates the currently selected setting.
disable these system messages or adjust the
volume of these messages manually.
Controls in detail
X Selecting audio AUX mode:

Press button h repeatedly until the
main menu for AUX operation appears.
or
X In CD mode: Select CD/MP3 Q Aux.
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium in
: Default setting
the external audio source is heard, provided
it is connected and switched to playback. ; Volume boost
i Please refer to the relevant operating

Switch back to CD mode
guide for operation of the external audio
source. X Press button h.
The following settings can be made in the or
audio AUX mode: X Select Back To Disc in the audio AUX
RVolume (Y page 117) menu.
RBalance control (Y page 118)
RBass and treble control (Y page 118) Telephone
RSurround sound (Y page 119) Safety precautions
i The volume of external audio sources is
G Warning!
extremely variable. It is possible that a
Please do not forget that your primary
device connected as an external audio
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
source will sound quieter or louder in the
attention to the road must always be his/her
vehicle or that the usual maximum volume
primary focus when driving. For your safety
cannot be achieved. On certain devices the
and the safety of others, we recommend that
volume can be set separately. In this case,
you pull over to a safe location and stop
start at a moderate volume and increase it
before placing or taking a telephone call.
slowly. In this way, you can determine
whether the system is capable of playback If you choose to use the mobile phone8 while
without distortion, even at high volume. driving, please use the hands-free device and
only use the mobile phone when road,
Volume adjustment for the audio device weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
You can increase the volume for the AUX jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
socket in case the internal volume of the mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
connected audio device is too low. Use the
setting Boost for such devices.
8 Observe all legal requirements.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 147
Audio system 147
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph General notes

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately Making calls via Bluetooth® interface
14 m) every second. The audio system telephone function via the
Bluetooth® interface is available in
i The functions and services available to conjunction with a Bluetooth® enabled
you while using the mobile phone depend mobile phone.
on your service provider and the type of With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the
Controls in detail
mobile phone you are using. Also see hands-free device and receive electronic
separate operating manual of your mobile business cards (vCards) via the Bluetooth®
phone for instructions on how to use your interface.
mobile phone.
Calls disconnected while the vehicle is in
When the mobile phone is connected via the motion
Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, you
Interruptions to the connection may occur if
can operate the mobile phone using the
following devices: Rthere is insufficient mobile network
coverage
RAudio control unit (Y page 156)
Ryou move from one mobile network
RButtons 6 and ~ on the
transmitter/receiver area (mobile network
multifunction steering wheel (Y page 94)
cell) into another and no channels are free
RMobile phone keypad or similar input or the cell is full
device Ryou are using a SIM card that is not
Please note that these functions are only compatible with the available network
available with Mercedes-Benz approved Rwhen using a mobile phone with
mobile phones.
“Twincard”, the mobile phone is
simultaneously logged into the network
TEL Menu with the second SIM card
Menu Function Operating options
Telephone Bluetooth® phones i The components and operating principles
of the audio system can be found on
Download contacts
(Y page 112) and (Y page 116).
Delete contacts When the mobile phone is connected via the
Adjust volume Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, you
can operate the mobile phone using the
Name Phone book following devices:
Call lists Call Lists or Mic On/ RButtons 6 and ~ and keypad on
Microphone off/ Mic Off audio control unit (Y page 113)
on Delete Call Lists RMultifunction steering wheel (Y page 94)
Please note that these functions are only
available with Mercedes-Benz approved
mobile phones. Please contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for information on
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 148
148 Audio system
features available for your mobile phone of Functional restrictions

choice. You will not be able to use the mobile phone,
i In order for the functions described in this or you may have to wait a while, in the
section to work correctly, the Bluetooth® following situations:
telephone must be linked to the audio RIf the mobile phone is switched off.
system. Please make sure any other RIf the mobile phone is not connected via the
Bluetooth® device linked with the mobile Bluetooth® interface to the audio system.
phone is switched off before you use the
Controls in detail
RIf the mobile phone is locked.

telephone functions with the audio system.
RIf the mobile phone has not yet acquired a
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for network signal.
compliance could void the user’s authority to The mobile phone automatically tries to log
operate the equipment. into a network. If no network is available,
The head unit internal Bluetooth® transmitter you will also not be able to make a “911”
must not be co-located or operated in emergency call. If you attempt to make an
conjunction with any other antenna or outgoing call, the No Service message will
transmitter. appear for a short while.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC RIf you switch off the audio system in the
radiation exposure limits set forth for middle of a call, e.g. by switching off the
uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC ignition, that call will be cut off. You can
radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in prevent this from happening as follows:
Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the - Switch the mobile phone to “private
IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This mode” before switching the audio
equipment has very low levels of RF energy system off (see mobile phone operating
that it is deemed to comply without testing of instructions).
specific absorption ratio (SAR).
Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions Activating the mobile phone
and illustrations in this section refer to the
audio system. Prerequisites for the mobile phone
Caller ID For making calls using the audio system via
the Bluetooth® interface, you will need a
The audio system can display the telephone
number and the name of the caller, e.g. for an Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
incoming call and also in other menus or Your mobile phone must support the
displays. Bluetooth® hands-free profile 1.0 or higher to
For the telephone number to be displayed, make or receive calls (see mobile phone
the caller must transmit their telephone operating instructions).
number. Otherwise Unknown will be shown on i For further information on suitable mobile
the audio display. phones and connecting Bluetooth®-
This is also the case for name displays. For enabled mobile phones to the audio system
this, the telephone number and the name of
the caller must also be saved in the telephone Rvisit www.mbusa-mobile.com
book. Rcall the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 149
Audio system 149
1-800-FOR-MERCedes It is possible to register up to 15 mobile

(1-800-367-6372) (in the USA) phones. The connection is always established
Rcall Customer Service at to the last activated mobile phones in signal
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) range. When you authorize a new mobile
phone, it is activated automatically. You can
Activating Bluetooth® switch between the authorized mobile
phones.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see mobile
phone operating instructions). Searching for a mobile phone
Controls in detail
X Enter the PIN (not necessary with some X % Q Phone Q Bluetooth Phones
mobile phones or network). Q Update.
X Activate Bluetooth® connection on the The audio system searches for up to 10
mobile phone (see mobile phone operating suitable Bluetooth® telephones within
instructions). range and enters them into the telephone
X Press button % on the audio control unit list.
to call up the telephone mode. Authorized Bluetooth® telephones will be
identified by a telephone-symbol L in front
i On certain mobile phones, not only you
of the list entry once the telephone list has
will have to activate the Bluetooth®
been updated. The symbol will be grayed
function but in addition, your own device
out if the authorized mobile phone is not
must be made "visible" for other devices.
located within the Bluetooth® range.
Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®
device name. It is recommended to give i The duration of the search procedure
your mobile phone a personal name, by depends on the number and type of
which you can clearly recognize your Bluetooth® telephones. The search may
mobile phone. take a few minutes.
i If the Bluetooth® function on the audio i If the telephone list is already full
system is disabled, the message (15 entries), you must de-authorize one of
Bluetooth not activated in system the authorized devices (Y page 151), and
settings appears. start the search again. Otherwise a new
device you are looking for will not appear
X Activate Bluetooth® connection on the in the list.
audio system (Y page 120).
If the audio system does not find your
X i Q System Settings Q
mobile phone, external authorization may
Bluetooth Q Activate Bluetooth. be necessary (Y page 150).
You have activated or deactivated
Bluetooth®. A checkmark appears when Authorizing a Bluetooth® device
Bluetooth® is activated. X Select the desired unauthorized device
from the telephone list by pressing the
Registering a mobile phone buttons 9, : and 9.
(authorizing) or
X Select Options Q Authorize.
When you use your mobile phone in
conjunction with the audio system for the first The input menu for the passcode appears.
time, you must register (authorize) it.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 150
150 Audio system
Entering passcode into the mobile phone

If a Bluetooth® connection is established
successfully, you will be prompted to enter a
code into the mobile phone (see mobile
phone operating instructions).
X Enter the same passcode on the mobile
phone as you did on the audio system.
Controls in detail
i You may need to confirm the authorizing

i The passcode is any one- to sixteen-digit on the mobile phone. Check your mobile
number, which you can set yourself. For the phone display.
quality of coding of the connection it is
If the message Authorization
recommend to use a passcode of at least
Procedure Unsuccessful appears on the
four digits. You must enter the same
audio system display, you may have
passcode into the audio system and the
exceeded the preset period for
device to be authorized. Also refer to the
authorization. Repeat the process.
operating instructions of the mobile phone.
The device is authorized. You can now make
On the audio system, you can enter the
calls via the audio system hands-free device
passcode via the digits in the on-screen menu
using the authorized mobile phone.
bar or via the telephone keypad in the audio
control unit.
External authorization
With the menu bar:
X
If the audio system cannot find your mobile
Entering passcode: Select the digits in the
phone, this may be due to special security
menu bar one by one, by pressing the
settings on your mobile phone. In this case,
buttons ; and =.
you can check whether, conversely, your
X Press button 9 to confirm each digit.
mobile phone can find the audio system. The
X Confirming passcode: Select ¬ in the audio system’s Bluetooth® device name is
menu bar and press button 9 to confirm. “MB Bluetooth”.
X Deleting digits: Select 2 in the menu X % Q Phone Q Bluetooth Phones
bar and briefly press button 9 to delete Q Update Q Options Q External
one digit, or press and hold button 9 to Authorization.
delete all entered digits. or
X Canceling entry: Press button k. X i Q System Settings Q
With keypad on audio control unit: Bluetooth Q Bluetooth device list

Q Update Q Options Q External
X Entering passcode: Press the desired
Authorization.
numbers on the keypad.
The message Ready for External
X Confirming passcode: Press button 9.
Authorization appears.
X Deleting digits: Briefly press button
2 in the audio control unit to delete one
number, or press and hold button 2 to
delete all entered numbers.
X Canceling entry: Press button k.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 151
Audio system 151
X Start Bluetooth® search procedure on the When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is
mobile phone (see mobile phone operating automatically activated. Only one mobile
instructions). phone can be active at a time.
X Select the audio system (“MB Bluetooth”) X % Q Phone Q Bluetooth Phones.
at your mobile phone. X Select an authorized mobile phone from
X When prompted to do so, enter the the list.
passcode on the mobile phone and then on X Press button 9 to confirm.
the audio system.
Controls in detail
The selected mobile phone will be searched
for and connected if it is located in the
Displaying details on a mobile phone Bluetooth® range and Bluetooth® is
X % Q Phone Q Bluetooth Phones. activated on the corresponding device.
X Select the mobile phone from the list.
The selected mobile phone is activated.
X Select Options Q Details.
A dot # in front of the entry, indicates the
current active mobile phone in the phone
The details screen for the device is shown
list.
in the audio display.
X Closing details screen: Press
button ;, = or 9. Receiving business cards
You can import business cards (vCards) into
De-authorizing a Bluetooth® device the address book from external Bluetooth®
devices (Y page 153).
X % Q Phone Q Bluetooth Phones.
X Select authorized device. TEL-Basic display
X Select Options Q De-Authorize.
X Press button % on the audio control unit
A prompt appears asking whether you to call up the telephone mode.
really want to de-authorize this device.
X Select Yes or No. i When in telephone mode, you can access
If you select Yes, the device will be de- the TEL-Basic display by pressing button
authorized. k repeatedly.
i If you de-authorize a device which has When the connected mobile phone is ready
been authorized in the past and which is not for operation, the display will look similar like
detected in the search, this device will no this:
longer be displayed in the device list.
Devices which have been authorized in the
past but which are not detected in the
search are either not switched on or not in
the vehicle.
Activating another mobile phone

If you have several authorized mobile phones,
you can switch between the individual mobile
phones.
i You cannot switch to another authorized
mobile phone during a call.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 152
152 Audio system
The following information is displayed in the Emergency calls “911”

status bar:
i The “911” emergency call system is a
RBluetooth® device name of the connected public service. Using it without due cause
mobile phone, in this case: blue_mobile. is a criminal offense.
RMobile phone network signal strength
r. This information will only be shown i This function places a call to the local
with suitable mobile phones. “911” provider. It does not initiate a Tele
Aid call.
Controls in detail
The bars indicate the current signal

strength of the mobile phone network for The following describes how to dial a “911”
reception. Optimum reception is indicated emergency call using the audio system head
by all bars full. All bars empty indicates very unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
poor or no reception. phone is connected via the Bluetooth®
RReceiver symbol 6 or ~. The interface to the audio system. Unless
receiver symbol indicates whether a call is otherwise specified, the descriptions refer to
being connected or is in progress: the audio system head unit.
~ - not active Consult the separate mobile phone operating
instructions that came with your mobile
RREADY indicates that a call is possible. phone for information on how to place a
RNO SERVICE indicates that the mobile “911” emergency call on the mobile phone.
network is not available. The following conditions must be met for a
“911” emergency call via the audio system:
Setting transmit and receive volume RMobile phone must be switched on.
i These settings should normally not be RThe corresponding mobile
changed as the factory settings are communications network must be
matched to most mobile phones. Find out available.
about the optimum settings for your mobile
i Emergency calls may not be possible with
phone at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. all telephone networks or if certain network
services and/or telephone functions are
i Changes may result in significant active. Check with your local service
impairments to the transmission quality. providers and mobile phone instructions.
These settings may not be changed during If you cannot make an emergency call, you
an active phone call. will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.
X % Q Phone Q Adjust Volume Q
Placing a “911” emergency call using
Reception Volume or Transmission
audio control unit with the mobile
Volume.
phone unlocked
X Setting the volume: Press button 9
X Press button % to switch to telephone
or :.
The volume bar moves up or down. mode.
X Confirming selection: Press button 9. X Enter 911 using the number keypad on the
audio control unit.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 153
Audio system 153
X Press button 6. operating instructions of the mobile

Connecting... appears in the audio phone).
display while the mobile phone establishes RThe external Bluetooth® phone in the
the connection. vehicle must be switched on and
X Wait until the emergency call center authorized.
answers, then describe the emergency.
i If you switch to a different mode while
i Depending on the phone type, if no SIM vCards are being received (e.g., press
Controls in detail
card is inserted in a GSM mobile phone or button $), reception of vCards will be
if there is no service on a CDMA mobile aborted.
phone, NO SERVICE may appear in the
audio display. In that case, you only can X % Q Phone Q Download Contacts.
make an emergency call on the mobile X Press button 9 to confirm.
phone itself, without the use of the audio X Importing: Start the data transfer on the
control unit.
external Bluetooth® phone (“Export
business cards (vCards)”, see the operating
Placing a “911” emergency call with the instructions of the mobile phone).
mobile phone locked The audio system imports the data for the
i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can business cards and displays the number of
make an emergency call on the mobile business cards received.
phone itself, without the use of the audio i Select Back, press button k or switch
control unit.
to a different mode to abort reception.
X Aborting reception: Press 9.
Phone book or
You can save telephone numbers in the audio X Press button k.
system’s phone book.
i These entries are retained even if you use Deleting external Data
the audio system with another mobile X % Q Phone Q Delete Contacts.
phone. You should delete these entries A prompt appears asking whether the data
before handing over or selling your vehicle. should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No.
Receiving business cards (vCards) If you select Yes all personal data are then
You can import business cards (vCards) from deleted from the phone book.
external Bluetooth® phones into your audio
system’s phone book. To do this: Opening the phone book
RBluetooth® must be activated on the audio X % Q Name.
system and on the external Bluetooth® Entries in the phone book are displayed in
phone (see the operating instructions of alphabetical order. The search speller is
the mobile phone). active when more multiple entries are
RThe external Bluetooth® phone must be available. The search speller appears on
able to send vCards via Bluetooth® (see the the lower edge of the display.
You can use the search speller to reduce the
number of entries you need to make.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 154
154 Audio system
Example:
Controls in detail
Symbol G indicates that an entry contains

more than one phone number. You can select In the example, the first letters of the names
these subentries (Y page 155). Fisher, Bob and Fisher, Kim are the
X Closing phone book: Press button k. same. The first possible distinct letter is the
X Switching from the search speller to B or the K.
the list: Press button 9 repeatedly. Therefore, B and K are offered as possibilities.
X Switching from the list to the search X Select the characters for the required entry
speller: Press button k. one after another.
As soon as the selection has been
narrowed down to a single entry, the audio
Selecting an entry
system will switch to the list automatically.
Selecting via search speller X Deleting an individual character: Select
X If necessary, switch from the list to the 2 and briefly press 9.

search speller. or
X Switching search speller character X Press button 2.
set: Select C. After entering each character or after each
Depending on the previous setting, this deletion of a character, the closest
switches the search speller to letters with matching entry is given at the top of the list.
special characters or numbers with special X Deleting an entire entry: Select 2 and
characters. press and hold 9 until the entire entry has
X Entering characters: Press button = been deleted.
or ; to select the characters for the or
required entry. X Press and hold button 2 until the entire
The first letters you enter determine the entry has been deleted.
first letters of the name you are looking for.
X Ending search: Switch from the search
speller to the list.
The first entry containing the selected The top list entry is highlighted
initial letters is highlighted in the list. If automatically.
there are a number of similar entries, the
next different character is displayed. Selecting via list
X If necessary, switch from the search speller
to the list.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 155
Audio system 155
Depending on the mobile phone and the

entries in the mobile phone book, the phone
numbers are assigned to categories. The
categories are indicated by category
symbols.
Number category Display
Not classified °
Controls in detail
Phone book list
Home @
Entries with symbol :G have additional
options available, e.g. more phone numbers. Work \
X Press button 9 or : until the desired
entry is highlighted. Phone category Display
X Press 9 to confirm and a call will be
Not classified °
initiated.
Mobile ¢
Selecting subentries
X Select an entry with the symbol G from
Car ^
the list and press button 9. Pager ï
Symbol G changes to I and the
subentries appear. Displaying details on an entry
The audio system can also fully display an
abbreviated entry.
X Select entry.
X Select Options Q Details.
A screen with the details of the selected
entry appears.
X Closing details screen: Press button
: Phone book entry with subentries = or ; until the desired entry is
highlighted.
X Press button 9 or : until the desired
subentry is highlighted.
Deleting entry
X Press button 9 to confirm and a call will
X Select entry.
be initiated.
X Select Options Q Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that you
really want to delete the entry.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes the actual entry is deleted
from the phone book.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 156
156 Audio system
Call lists Deleting call lists

The audio system displays the calls received i The saved call lists are retained in the
(including missed calls) or made during phone audio system, even if you use the audio
mode in their own lists. system with another mobile phone. For this
i The particular menu item can only be reason you should delete any call lists
before handing over or selling the vehicle.
selected if calls have already been received
or made from audio system. X In the phone main menu select Call
Controls in detail
Displaying missed calls in the audio system Lists.

display is not possible with all mobile X Select Delete Call Lists.
phones. You will be prompted to confirm that you
The control system displays the list of really want to delete the entry. The
dialed numbers in the multifunction question Do you want to delete the
display. call lists appears in the display.
X Select Yes or No.
i The audio system’s call lists are not
synchronized with the call lists on your
mobile phone. If you make a call from your If you select Yes both lists are deleted.
mobile phone and only use the audio
system’s hands-free device, these calls will
not be listed. Making calls
X Press button % on the audio control unit
Calling up the list to call up the telephone mode.
X % Q Call Lists. When the mobile phone is ready for
X Select Calls Received or Calls operation, the display will look similar like
Dialed. this:
The appropriate list appears.
i If there is a symbol with a telephone
receiver in front of the phone number or the
name, then you have missed this call (e.g.
in the highlighted line of the following
figure).
Initiating an outgoing call

Entering phone number via the audio
control unit
You can enter numbers and special
characters via the telephone keypad.
X Entering: Use x to s, m and
X Press button 9 or : until the desired l to enter characters.
entry is highlighted. You can enter the * character by pressing
X Initiating call: Press button 9 or 6. button l once. You can enter the +
X To close the lists: Press button k.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 157
Audio system 157
character by pressing button l once and hold 9 until the phone number has
and then again within approx. 1.5 seconds. been deleted.
X Initiating a call: Press button 6. or
X Deleting individual digits: Briefly press X Press and hold button 2 until the entire
button 2 in the audio control unit. entry has been deleted.
X Deleting an entire entry: Press and hold X Initiating a call: Press button =
button 2 until the entire entry has been or ; to select ö.
Controls in detail
deleted. X Press 9 to confirm.
or or
X Press button ~. X Press button 6.
Entering phone number via the telephone Initiating a call to a phone book entry
main menu
X % Q Name.
In addition to the actual menu bar, the
X Select entry (Y page 154).
telephone main menu features a second bar
containing numbers, the number menu. X Press button 6 or 9.
When the bar is active (highlighted), you can

Initiating a call to a call list entry
select elements.
X % Q Call Lists.
X Select Calls Received or Calls
Dialed.
The appropriate list appears.
X Select entry (Y page 156).
X Press button 6 or 9.
Redialing
X Entering digits: Press button =
or ; to select the required digit.
X Press 9 to confirm.
X Repeat the procedure until you have select
all digits for the necessary phone number.
X Deleting individual digits: Press button
= or ; to select 2 and briefly
press 9.
i In order to use the redial function, no
or numbers may have been entered.
X Press button 2.
X Press button 6.
X Deleting entire phone number: Press
button = or ; to select 2, press or
X Select ö and press button 9.
The dialed calls list appears. The call dialed
last will be at the top of the list.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 158
158 Audio system
X Selecting a call: Press button 9 X Accepting: Press button 6 on audio

or : until the desired entry is control unit or on the multifunction steering
highlighted. wheel.
X Initiating call: Press button 9 or 6. or
X Press button 9.
Aborting dial or ending a call X Rejecting: Press button ~ on audio
X % Q ¢ and press button 9. control unit.
Controls in detail
or
or
X Press button = to select Reject, and
X Press button ~ on the audio control unit
press button 9 to confirm.
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
The call is rejected.
If you have accepted the call using the audio
Rejecting or accepting calls
control unit or the multifunction steering
You will be notified of an incoming call by the wheel, the call will be conducted via the
ringing tone and a message on the display. hands-free system. The volume of the call can
be adjusted (Y page 117).
i Depending on the mobile phone you are
using, the audio system’s ringing tone may Further operating functions can be found in
differ from the one you have set on your the “Functions during a single-call” section
mobile phone. You may hear (Y page 158).
Rthe ringing tone set on the mobile phone
You can also accept a call if the audio display
is showing a screen other than the telephone
Rthe audio system’s preset ringing tone mode screen. After accepting the call, the
Rthe audio system’s preset ringing tone display switches to the phone display. Once
and the ringing tone set on the mobile the call is over, the display for the previous
phone mode will appear again.
If the caller’s name and number are among

the entries in the audio system’s phone book Functions during a single call
and the caller has not withheld this
information, it will appear on the display. If Switching hands-free microphone on or
the caller withholds this information, you will off
see: The menu bar changes when you make or
receive a call. Instead of the Call Lists
menu item, Mic Off or Mic On will appear.
X Switching off: Select Mic Off.
The following message will flash up on the
display: The microphone is off.
When the microphone is switched off the
symbol Q appears in the main area.
X Switching on: Select Mic On.
The following message will flash up on the
display: The microphone is on.
The microphone is switched on and the
symbol Q disappears in the main area.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 159
Driving systems 159
i You can also switch the microphone on or The currently set speed or last set speed
off by pressing button 8. (“Resume” function) appears in the status
indicator of the multifunction display:
Sending DTMF tones RUSA only: e.g. CRUISE 55 Miles
i This function is not possible with all RCanada only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/h
mobile phones.
G Warning!
Answering machines or other devices can be
Controls in detail
The cruise control is a convenience system
controlled via DTMF tones, e.g. for remote
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
query functions.
operation. The driver is and must always
X Transmitting individual characters: remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
During a call select the required and for safe brake operation.
characters. Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
or and weather conditions make it advisable to
X Press the corresponding button on the travel at a constant speed.
audio control unit. RThe use of the cruise control can be
Every selected character is transmitted dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
immediately. traffic because conditions do not allow safe
X Transmitting a phone number of a driving at a constant speed.
phone book entry as a sequence of RThe use of the cruise control can be
characters: Select Name. dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
X Select the desired phone book entry. changes in tire traction can result in wheel
The entry is transmitted immediately as a spin and loss of control.
sequence of characters. RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
X Switching back to call display: Select
in fog.
Back.
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
Driving systems
this particular preset speed.
Introduction
G Warning!
The cruise control driving system is described When the cruise control is braking, the brake
on the following pages. pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed
The driving safety systems ABS, BAS and automatically). The pedals’ range of motion
ESP® are described in the “Safety and must not be impeded by any obstacles:
security” section (Y page 47). RDo not place any objects in the footwell.
RMake sure that the floormats and carpets
Cruise control are securely in place.
The cruise control maintains the speed you RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
set for your vehicle automatically. pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.

The use of the cruise control is recommended You could otherwise cause an accident and
for driving at a constant speed for extended injure yourself and/or others.
periods of time.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 160
160 Driving systems
On downhill grades, the cruise control

maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system.
In addition, on longer downhill grades the
automatic transmission will downshift
automatically.
Controls in detail
i Vehicles with manual transmission:

If you depress the clutch pedal when
shifting into another gear, the engine speed
: Setting current or higher speed may increase.
; Setting current or lower speed RAlways drive with sufficient, but not
= Canceling the cruise control excessive, engine speed.
? Resume to last set speed RShift the gear in a timely manner.
RAvoid shifting down more than one gear
Activating cruise control
if at all possible.
You can activate the cruise control at a
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Canceling cruise control
You cannot activate the cruise control
Rwhen you brake or
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park direction of arrow =.
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral The last set speed is stored for later use.
position N The last stored speed is deleted from memory
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off when the engine is turned off.
due to a malfunction The cruise control switches off automatically
when
Setting current speed Ryou depress the brake pedal
X Ryou engage the parking brake
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed. Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in (30 km/h)
direction of arrow : or press in direction Rthe ESP® is in operation
of arrow ;.
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
switch
pedal.
Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may malfunction
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
RVehicles with manual transmission: you
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed. engage neutral or depress the clutch pedal
for more than 7 seconds during shifting into
another gear
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 161
Driving systems 161
RVehicles with manual transmission: you Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:

engage a gear too high for the current 1 km/h) increments
speed and thus the engine speed is too low X Increasing: Briefly tip the cruise control
RVehicles with automatic transmission: you lever in direction of arrow :.
shift the automatic transmission into X Decreasing: Briefly tip the cruise control
neutral position N while driving lever in direction of arrow ;.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
Controls in detail
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief Setting stored speed (Resume
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise function)
control will resume the last set speed.
G Warning!
Changing the set speed The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
G Warning! legal speed limits permit. Possible
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment acceleration or deceleration differences
until the vehicle has made the necessary arising from returning to the preset speed
adjustments. could cause an accident and/or serious injury
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to to you and others.
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration direction of arrow ?.
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/ X Remove your foot from the accelerator
or serious injury to you and others. pedal.
When you use the cruise control lever to The last stored speed is deleted from memory
decelerate, the brake system will brake the when the engine is turned off.
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
X Increasing: Lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow : and hold it up until
the desired speed is reached.
X Decreasing: Press the cruise control lever
in direction of arrow ; and hold it down
until the desired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 162
162 Climate control system
Climate control system

Overview of climate control system functions
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Climate control (Y page 162) Automatic climate control (Y page 163)
Controls in detail
The climate control combines a heating and The automatic climate control combines an
ventilation system with a cooling system. automatic heating and ventilation system
with a cooling system. You can adjust the
automatic climate control separately for the
driver’s and passenger side.
Control panels
Climate control
Function Recommendation/Notes
1 Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 166)
control, driver’s side
2 Air volume control (Y page 168)
Climate control on/ i Switch on/off the climate control (Y page 165)
off system.
3 Air distribution (Y page 168)
control
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 163
Climate control system 163
control, passenger
side
5 Rear window (Y page 170)
defroster
Controls in detail
6 Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 168)
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
7 AC cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 165)
Residual heat/ i With the engine turned off, it is possible (Y page 169)
ventilation to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior.
8 Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 169)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.
Automatic climate control
1 Air volume (Y page 168)
2 Air distribution and i Switch on the automatic mode. The (Y page 166)
air volume indicator lamp in button Ã comes on.
(automatic mode)
3 Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 168)
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
control, driver’s side,
raising
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 164
5 Climate control on/ i Switch on/off the climate control (Y page 165)
off system.
control, passenger
side, raising
Controls in detail
7 Rear window (Y page 170)

defroster
8 Air distribution (Y page 168)
9 Residual heat/ i With the engine turned off, it is possible (Y page 169)
ventilation to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior.
a AC cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 165)
b Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 166)
control, passenger
side, lowering
c Display
d Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 166)
control, driver’s side,
lowering
e Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 169)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.
Notes on climate control system passenger compartment through the air

distribution system.
The climate control system is operational
whenever the engine is running. You can G Warning!
operate the climate control system in either Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
the automatic9 or manual mode. The system may require replacement of the filter before
cools or heats the interior depending on the its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
selected interior temperature. filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
It can only function optimally when you are and the windows could fog up, impairing
driving with the windows and the retractable visibility and endangering you and others.
hardtop closed. Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
are filtered out before outside air enters the Center.
9 Vehicles with automatic climate control

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 165
The air conditioning will not engage (no Automatic climate control
cooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 165) is
X Deactivating: Press button ^.
deactivated.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
G Warning! X Reactivating: Press button ^.
Follow the recommended settings for heating The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
and cooling given on the following pages. The previous settings are once again in
Otherwise the windows could fog up, effect.
Controls in detail
impairing visibility and endangering you and or
others.
X Press button Ã.
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
windshield free of snow and debris. Air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically.
When the retractable hardtop is closed, do
not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
window. Air conditioning
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the The air conditioning is operational while the
interior before driving off. The climate engine is running and cools the interior air to
control will then adjust the interior the temperature set by the operator. In
temperature to the set value much faster. addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
Deactivating the climate control G Warning!
system
If you deactivate the air conditioning, the
G Warning! vehicle will not be cooled when weather
When the climate control system is conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
deactivated, the outside air supply and more quickly. Window fogging may impair
circulation are also deactivated. Only choose visibility and endanger you and others.
this setting for a short time when the
retractable hardtop is closed. Otherwise the i Condensated water may drip out from
windows could fog up, impairing visibility and underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
endangering you and others. not an indication of a malfunction.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
Climate control R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
X Deactivating: Set air volume control ; are harmful to the ozone layer.
(Y page 162) to position 0.
Deactivating
X Reactivating: Set air volume control ; to
any speed. It is possible to deactivate the air
The previous settings are once again in conditioning. The interior air will then no
effect. longer be cooled or dehumidified.
X Press button Á10/¿11.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
10 Vehicles with climate control
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 166
The cooling function switches off after a Setting the temperature

short delay.
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
Activating should raise or lower the temperature setting
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can in small increments, preferably starting at
dehumidify the interior air with the air 72‡ (22†).
conditioning.
Climate control
Controls in detail
X Press button Á10/¿11.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on. X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control : and/or ?
(Y page 162) slightly clockwise or
Automatic mode counterclockwise.
The automatic mode is available in vehicles
with automatic climate control only. Automatic climate control
When operating the climate control system in X Increasing/decreasing: Press button
automatic mode, the interior air temperature, 9 or : until the desired temperature
air volume and air distribution are adjusted appears in display H (Y page 163).
automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with
dehumidification is switched on. This function Adjusting air vents
can be switched off if necessary.
G Warning!
G Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air
If you deactivate the air conditioning, the that enters the passenger compartment
vehicle will not be cooled when weather through the air vents can be very hot or very
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up cold (depending on the set temperature). This
more quickly. Window fogging may impair may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
visibility and endanger you and others. skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
X Set the desired temperature Always keep sufficient distance between
(Y page 166). unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
X Activating: Press button Ã.
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
The air volume and air distribution are area of unprotected skin.
adjusted automatically.
X Deactivating: Press button Ã again. For best possible performance of the climate
control:
The air volume changes to level 2 and the X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
air distribution changes to Q. windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 167
i For draft-free ventilation, move the Side air vents

adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
Center air vents
Controls in detail
Example illustration driver’s side
: Left side defroster air vent, fixed
; Left side air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
: Left center air vent, fixed adjustable left side air vent
; Thumbwheel for air volume control for
fixed/adjustable left center air vents X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel = in
= Left center air vent, adjustable the required direction.
? Right center air vent, adjustable
A Thumbwheel for air volume control for AIRSCARF vent
fixed/adjustable right center air vents G Warning!
B Right center air vent, fixed When switching on the AIRSCARF neck-level
X Opening the center air vents: Turn heating, the air streaming from the openings
thumbwheels ; and A upward to the first may be very hot. When in close proximity to
the openings, you could be seriously burned.
stop.
To help avoid serious personal injuries, switch
Center air vents :, =, ? and B are
the AIRSCARF to a lower heating level.
open.
X Turn thumbwheels ; and A upward all
the way.
Only center air vents = and ? are open.
X Closing the center air vents: Turn
thumbwheels ; and A downward all the
way.
Center air vents :, =, ? and B are
closed.
: AIRSCARF vent
You can switch on the AIRSCARF neck-level
heating with the AIRSCARF switch
(Y page 65).
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 168
Adjusting air distribution Automatic climate control

The symbols on the control represent the X Decreasing/increasing: Turn air volume
following functions: control : (Y page 163) clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Symbol Function
M Directs air to the windshield and
through the side defroster air Front defroster
Controls in detail
vents
You can use this setting to defrost the
Q Directs air into the entire windshield, for example if it is iced up.
vehicle interior You can also defog the windshield and the
door windows.
O Directs air to the footwells and
through the side air vents i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the door windows are clear
P Directs air through the center again.
and side air vents
X Activating: Press button ¬.
Climate control The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The climate control switches to the
The air distribution can be adjusted manually. following functions automatically:
X Turn air distribution control = Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
(Y page 162) to the desired symbol. power, depending on outside
The air distribution is adjusted according to temperature
the chosen setting.
Rair flows onto the windshield and the
You can also turn the control to a position
door windows (side air vents must be
between two symbols.
open)
Rthe air conditioning compressor
Automatic climate control
switches on at outside temperatures
X Turn air distribution control D above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
(Y page 163) to the desired symbol. drying
The air distribution is adjusted according to Rthe air recirculation mode is switched off
the chosen setting.
X Deactivating: Press button ¬ again.
You can also turn the control to a position
between two symbols. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
Adjusting air volume
i The cooling remains switched on.
Climate control
X Decreasing/increasing: Turn air volume
control ; (Y page 162) clockwise or
counterclockwise.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 169
Windshield fogged on the outside conditioning is activated, or press button

X Switch the windshield wipers on ¬.
(Y page 76).
X Activating: Press button g.
X Press button Ã12.
Air distribution and air volume are adjusted i The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically. automatically at high outside
Controls in detail
or temperatures.
X Turn air distribution control to P or The indicator lamp in button g is not lit
O. when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
A quantity of outside air is added after
Maximum cooling MAX COOL approximately 30 minutes.
MAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles X Deactivating: Press button g again.
with automatic climate control. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
i The manually selected air recirculation
engine is running.
mode is deactivated automatically:
If the air distribution controls as well as the
Rafter5 minutes if the outside
air volume control are set to Ã and there
is a high demand for cooling, MAX COOL is temperature is below approximately
activated. MAX COOL appears in display H 41‡ (5†)
(Y page 163). Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
This provides the fastest possible cooling of turned off
the vehicle interior (when retractable hardtop Rafter30 minutes if the outside
is closed). temperature is above approximately
41‡ (5†)
Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent Residual heat and ventilation
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle With the engine turned off, it is possible to
from the outside (e. g. before driving through continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
outside air and recirculates the air in the the residual heat produced by the engine.
passenger compartment.
i If you switch on the residual heat function
G Warning! when outside temperatures are high, only
Fogged windows impair visibility, the ventilation will be switched on.
endangering you and others. If the windows
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the i How long the system will provide heating
air recirculation mode immediately should depends on the coolant temperature and
clear interior window fogging. If interior the selected temperature. The blower will
window fogging persists, make sure the air run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air
volume control setting.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 170
170 Retractable hardtop
X Activating: Switch off the ignition. X Switching off: Press button ¤ again.
X Press button Á13/Ì14. The rear window defroster switches off when
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. the battery voltage is too low. The indicator
lamp in button ¤ flashes. Too many
X Deactivating: Press button Á13/
electrical consumers may be operating
Ì14. simultaneously.
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
The residual heat is deactivated needed if required.
Controls in detail
automatically:
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rafter approximately 30 minutes Retractable hardtop
Rif the battery voltage drops Safety notes
Rif the coolant temperature is too low For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop
can only be opened and closed when the
vehicle is standing still.
Rear window defroster G Observe Safety notes, see page 45.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be To prevent possible accidents, only drive the
removed from the rear window before driving. vehicle with the retractable hardtop either
Visibility could otherwise be impaired, completely closed and locked, or fully lowered
endangering you and others. into its storage compartment.
If the retractable hardtop does not completely
The rear window defroster uses a large open or close, the roof hydraulics will lose
amount of power. To keep the battery drain pressure and the retractable hardtop is
to a minimum, switch off the defroster as lowered
soon as the rear window is clear. The
Rafter approximately 7 minutes when the
defroster is switched off automatically after
some time of operation depending on the ignition is switched on
outside temperature. Rafter approximately 15 seconds when the
X Switch on the ignition. ignition is switched off
X Switching on: Press button ¤ on the Shortly before the retractable hardtop is
respective climate control panel. lowered, a warning will sound. In the
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. multifunction display you will see K and
the message Retractable Roof Lowering.
! The rear window defroster cannot be
Properly lock the retractable hardtop before
switched on when the retractable hardtop continuing to drive. Otherwise, the unlocked
is open. The indicator lamp will start hardtop could open while the vehicle is in
flashing if the hardtop is open. motion and cause you to lose control of the
RClose the retractable hardtop. vehicle. You or others could be injured as a
The rear window defroster can then be result.
switched on.

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 171
Retractable hardtop 171
G Warning! Rthe trunk lid is closed

Before operating the retractable hardtop, Rthe outside temperature is above +5‡
make sure there is no danger of anyone being (-15†)
injured by the moving parts (retractable Otherwise the retractable hardtop and
hardtop, roof frame, and trunk lid). trunk as well as other parts of the vehicle
Hands must never be placed near the roof could be damaged.
frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf
behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the
Controls in detail
retractable hardtop is being raised or Opening and closing
lowered. Serious personal injury may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the With the retractable hardtop switch
retractable hardtop switch or button % or G Observe Safety notes, see page 170.
& on the SmartKey. This immediately
X Engage the parking brake.
interrupts the raising or lowering procedure.
X Close the luggage cover (Y page 173).
You then can operate the retractable hardtop
switch or press button % or & on the X Close the trunk lid.
SmartKey to raise or lower the retractable X Switch on the ignition.
hardtop away from the danger zone
! Never sit or place heavy objects on the

rear shelf. Doing so could cause damage to
the retractable hardtop and the rear shelf.
! Please keep in mind that weather

conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Make sure to close the retractable hardtop
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
could be damaged which is not covered by Retractable hardtop switch
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Opening
! When opening and closing the retractable i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry
hardtop, make sure
before you open it. Otherwise water may
Rthere is sufficient clearance for the enter the trunk interior.
retractable hardtop to move up and for
X Push and hold the retractable hardtop
the trunk lid to move back
switch in direction of arrow : until the
Rthe luggage cover is installed, extended retractable hardtop is completely lowered
and closed into its trunk storage compartment.
Rthe trunk is loaded only to the height of
the luggage cover Closing
Rthe luggage/cargo does not push up the X Push and hold the retractable hardtop
closed luggage cover switch in direction of arrow ; until the
retractable hardtop is completely closed
and locked.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 172
172 Retractable hardtop
With the SmartKey Locking

G Observe Safety notes, see page 170. G Observe Safety notes, see page 170.
The retractable hardtop is not fully closed and
locked or not fully opened and locked if
Rthe message K Retractable Roof
In Operation appears in the
multifunction display
Controls in detail
Ra warning sounds for 10 seconds when

driving off or while driving
If the retractable hardtop is not properly
locked, lock it as follows.
X Close the luggage cover (Y page 173). Unlocked status noticed when stopped
X Close the trunk lid. X Switch on the ignition.
X Aim the transmitter eye at an outside door
X To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
handle. closed position, push the retractable
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to hardtop switch (Y page 171) forward until
the outside door handle. the retractable hardtop is fully closed.
Opening (Summer opening feature) or
i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry opened position, push the retractable
before you open it. Otherwise water may hardtop switch (Y page 171) rearward until
enter the trunk interior. the retractable hardtop is fully opened.
X Press and hold button % until the
retractable hardtop is completely open. Unlocked status noticed while driving
The rear side windows also open.
X Release button % to interrupt the
G Warning!
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
opening procedure.
as it is safe to do so and lock the retractable
X Press and hold button % once more to
hardtop before continuing to drive. You could
open the door windows. otherwise endanger yourself and others.
Closing (Convenience closing feature) X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
X Press and hold button & until the soon as it is safe to do so.
retractable hardtop is completely closed. X Leave the ignition switched on.
All currently open windows also close. X To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
X Release button & to interrupt the
closed position, push the retractable
closing procedure. hardtop switch (Y page 171) forward until
the retractable hardtop is fully closed.
or
opened position, push the retractable
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 173
Retractable hardtop 173
hardtop switch (Y page 171) rearward until

the retractable hardtop is fully opened.
Wind screen
The wind screen deflects drafts away from the
driver and passenger when the retractable
hardtop is lowered. Your vehicle may be
Controls in detail
equipped with a cloth wind screen or a
transparent glass wind screen. This section
applies to installing and removing the cloth
wind screen. For information on the glass Installing
wind screen, refer to the separate mounting
X Remove wind screen : from its storage
instructions that come with the glass wind
screen. bag and unfold.
X Attach supporting straps = to fastening
G Warning! pins ?.
The cloth wind screen can restrict the driver’s X Make sure the lower wind screen edging is
vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a
inserted through gap A between the
possible accident when visibility is limited
storage compartment and the rear panel.
(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind
X Close snap fasteners ; by pushing in
screen should be folded back.
handle cap B.
The cloth wind screen is stored in a storage X Pull wind screen : on molding over roll
bag located on the wall behind the seat bars. Pull the wind screen edging, not on
backrests. the netting itself.
Removing
X Pull wind screen : from roll bars.
X Open snap fasteners ; by pulling out
handle cap B.
X Loosen supporting straps = from
fastening pins ?.
X Fold the wind screen and put it back into
storage bag.
Luggage cover
The luggage cover covers luggage/cargo in
the trunk.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 174
174 Loading and storing
! To prevent damage to the retractable damage the vehicle and retractable

hardtop or luggage/cargo when lowering hardtop.
the retractable hardtop: At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does
RLoad trunk only to the height of the not offer any roof racks or any other roof-
luggage cover. mounted devices for use on this vehicle.
RDo not permit luggage/cargo to push up
! This vehicle is not designed to carry any
the closed luggage cover. items on its trunk lid or accommodate any
Controls in detail
RDo not place anything on top of or in front type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such
of the luggage cover. devices may damage the vehicle and
RDo not place anything on the shelf behind
retractable hardtop mechanism.
the roll bar.
Parcel nets
G Warning!
Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
etc.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Closing Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
X Pull the luggage cover at the handle in in the event of an accident.
direction of the arrow until it engages on Parcel nets are located in the passenger
both sides at the trunk sill. footwell and behind the driver’s seat.
Opening
Front storage compartments
X Press the release handle on the luggage
cover. G Warning!
X Guide the luggage cover forward to its end To help avoid personal injury during a collision
stop. or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the trunk if possible.
Loading and storing Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
Roof rack
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
! This vehicle is not designed to carry items Rbraking
on its roof. Roof rails and any roof-mounted
Rvehicle maneuvers
devices, unless expressly approved by
Mercedes-Benz for use on this vehicle Ran accident
model, must not be used as they will
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 175
Loading and storing 175
Glove box Rear storage compartment

The glove box and the storage compartment G Warning!
under the armrest are locked and unlocked
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
centrally.
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the trunk if possible.
Keep compartment lid closed. This will help to
Controls in detail
prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle maneuvers
Ran accident
Storage compartment between the

X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.
seat backrests
X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
until it engages.
Armrest storage compartment
X Opening: Press storage compartment lid

release :.
X Closing: Push storage compartment
lid ; up until it engages.
i The Roadside Assistance button º
(Y page 180) and the Information button
E (Y page 181) are located in the Shelf behind roll bars
storage compartment.
G Warning!
X Opening: Reach into recess ; on the left The shelf behind the roll bars should not be
or right side and lift armrest : in direction used to carry objects. This will prevent such
of arrow. objects from being thrown around and
X Closing: Lower armrest : until it engages. injuring vehicle occupants during an accident
or sudden maneuver.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 176
176 Useful features
Useful features Sun visors

Cup holder G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
G Warning!
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, glare can endanger you and others.
only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
Controls in detail
not fill containers to a height where the

contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking, : Vanity mirror lamp
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. ; Mounting
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup = Holder, e.g. for gas cards
holder may come loose during braking, ? Vanity mirror
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
A Sun visor
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
thrown around in the vehicle interior may B Vanity mirror cover
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury. Glare through the windshield
X Flip sun visor A down when you
experience glare.
Glare through a door window

i This feature is only available on vehicles
with interior lighting package.
X Close vanity mirror cover B if opened.
X Disengage sun visor A from mounting ;.
X Pivot sun visor A to the side.
X Opening: Press briefly on cover plate :. X Adjust sun visor A by pushing or pulling.
X Closing: Press cover plate : until the cup
holder engages. Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror lamp only functions when
the sun visor is engaged in mounting ;.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 177
Useful features 177
X Lift up vanity mirror cover B. Make sure any children traveling with you do
Vanity mirror lamp : comes on. not injure themselves or start a fire with the
hot cigarette lighter.
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is

Ashtray
being used extensively, the vehicle battery
may become discharged.
Controls in detail
X Opening: Press cover plate : briefly in
direction of the arrow.
X Removing ashtray insert: Secure vehicle
X Push in cigarette lighter :.
from movement by setting the parking
brake. Cigarette lighter : will pop out
X Automatic transmission: Shift the
automatically when hot.
X Reinsert cigarette lighter : in its socket
position N. after use.
X Manual transmission: Shift the manual
transmission into 2nd gear.
X Reach into both recesses on the left and
Power outlet
right side of the retainer and pull out the The power outlet can be used to
ashtray insert. accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Place the (e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)
ashtray insert into the retainer. up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).
X Push the ashtray insert down into the If the engine is off and the power outlet is
retainer until it engages. being used extensively, the vehicle battery
X Closing: Press cover plate : until the may become discharged.
ashtray engages. X Switch on the ignition.
Cigarette lighter
G Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 178
178 Useful features
Power outlet in passenger footwell information on to the Customer Assistance

Center
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network and
pass the information on to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Controls in detail
The Tele Aid system

(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
of response:
RAutomatic and manual emergency
Tele Aid
RRoadside Assistance
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed. RInformation
To ensure your system is activated and To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele
operational, please press Information Aid call do the following:
button E to perform the acquaintance
X Press button W or X on the
call. Failure to complete either of these
steps may result in a system that is not multifunction steering wheel.
activated. or
If you have any questions regarding X Use the adjustment button on your audio
activation, please call the Customer system or COMAND system.
Assistance Center at Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) www.mbusa.com (USA only) for more
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada information and a description of all available
only). features.
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID System self-test
and password in the mail. You may use this The system performs a self-test after you
password to access the Tele Aid section in have switched on the ignition.
“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA
only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you G Warning!
access to account information, remote door A malfunction in the system has been
unlock and more. detected if any or all of the following
The Tele Aid system is available if conditions occur:
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
Rit has been activated and is operational.
not come on during the system self-test.
Activation requires a subscription for
monitoring services, connection and RThe indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
cellular air time button º does not come on during the
Rvehicle
system self-test.
battery power is available
Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 179
Useful features 179
RThe indicator lamp in Information button An emergency call can also be initiated
E does not come on during the system manually (Y page 180).
self-test. Once the emergency call is in progress, the
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button, indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
Roadside Assistance button º, or flash. The message Connecting Call
Information button E remains
appears in the multifunction display and the
audio system or the COMAND system is
illuminated constantly in red after the
muted. When the connection is established,
system self-test.
Controls in detail
the message Call Connected appears in the
RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative multifunction display.
appears in the multifunction display after All information relevant to the emergency,
the system self-test. such as the location of the vehicle
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, (determined by the GPS satellite location
the system may not operate as expected. In system), vehicle model, identification number
case of an emergency, help will have to be and color are generated.
summoned by other means. A voice connection between the Customer
Have the system checked at the nearest Assistance Center and the occupants of the
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the vehicle will be established automatically soon
Customer Assistance Center at after the emergency call has been initiated.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) The Customer Assistance Center will attempt
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only) to determine the nature of the emergency
as soon as possible. more precisely, provided they can speak to
an occupant of the vehicle.
Emergency calls i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a ambulance will be sent to the vehicle
immediately.
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and G Warning!
operational, please press Information If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
button E to perform the acquaintance flashing continuously and there was no voice
call. Failure to complete either of these connection to the Customer Assistance
steps may result in a system that is not Center established, then the Tele Aid system
activated. could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
If you have any questions regarding relevant cellular phone network is not
activation, please call the Customer available).
Assistance Center at The message Call Failed appears in the
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) multifunction display for approximately
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada 10 seconds.
only). Should this occur, assistance must be
An emergency call is initiated automatically summoned by other means.
following an accident in which the Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have i The “911” emergency call system is a
deployed. public service. Using it without due cause
i An automatically initiated Tele Aid is a criminal offense.
emergency call cannot be canceled.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 180
180 Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on

the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the audio system or the
COMAND system.
Roadside Assistance button

Controls in detail
X Open the storage compartment under the

armrest (Y page 175).
X Briefly press on cover : to open.

X Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will X Press and hold Roadside Assistance
flash until the emergency call is concluded. button : for longer than 2 seconds.
X Wait for a voice connection to the A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Customer Assistance Center. Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The
X Close cover : after the emergency call is indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
concluded. button : will flash while the call is in
progress. The message Connecting
G Warning! Call will appear in the multifunction
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the display and the audio system or the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, COMAND system is muted.
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please When the connection is established, the
do not wait for voice contact after you have message Call Connected appears in the
pressed the emergency button. Carefully multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. transmit data generating the vehicle
The Customer Assistance Center will identification number, model, color and
automatically contact local emergency location (subject to availability of cellular and
officials with the vehicle’s approximate GPS signals).
location if they receive an automatic SOS
signal and cannot make voice contact with the i The audio system or COMAND system
vehicle occupants. display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in
progress. While the call is connected you
can change to the navigation menu by
pressing the NAVI button on the COMAND
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 181
Useful features 181
system. Spoken commands are not

available.
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established.
X Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
Controls in detail
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized X Press and hold Information button : for
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
longer than 2 seconds.
labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
A call to the Customer Assistance Center
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for
will be initiated. The indicator lamp in
more information.
Information button : will flash while the
Sign and Drive services (USA only): call is in progress. The message
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons Connecting Call will appear in the
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with multifunction display and the COMAND
the vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at no system is muted.
charge.
When the connection is established, the
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside message Call Connected appears in the
Assistance button : is flashing multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
continuously and there was no voice transmit data generating the vehicle
connection to the Customer Assistance identification number, model, color and
Center established, then the Tele Aid location (subject to availability of cellular and
system could not initiate a Roadside GPS signals).
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
i The audio system or COMAND system
phone network is not available). The
display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in
message Call Failed appears in the
progress. While the call is connected you
can change to the navigation menu by
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on pressing the NAVI button on the COMAND
the multifunction steering wheel. system. Spoken commands are not
or available.
X Press the respective button for ending a A voice connection between the Customer
telephone call on the audio system or the Assistance Center representative and the
COMAND system. occupants of the vehicle will be established.
Information regarding the operation of your
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Information button
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
X Open the storage compartment under the and services is available to you.
armrest (Y page 175). For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 182
182 Useful features
i If the indicator lamp in Information separate COMAND system operating

button : is flashing continuously and instructions.
there was no voice connection to the Destination Download allows you access to a
Customer Assistance Center established, database of over 10 million points of interest
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate (POIs) that can be downloaded to your
an Information call (e.g. the relevant vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
cellular phone network is not available). destination, the address can be downloaded,
The message Call Failed appears in the or can be provided with points of interests
Controls in detail
multifunction display. near your location.

X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on Route guidance
You will be prompted to confirm that route
or guidance to the entered address is to be
X Press the respective button for ending a started.
telephone call on the audio system or the X Select Yes using button = or ; on
COMAND system.
the COMAND system.
X Press button 9 on the COMAND system
Call priority
to confirm.
If other service calls such as a Roadside The system calculates the route and
Assistance call or Information call are active, subsequently starts the route guidance to the
an emergency call is still possible. In this defined address.
case, the emergency call will take priority and
override all other active calls. i If you select No, you can save the address
to your address book.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Automatic i The Destination Download feature is
initiated emergency calls can only be available if the relevant mobile phone
terminated by a Customer Assistance Center network is available and data connection is
representative. All other calls can be possible.
terminated by pressing button ~ on the
multifunction steering wheel or the Search & Send
respective button for ending a telephone call
on the audio system or the COMAND system. “Search & Send” is a navigation destination
address entry service. For more information
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, on “Search & Send”, refer to separate
the audio system or the COMAND system COMAND system operating instructions.
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
connected to the COMAND system. If you
Remote door unlock
must use this phone, we recommend that
you use it only with the vehicle at a In case you have locked your vehicle
standstill in a safe location. unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
Destination Download to the COMAND X Contact the Customer Assistance Center
system at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
i The components and operating principles
of the COMAND system can be found in the
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 183
Useful features 183
(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or a call to the Customer Assistance Center is

1-888-923-8367 (Canada only). initiated automatically by the Tele Aid
You will be asked to provide your password. system provided Tele Aid service was
X Then return to your vehicle at the time subscribed to and properly activated, and
arranged with the Customer Assistance that necessary cellular service and GPS
Center and pull the trunk recessed handle coverage are available. See “Anti-theft
for a minimum of 20 seconds until the alarm system” (Y page 51) and “Tow-away
indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing. alarm” (Y page 52).
Controls in detail
The message Connecting Call appears in
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle Garage door opener
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of The integrated remote control can operate up
“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password to three separately controlled devices
(USA only). compatible with HomeLink® or some other
i The remote door unlock feature is systems.
available if the relevant cellular phone G Warning!
network is available. Before programming the integrated remote
The SOS button will flash and the message control to a garage door opener or gate
Connecting Call will appear in the operator, make sure people and objects are
multifunction display to indicate receipt of out of the way of the device to prevent
the door unlock command. potential harm or damage. When
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for programming a garage door opener, the door
more than 20 seconds before door unlock moves up or down. When programming a gate
authorization was received by the operator, the gate opens or closes.
Customer Assistance Center, you must Do not use the integrated remote control with
wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
recessed handle again. and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
cannot detect an object - signaling the door
X Report the incident to the police. to stop and reverse - does not meet current
The police will issue a numbered incident U.S. federal safety standards.
report. When programming a garage door opener,
X Pass this number on to the Customer park vehicle outside the garage.
Assistance Center along with your Do not run the engine while programming the
password. integrated remote control. Inhalation of
The Customer Assistance Center will then exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness
located, the Customer Assistance Center and possible death.
will contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
i If the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds,
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 184
184 Useful features
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously

press hand-held remote control button B
and the desired signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
Controls in detail
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately

the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
Overhead control panel with integrated remote been programmed, the indicator lamp will
control
start flashing after 20 seconds.
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes
vehicle equipment.
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
Programming the integrated remote button and the signal transmitter button.
control
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
X Step 1: Switch on the ignition. signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed observe indicator lamp :.
a signal transmitter button and wish to If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
retain its programming, proceed to step 3. programming is complete and your device
or should activate when the respective signal
X If you are programming the integrated transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
remote control for the first time, press and and released.
hold the two outer signal transmitter i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
buttons ; and ? and release them when
approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
indicator lamp : begins to flash after
a constant light, continue with
approximately 20 seconds. programming steps 8 through 12 as your
Do not hold the buttons for longer than garage door opener may be equipped with
30 seconds. the “rolling code” feature.
This procedure erases any previous
X Step 7: To program the remaining two
settings for all three channels and
initializes the memory. If you later wish to signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
program a second and/or third hand-held above starting with step 3.
transmitter to the remaining two signal Rolling code programming
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
and begin directly with step 3. To train a garage door opener (or other rolling
code devices) with the rolling code feature,
X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
follow these instructions after completing the
control A of the device you wish to train “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away this text. For your convenience and to
from the signal transmitter button (;, = complete the procedure faster, you might
or ?) to be programmed, while keeping want to have someone assist you.
indicator lamp : in view.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 185
Useful features 185
X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the If you live in Canada or if you are having
garage door opener motor head unit. difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
i Exact location and color of the button may programming procedures, replace step 4 with
vary by garage door opener brand. the following:
Depending on manufacturer, the “training”
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
button may also be referred to as “learn” or
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
the transmitting button, refer to the garage release this button until it has been
Controls in detail
door opener Operator’s Manual. successfully trained.
X While still holding down the signal
X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the
transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle”
garage door opener motor head unit.
your hand-held remote control button B
The “training light” is activated.
as follows: Press and hold button B for
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
following two steps.
and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the remote control until the frequency signal
programmed signal transmitter button (;, has been learned.
= or ?). Upon successful training, indicator
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
release same signal transmitter button a after several seconds.
second time to complete the training X Proceed with programming step 5 and
process. step 6 to complete.
i Some garage door openers (or other i Upon completion of programming the
rolling code equipped devices) may require integrated remote control, make sure you
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and retain the hand-held remote control that
release the same signal transmitter button came with the garage door opener, gate
a third time to complete the training operator or other device. You may need it
process. for use in other vehicles, for future
X Step 12: Confirm the garage door programming of an integrated remote
operation by pressing the programmed control, or simply for continued use as a
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?). hand-held remote control to operate the
X Step 13: To program the remaining two
respective device in other situations.
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3. Reprogramming a single signal
transmitter button
Gate operator/Canadian programming To program a device using a signal
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter button previously trained, follow
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) these steps:
after several seconds of transmission which
may not be long enough for the integrated
signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 186
186 Useful features
X Switch on the ignition. control is compatible with radio-frequency

X Press and hold the desired signal devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not RPut a new battery in hand-held remote
release the button. control A. This will increase the likelihood
Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after of the hand-held remote control sending a
20 seconds. stronger and more accurate signal to the
X Without releasing the signal transmitter integrated remote control.
button, proceed with programming starting
Controls in detail
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held

with step 3. remote control A at different lengths and
angles from the signal transmitter button
Operation of integrated remote control (;, = or ?) you are programming.
X Switch on the ignition. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
X Select and press the appropriate
angle at varying distances.
integrated signal transmitter button (;,
RIf another hand-held remote control is
= or ?) to activate the remote controlled
device. available for the same device, try the
The integrated remote control transmitter programming steps again using that other
continues to send the signal as long as the hand-held remote control. Make sure new
button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. batteries are in the hand-held remote
control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten the antenna wire from the
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory garage door opener assembly. This may
help improve transmitting and/or receiving
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of signals.
all three channels.
i Certain types of garage door openers are
X Switch on the ignition. incompatible with the integrated remote
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal control. If you should experience further
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for difficulties with programming the
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator integrated remote control, contact an
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
longer than 30 seconds. the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
The codes of all three channels are erased. Center (USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or the HomeLink®
Programming tips Hotline (USA only) at 1-800-355-3515, or
the Customer Service (Canada only) at
If you are having difficulty programming the 1-800-387-0100.
integrated remote control, here are some
helpful tips:
RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote
control A (typically located on the reverse
side of the remote). The integrated remote
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 187
Useful features 187
i USA only: X Move the driver’s seat or passenger seat as

This device complies with Part 15 of the far to the rear as possible.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
Controls in detail
operation.
X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer
i Canada only: pins ; in direction of arrow :.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
and
X Installing: Press floormat eyelets ? onto
retainer pins A in direction of arrow =.
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened
using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 188
188
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 189
189
Vehicle equipment ............................ 190

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 190
At the gas station ............................. 190
Engine compartment ........................ 192
Tires and wheels ............................... 197
Winter driving ................................... 219
Driving instructions .......................... 221
Maintenance ...................................... 225
Vehicle care ....................................... 227
Operation
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 190
190 At the gas station
Vehicle equipment ! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:

RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
i This Operator’s Manual describes all do not exceed a speed of 85 mph
features, standard or optional, potentially (140 km/h).
available for your vehicle at the time of RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds
purchase. Please be aware that your
above 4 500 rpm in each gear.
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual. RShift gears in a timely manner.
All of the above instructions, as may apply to
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Operation
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine

or the rear differential has been replaced.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied i Always obey applicable speed limits.
you will be with its performance later on.
RDrive your vehicle during the first
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but At the gas station
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. Refueling
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full
throttle driving) and excessive engine G Warning!
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
in each gear). It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
- Select C as the preferred shift program materials near gasoline!
(Y page 88) for the first 1 000 miles Turn off the engine before refueling.
(1 500 km).
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
- Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
by shifting to a lower gear using the gear contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
selector lever. Direct skin contact with fuels and the
- Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
(Y page 88) only when driving at health.
moderate speeds (for hill driving).
G Warning!
- Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
RVehicles with manual transmission: pressure in the system which could cause a
Shift gears in a timely manner. gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel pump
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine
with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of
diesel fuel will damage the fuel system and
engine. Damage resulting from the use of
non-approved fuels or fuel additives or
resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 191
At the gas station 191
fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty.
! If you have accidentally filled the tank

with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
drained completely. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
system drained completely.
Operation
X Turn off the engine.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
gasoline in this vehicle. filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel
Any noticeable irregularities in engine tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the
operation should be repaired promptly. malfunction indicator lamp ! (USA
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may only) or ; (Canada only) to illuminate.
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to For more information, see also “Practical
overheat and potentially start a fire. hints” (Y page 262).
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 switch.
(average of 96 RON/86 MON). X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the
Information on gasoline quality can point indicated by the arrow.
normally be found on the fuel pump. Please X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.
contact gas station personnel in case
X Take off fuel filler cap ;.
labels on the pump cannot be found.
For more information on gasoline, see X Place fuel filler cap ; in direction of arrow
“Premium unleaded gasoline” into holder =.
(Y page 303), see “Fuel requirements” X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
(Y page 303), or contact an authorized X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
until it audibly engages.
SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks the
fuel filler flap. i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
i In case the central locking system does vehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin will
not release the fuel filler flap, or the prevent closing the fuel filler flap.
opening mechanism is clamping, contact X Close fuel filler flap :.
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand Check regularly and before a long trip
side of the vehicle towards the rear. For information on quantities and
requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 300).
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 192
192 Engine compartment
Check the following: G Warning!

REngine oil level (Y page 193) To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
RTire inflation pressure (Y page 201) moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
RCoolant level (Y page 196)
The radiator fan may continue to run for
RVehicle lighting (Y page 267) approximately 30 seconds or may even
RWasher system and headlamp cleaning restart after the engine has been turned off.
system (Y page 196) Stay clear of fan blades.
RBrake fluid (Y page 197) G Warning!
Operation
The engine is equipped with a transistorized

ignition system. Because of the high voltage
Engine compartment it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
Hood
socket) of the ignition system
G Warning! Rwith the engine running
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle Rwhile starting the engine
is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be
forced open by passing air flow. Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
This could cause the hood to come loose and engine is turned manually
injure you and/or others.
Opening
G Warning!
Do not open the hood when the engine is
overheated. You could be seriously injured.
Observe the coolant temperature display to
determine whether the engine may be
overheated. If you see flames or smoke
coming from the engine compartment, move
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
has cooled. If necessary, call the fire X Pull hood lock release lever :.
department. The hood is unlocked.
G Warning! ! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are
You could be injured when the hood is open – folded forward away from the windshield.
even when the engine is turned off. Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To hood could be damaged.
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
before touching any components on the
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 193
Engine compartment 193
Engine oil consumption checks should only

be made after the vehicle break-in period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For further information contact an
Operation
X Push handle ; under the hood upwards.
Notes on checking engine oil level
X Lift the hood at the front edge.
The hood will be held open at shoulder When checking the oil level
height by gas-filled struts automatically. Rthe vehicle must be parked on level ground
Rwith the engine at operating temperature,

Closing the vehicle must have been stationary for
at least 5 minutes with the engine turned
G Warning!
off
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
Rwith the engine not at operating
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone. temperature, the vehicle must have been
Make sure the hood is securely engaged stationary for at least 30 minutes with the
before driving off. Do not continue driving if engine turned off
the hood can no longer engage after an
accident, for example. The hood could Checking engine oil level with the oil
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in dipstick
motion and injure you and/or others. On the SLK 300 and SLK 350 you can check
the engine oil level with the oil dipstick.
X Let the hood drop from a height of
X Open the hood (Y page 192).
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above
the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with
somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine consumes will
depend on a number of factors, including
X Pull out oil dipstick :.
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 194
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the OK

dipstick guide tube. RAdd 1.0 qt. (Canada: 1.0 liter)
X Pull out oil dipstick : again after to reach max. oil level.
approximately 3 seconds to obtain RAdd 1.5 qts. (Canada: 1.5 liters)
accurate reading.
to reach max. oil level.
The oil level is correct when it is between
RAdd 2.0 qts. (Canada: 2.0 liters)
lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
mark ; of oil dipstick :. to reach max. oil level.
i The filling quantity between the upper and i If you want to interrupt the checking
lower marks on the oil dipstick is procedure, press button * or & on
Operation
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). the multifunction steering wheel.
X If necessary, add engine oil. X If necessary, add engine oil.

For more information on engine oil, see For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.” “Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(Y page 300). (Y page 300).
For information on messages in the Other display messages
multifunction display concerning engine oil, If the ignition is not switched on, the following
see the “Practical hints” section message appears in the multifunction
(Y page 250). display:
Turn on ignition
Checking engine oil level with the
to see engine oil level.
control system
On the SLK 55 AMG you can check the engine If you see the message:
oil level with the control system. Observe
X Switch on the ignition. Waiting Time
The standard display appears in the X If the engine is at operating temperature,
multifunction display (Y page 96). wait 5 minutes before repeating check
X Press button * or & on the procedure.
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly X If the engine is not at operating
until the following message appears in the temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
multifunction display: before checking oil.
If you see the message:
Cannot check engine oil level
with engine on.
X If the engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before checking oil.
X If the engine is not at operating
One of the following messages will
temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
subsequently appear in the multifunction
before checking oil.
display:
REngine Oil Level
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 195
Engine compartment 195
i If you want to interrupt the checking

procedure, press button * or & on
If there is excess engine oil with the engine at
normal operating temperature, the following
message appears in the multifunction
display:
Engine Oil Level
Reduce Oil Level
X Have excess oil siphoned or drained off.
Operation
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Example illustration: SLK 350 (SLK 300 similar)
Center.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered
For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 251).
Adding engine oil SLK 55 AMG

! Only use approved engine oils and oil X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck.
filters required for vehicles with X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
Maintenance System. For a listing of to overfill with oil.
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). entering the ground or water.
The following will result in engine or
emission control system damage not ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited off. It could cause damage to the engine
Warranty: and emission control system not covered
RUsing engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.
required for the Maintenance System. For more information on engine oil, see the
RChanging of oil and oil filter at change “Technical data” section (Y page 300) and
intervals longer than those called for by (Y page 302).
the Maintenance System.
RUsing any oil additives.
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need to
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 196
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the

transmission.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the
coolant temperature must be below 158‡
Operation
(70†). Example illustration: SLK 350

G Warning! X Using a rag, slowly open cap ;
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns: approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
RUse extreme caution when opening the to relieve excess pressure.
hood if there are any signs of steam or X Continue turning cap ; counterclockwise
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or and remove it.
if the coolant temperature display indicates The coolant level is correct if the level
that the coolant is overheated.
Rforcold coolant: reaches marking bar
RDo not remove the cap on the coolant = in coolant expansion tank :
expansion tank if the coolant temperature
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
is above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to
cool down before removing the cap. The (1.5 cm) higher
coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid X Add coolant as required.
and is under pressure. X Screw cap ; back on and tighten it.
RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap For more information on coolant, see the
approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise “Technical data” section (Y page 301) and
to relieve excess pressure. If opened (Y page 304).
immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam
will be blown out under pressure.
RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Washer system and headlamp
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which cleaning system
may burn if it comes into contact with hot G Warning!
engine parts.
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze

where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could result
in damage to the washer system/fluid
reservoir.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 197
Tires and wheels 197
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
damage the plastic lenses of the problem. For more information, see
headlamps. “Practical hints”.
When checking the brake fluid level, the
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in
vehicle must be parked on level ground.
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
Fluid for the washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system is supplied from the washer
Operation
fluid reservoir.
During all seasons, use MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix it
with water or premixed washer solvent/
antifreeze depending on the ambient
temperature (Y page 306).
The brake fluid level is correct when it is
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir.
Tires and wheels

Safety notes
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommended
rims and tires for summer and winter
Example illustration: SLK 350 operation. They can also offer advice
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab concerning tire service and purchase.
of cap : upwards. G Warning!
X Refill the washer fluid reservoir. Replace rims or tires with the same
X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press designation, manufacturer and type as shown
cap : onto filler hole until it engages. on the original part. For further information
For more information, see “Washer system contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
and headlamp cleaning system” If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
(Y page 302). mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged. Also, the
operating clearance of the wheels and the
Brake fluid level tires may no longer be correct.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake G Warning!

fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
mark or below, have the brake system tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks
immediately. Contact an authorized
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 198
198 Tires and wheels
the tires have sustained damage, replace inflation pressure loss and damage to the
them. tire beads.
When replacing rims, only use genuine RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the inflation pressure and correct as required.
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result RDo not allow your tires to wear down too
in the bolts loosening and possibly an far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
accident. sharply reduced at tread depths of less
Retreaded tires are not tested or than 1/8 in (3 mm).
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
RWhen replacing individual tires, you should
previous damage cannot always be
mount new tires on the front wheels first
Operation
recognized on retreads. The operating safety

of the vehicle cannot be assured when such (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
tires are used. around).
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or Recommended tire inflation pressure
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you G Warning!
should turn on the hazard warning flashers, Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
carefully slow down, and drive with caution to Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
an area which is a safe distance from the road. wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody affect handling and fuel economy, and are
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires more likely to fail from being overheated.
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
tire dealer for repairs. wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
G Warning! because they are more likely to become
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects punctured or damaged by road debris,
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You potholes etc.
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build- and Loading Information placard on the
up and possibly a fire. driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
Important guidelines in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
type and make. Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
RTires must be of the correct size for the rim. Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 205).
RBreak in new tires for approximately
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
RRegularly check the tires and rims for pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 199
1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient

temperature, the driving speed and the tire
load, the tire temperature changes. When the
tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
tire inflation pressure will change by
approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in
mind when checking tire inflation pressure on
warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only
if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the
current operating conditions. If you check the
tire inflation pressure when the tires are
Operation
warm, the reading will be higher than the cold The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to the recommended cold tire inflation
match the specified cold tire inflation pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle
pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
underinflated. apply to the tires installed as original
Follow recommended cold tire inflation equipment.
pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver’s door Important notes on tire inflation
B-pillar. pressure
Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
G Warning!
the best handling, tread life and riding
comfort. If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,
check the tires for punctures from foreign
In addition to the Tire and Loading objects and/or whether air is leaking from the
Information placard on the driver’s door valves or from around the rim.
B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
pressure label on the inside of the filler flap Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
for any additional information pertaining to are also increased while driving, depending
special driving situations. For more on the driving speed and the tire load.
information, see “Important notes on tire If you will be driving your vehicle at high
inflation pressure” (Y page 199). speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
i Data shown on Tire and Loading where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
Information placard example are for the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
illustration purposes only. Tire data are of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
specific to each vehicle and may vary from tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
data shown in the following illustration. tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
Refer to Tire and Loading Information build up and result in sudden tire failure.
placard on vehicle for actual data specific If you are not sure about the proper tire
to your vehicle. inflation, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
value for speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 200
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation Some tire inflation pressure labels may only
pressure for normal driving speeds. show the rim diameter instead of the entire
Supplemental tire inflation pressure tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18".
information for different loading conditions of The rim diameter is part of the tire size as
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 213).
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
For the tire inflation pressure for spare
wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
Operation
wheels with collapsible tire refer to

Rthe yellow label on the spare wheel rim
Rthe “Technical data” section of this
Operator’s Manual (Y page 300)
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B-pillar Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures
specific to rim diameter
Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
pressures on the tire inflation pressure label Potential problems associated with
are valid for all approved, factory-equipped underinflated and overinflated tires
tires. When a tire size is specified, the tire
inflation pressure that follows applies to that Underinflated tires
particular tire size only.
G Warning!
i Data shown on tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
label examples are for illustration purposes Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
only. Tire inflation pressure data are wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
specific to each vehicle and may vary from affect handling and fuel economy, and are
data shown in the following illustrations. more likely to fail from being overheated.
Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
vehicle for actual data specific to your Underinflated tires can
vehicle. Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear
Radversely affect fuel economy
Rlead to tire failure from being overheated
Radversely affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all
approved, factory equipped tires and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 201
punctured or damaged by road debris, Checking tire inflation pressure

potholes etc. manually
Overinflated tires can Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire
inflation pressure:
Radversely affect handling characteristics
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
Rcause uneven tire wear X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
Rbe more prone to damage from road X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
hazards gauge and check against the
Radversely affect ride comfort recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
Operation
Rincrease stopping distance
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 205). If
necessary, add air to achieve the
recommended tire inflation pressure.
Checking tire inflation pressure
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
Safety notes inflation pressure by pushing the metal
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
G Warning! Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. with the tire gauge.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires X Install the valve cap.
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely X Repeat this procedure for each tire.
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can System (Advanced TPMS), (USA only)
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced
because they are more likely to become TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure
punctured or damaged by road debris, in the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings in
potholes etc. case of pressure loss in one or more of the
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the tires.
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire The TPMS is equipped with a combination low
and Loading Information placard on the tire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale in
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires the instrument cluster. Depending on how the
can overheat them, possibly causing a telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result pressure condition or a malfunction in the
in handling or steering problems, or brake TPMS system itself:
failure. RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires is significantly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
underinflated. There is no malfunction in
a month.
the TPMS.
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
RIf the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
when the tires are cold (Y page 198).
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
itself is not operating properly.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
equipped with the proper electronic sensors.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 202
G Warning! reached the level to trigger illumination of the

The TPMS does not indicate a warning for TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
Tire and Loading Information placard or the the system is not operating properly. The
supplemental tire inflation pressure TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap. the low tire pressure telltale. When the
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire flash for approximately 1 minute and then
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this remain continuously illuminated. This
Operation
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully sequence will continue upon subsequent
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
steering maneuvers. exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
G Warning! detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
should be checked at least once a month reasons, including the installation of
when cold and inflated to the inflation incompatible replacement or alternate tires
pressure recommended by the vehicle or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading TPMS from functioning properly. Always
Information placard on the driver’s door B- check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
tires of a different size than the size indicated alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
on the Tire and Loading Information placard continue to function properly.
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure i If a condition causing the TPMS to
for those tires. malfunction develops, it may take up to
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has 10 minutes for the system to signal a
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring malfunction using the TPMS telltale
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire flashing and illumination sequence.
pressure telltale when one or more of your The telltale extinguishes after a few
tires are significantly underinflated. minutes driving if the malfunction has been
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure corrected.
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
multifunction display. The current tire
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
inflation pressure for each tire appears in the
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
multifunction display after a few minutes of
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
driving.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s i Possible differences between the
handling and stopping ability. Please note that readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the
maintenance, and it is the driver’s vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure displayed by the control system
pressure, even if underinflation has not apply to sea level. In high-altitude
locations, the reading on a tire pressure
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 203
gauge will be higher than the reading issued i This device complies with Part 15 of the
by the vehicle’s control system. Do not FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
reduce the tire inflation pressure under following two conditions:
such circumstances. 1. This device may not cause harmful
X Switch on the ignition. interference, and
X Press button V or U on the 2. this device must accept any
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly interference received, including
until the standard display appears in the interference that may cause undesired.
multifunction display (Y page 96). Any unauthorized modification to this
X Press button & or * until the current device could void the user’s authority to
Operation
inflation pressure for each tire appears in operate the equipment.
Tire inflation pressure warnings
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display. In addition, an acoustic warning
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
instrument cluster comes on.
When the vehicle has been parked for longer
than 20 minutes, the message Tire
pressure is only displayed after
driving for a few minutes. appears in
The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensors Example illustration
automatically after the learn-in phase. As long
The respective tire is indicated by a red
as the tire inflation pressure values cannot be
rectangle.
allocated to the individual wheels, the
message Tire Pressure Monitor Active Restarting Advanced TPMS
Menu: R-Button appears. Despite this
G Warning!
message, the tire inflation pressure values
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire
are monitored already.
inflation pressure to the recommended cold
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
of the removed road wheel for some You might lose control over the vehicle.
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
the indicated value where the spare wheel When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
is mounted does not reflect the actual new reference values for each tire.
spare tire inflation pressure. The TPMS must be restarted when you have
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
i Operating radio transmission equipment level (e.g. because of different load or driving
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to
or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS the current tire inflation pressures.
to malfunction.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 204
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire After driving a few minutes the system
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure verifies that the current tire inflation
recommended for the vehicle operating pressures are within the system’s specified
condition. Tire inflation pressure should only range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the pressures are accepted as reference values
recommended tire inflation pressure on the and then monitored.
Tire and Loading Information placard on the X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire inflation pressure i When the wheel positions have been
information for driving at high speeds or for changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded may be displayed for the wrong position
Operation
vehicle condition. If such information is temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
provided, it can be found on the inside of the the inflation pressure will be shown for the
fuel filler flap. correct position.
X Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 205) or the supplemental tire Maximum tire inflation pressure
inflation pressure information on the inside G Warning!
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
X Press button V or U on the
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
until the standard display appears in the affect handling and fuel economy, and are
multifunction display (Y page 96). more likely to fail from being overheated.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
you see the current inflation pressures for adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
each tire appear in the display or the wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
following message appears in the and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
multifunction display: because they are more likely to become
Tire pressure is punctured or damaged by road debris,
only displayed potholes etc.
after driving for
a few minutes.
X Press the reset button (Y page 92).
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
X If you wish to confirm: Press button
W.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Restarted i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 205
may vary from data shown in above

illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 198) for proper tire
inflation.
Loading the vehicle
Operation
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
can be found on the driver’s door
B-pillar. This placard tells you important : Driver’s door B-pillar
information about the number of people
that can be in the vehicle and the total Following is a discussion on how to work with
weight that can be carried in the vehicle. the information contained on the Tire and
It also contains information on the proper Loading Information placard with regards to
size and recommended tire inflation loading your vehicle.
pressures for the original equipment tires
on your vehicle. Tire and Loading Information
(2) The certification label, also found on the
G Warning!
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight and Loading Information placard on the
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
cargo. The certification label also tells can overheat them, possibly causing a
you about the front and rear axle weight blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight in handling or steering problems, or brake
Rating (GAWR). failure.
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front Tire and Loading Information placard
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or i Data shown on Tire and Loading
GAWR for either the front axle or rear Information placard example are for
axle. illustration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 206
can be in the vehicle. The Tire and Loading

Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 205).
Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
Operation
The Tire and Loading Information placard Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
showing load limit information : is located X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 205). combined weight of occupants and cargo
X Locate the statement “The combined should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
weight of occupants and cargo should on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” Information placard.
on the Tire and Loading Information X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
placard. the driver and passengers that will be riding
The combined weight of all occupants, in your vehicle.
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
applicable) should never exceed the weight the driver and passengers from
referenced in that statement. XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
Seating capacity available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
i Data shown on Tire and Loading equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
Information placard example are for 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity amount of available cargo and luggage load
data are specific to each vehicle and may capacity is 650 lbs
vary from data shown in the following (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
Information placard on vehicle for actual
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
data specific to your vehicle.
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 208).
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and
The seating capacity gives you important number and size of occupants. The following
information on the number of occupants that
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 207
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This

is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 206).
Operation
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 208
Example 1 Example 2
Step 1 Combined weight limit of 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
occupants and cargo from
Tire and Loading Information
placard
Step 2 Number of occupants (driver 1 2
and passengers)
Occupants weight Occupant 1: 175 lbs Occupant 1: 175 lbs
Operation
Occupant 2: 195 lbs

Combined weight of all 175 lbs 370 lbs
occupants
Step 3 Available cargo/luggage and 1 500 lbs - 175 lbs = 1 500 lbs - 370 lbs =
trailer tongue weight (total 1 325 lbs 1 130 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information placard
minus combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total
less cargo and luggage load capacity is allowable weight that can be carried by a
available. single axle (front or rear).
For more information, see “Trailer tongue To assure that your vehicle does not exceed
load” (Y page 208). the maximum permissible weight limits
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
Certification label have the loaded vehicle (including driver,
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
Even after careful determination of the trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and commercial scale.
the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(Y page 208) as to not exceed the
Trailer tongue load
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle The tongue load of any trailer is an important
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle weight to measure because it affects the load
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and towed, the tongue load must be added to the
GAWR from the certification label. The weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
certification label can be found on the driver’s you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section load typically is 10% of the trailer weight and
(Y page 292). everything loaded in it.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all primarily to carry passengers and their cargo.
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR. towing with your vehicle.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 209
Maximum tire load the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
replaced. Always observe and follow
G Warning! applicable temporary use restrictions and
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speed limitations indicated on the spare
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire wheel.
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a Tire care and maintenance
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake G Warning!
failure. Regularly check the tires for damage.
Operation
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
the tires have sustained damage, replace
them.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once

a month. For more information on checking
tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 198).
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data Tire inspection

may vary from data shown in above Every time you check the tire inflation
illustration. pressure, you should also inspect your tires
for the following:
The maximum tire load rating : is the
maximum weight the tires are designed to Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 210)
support. Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s
For more information on tire load rating, see rubber
(Y page 214). Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
For information on calculating total and cargo tread or side of the tire
load capacities, see (Y page 206).
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Direction of rotation Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, tires will age and become worn over time even
such as better hydroplaning performance. To if never used, and thus should be inspected
benefit, however, you must make sure the and replaced when necessary.
tires rotate in the direction specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 210
Life of tire
G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon

varying factors including but not limited to:
RDriving style
RTire inflation pressure
Operation
RDistance driven Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid

band across the tread.
Tread depth
Storing tires
G Warning!
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
safety laws consider a tire to be worn when with as little exposure to light as possible.
the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we and fuels.
recommend that you do not allow your tires
to wear down to that level. As tread depth Cleaning tires
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. tires. The intense jet of water can result in
Depending upon the weather and/or road damage to the tire.
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies Always replace a damaged tire.
widely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.

Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply Uniform Tire Quality Grading
reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in Standards
(3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six places
on the tread circumference and become
visible at a tread depth of approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
considered worn and should be replaced.
The recommended minimum tire tread depth
for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
recommended minimum tire tread depth for
winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm). The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.
Government requirement designed to give
drivers consistent and reliable information
regarding tire performance. Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 211
based on three performance factors: cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature characteristics.
resistance =. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
North America have these grades branded on are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the sidewall. the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data specified government test surfaces of asphalt
on tires are specific to each vehicle and and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
may vary from data shown in above traction performance.
illustration.
G Warning!
Operation
Quality grades can be found, where
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
be substantially reduced. Under such weather
shoulder and maximum section width. For
conditions, drive, steer and brake with
example:
extreme caution.
Treadwear Traction Temperature
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
200 AA A road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
All passenger car tires must conform to condition of the road whenever the outside
federal safety requirements in addition to temperature is close to the freezing point.
these grades. Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(Y page 219) with a minimum tread depth of
Treadwear approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating for the winter season to ensure normal
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested balanced handling characteristics. On
under controlled conditions on a specified packed snow, they can reduce your stopping
U.S. Government test course. For example, a distance compared to summer tires.
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half Stopping distance, however, is still
(1 1/2) times as well on the government considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
course as a tire graded 100.
appropriate caution.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
however, and may depart significantly from cause serious damage to the drivetrain
the norm due to variations in driving habits, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
service practices and differences in road Limited Warranty.
characteristics and climate.
Temperature
Traction
G Warning!
G Warning! The temperature grade for this tire is
The traction grade assigned to this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
based on straight-ahead braking traction and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
tests, and does not include acceleration, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 212
excessive heat build-up and possible tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
failure. possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
The temperature grades are A (the highest), configuration, tires can be rotated according
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
the generation of heat and its ability to intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
dissipate heat when tested under controlled pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
cause the material of the tire to degenerate 10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
and reduce tire life, and excessive to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
Operation
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. (spinning) direction must be maintained.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
performance which all passenger car tires
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
tires).
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels
required by law. and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
Rotating tires For information on wheel change, see “Flat
tire” (Y page 273).
G Warning!
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension. Tire labeling
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size Besides tire name (sales designation) and
tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), manufacturer name, a number of markings
tire rotation is not possible. can be found on a tire.
G Warning! Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles

with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
same dimension all around, tires can be
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
pattern that will maintain the intended
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
(Y page 209).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 213
Tire size designation, load and speed

rating
Operation
: Tire width
; Aspect ratio in %
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards = Radial tire code
(Y page 210) ? Rim diameter
; DOT, Tire Identification Number A Load index
(Y page 216) B Speed symbol
= Maximum tire load (Y page 209)
? Maximum tire inflation pressure i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
(Y page 204) on tires are specific to each vehicle and
A Manufacturer may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
B Tire ply material (Y page 217)
C Tire size designation, load and speed General: Depending on the design standards
rating (Y page 213) used, the tire size molded into the sidewall
may have no letter or a letter preceding the
D Load identification (Y page 216)
tire size designation.
E Tire name
No letter preceding the size designation (as
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data illustrated above): Passenger car tire based
on European design standards.
may vary from data shown in above Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
illustration. Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(Y page 297). Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Tire width
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width
in millimeters.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 214
Aspect ratio For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds

Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
relationship between tire section height and tire is designed to support. See also
section width and is expressed in percentage. “Maximum tire load” (Y page 209) where the
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing maximum load associated with the load index
section height by section width. is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
For additional information on the load index,
Tire code see “Load identification” (Y page 216).
Tire code = indicates the tire construction
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter Speed symbol
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; G Warning!
Operation
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. Even when permitted by law, never operate a
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
with a speed capability above 149 mph speed rating of the tires.
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For are rated can lead to sudden tire failure,
additional information, see “Tire speed causing loss of vehicle control and possibly
rating” (Y page 214). resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury and possible death, for you
Rim diameter
and for others.
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead
seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in). speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
Load index conditions.
G Warning! Speed symbol B indicates the approved
The tire load rating must always be at least maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire.
tire failure may be the result which may cause Summer tires
an accident and/or serious injury to you or
others. Index Speed rating
Always replace rims and tires with the same Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
in handling or steering problems, or brake Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
failure.
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Load index A is a numerical code associated
with the maximum load a tire can support.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 215
Index Speed rating Index Speed rating

ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) H M+S15 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) V M+S15 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire

with a speed capability above 149 mph i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size winter performance. Make sure the tires
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). you use show M+S and the mountain/
To determine the maximum speed snowflakeimarking on the tire
Operation
capability of the tire, the service sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
description for the tire must be referred to. traction performance requirements of the
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
The service description is comprised of
and the Rubber Association of Canada
load index A and speed symbol B.
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size for use in snow conditions.
designation and no service description is
given, the tire manufacturer must be An electronic speed limiter prevents your
consulted for the maximum speed vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
capability. R149 mph (240 km/h):
If a service description is given, the speed - SLK 300
capability is limited by the speed symbol in
- SLK 300 (Sport Package)
the service description. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” - SLK 300 (Appearance Package)
is the service description. The letter “Y” - SLK 350
designates the speed rating and the speed
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph - SLK 350 (Sport Package)
(300 km/h). - SLK 350 (Appearance Package)
RAny tire with a speed capability above R155 mph (250 km/h):
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
- SLK 55 AMG
in the size designation AND the service
description must be placed in parenthesis. R174 mph (280 km/h):
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” - SLK 55 AMG (Performance Package)
speed symbol in parenthesis designates
the maximum speed capability of the tire The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). may have a tire speed rating above the
Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum speed permitted by the electronic
maximum permissible speed of the tire. speed limiter.
All-season and winter tires Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
Index Speed rating the “Technical data” section (Y page 297),
Q M+S15 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) for example when purchasing new tires.
If you are uncertain about the correct reading
T M+S15 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
15 or M+Sifor winter tires
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 216
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be

glad to assist you.
Load identification
Operation
The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN

facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
notify purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires. It gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such
tires.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
on tires are specific to each vehicle and identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
may vary from data shown in above type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
illustration. A.
In addition to the load index, special load
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
identification : may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating the
may vary from data shown in above
speed symbol B (Y page 213).
illustration.
RNo specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a DOT (Department of Transportation)
standard load (SL) tire.
RXL
Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire. meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
RLight Load: designates a light load tire.
RC, D, E: designates load range associated Manufacturer’s identification mark
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
Manufacturer’s identification mark ;
a specified pressure.
denotes the tire manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Retreaded tires have a mark with four
symbols. For more information on retreaded
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire tires, see (Y page 197).
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. Tire size
Code = indicates the tire size.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 217
Tire type code radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed
Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
equipment (whether installed or not).
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
Air pressure
the tire.
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
Date of manufacture outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
The date of manufacture A identifies the inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
week and year of manufacture.
Operation
The first two figures identify the week, Aspect ratio
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two Dimensional relationship between tire
figures represent the year. section height and section width expressed
For example, “3208” represents the 32nd in percentage.
week of 2008.
Bar
Metric unit for air pressure. There are
Tire ply material 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and Curb weight
may vary from data shown in above The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
illustration. equipment including the maximum capacity
This marking tells you about the type of cord of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,
and number of plies in the sidewall : and air conditioning and additional optional
under the tread ;. equipment, but without passengers and
cargo.
Tire and loading terminology DOT (Department of Transportation)
Accessory weight A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire

meets requirements of the U.S. Department
The combined weight (in excess of those of Transportation.
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 218
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Maximum permissible tire inflation

pressure
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle This number is the greatest amount of air
must never exceed the GAWR for the front pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
and rear axle indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle (150 lb).
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
Operation
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if Occupant distribution

applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
certification label located on the driver’s door their designated seating positions.
B-pillar.
Production options weight
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The combined weight of those installed
This is the maximum permissible vehicle regular production options weighing over
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
the vehicle including all options, passengers, standard items which they replace, not
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer previously considered in curb weight or
tongue load). It is indicated on the accessory weight, including heavy duty
certification label located on the driver’s door brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
B-pillar. battery, and special trim.
Kilopascal (kPa) PSI (Pounds per square inch)
Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to Recommended tire inflation pressure
1 bar. The recommended tire inflation pressure for
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
Load index and Loading Information placard located on
Numerical code associated with the the driver’s door B-pillar. It provides best
maximum load a tire can support. handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to
special driving situations can be found on the
Maximum load rating
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds the fuel filler flap.
that can be carried by the tire.
Rim
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, assembly upon which the tire beads are
total load limit, and production options seated.
weight.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 219
Winter driving 219
Sidewall Treadwear indicators

The portion of a tire between the tread and Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
the bead. that show across the tread of a tire when only
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in A tire information system that provides
recall situations or other safety matters consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
concerning tires and gives purchasers the temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
Operation
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification government testing procedures. The ratings
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
of manufacture”.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Tire ply composition and material used
Load on an individual tire that is determined
This indicates the number of plies or the by distributing to each axle its share of the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire it by two.
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. Winter driving
Tire speed rating General information

Part of tire designation (speed symbol); Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
indicates the speed range for which a tire is Mercedes-Benz Center.
approved.
Total load limit Winter tires
Rated cargo and luggage load plus G Warning!

68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
designated seating capacity. 6
longer suitable for winter operation.
Traction
G Warning!
The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on
If you use your spare wheel when winter tires
which it moves. The amount of grip provided.
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may very
Tread well impair turning stability and that overall
The portion of a tire that comes into contact driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
with the road. driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 220
220 Winter driving
Always use winter tires at temperatures ! If snow chains are mounted to the front
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road wheels, they may scrape against the body
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
provide special winter performance. Make could be damaged as a result.
sure the tires you use show the mountain/ ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall. Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-
These tires meet specific snow traction Benz Center will be glad to advise you on
performance requirements of the Rubber this subject.
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
RUse of snow chains may be prohibited
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
have been designed specifically for use in depending on location. Always check local
Operation
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the and state laws before installing snow
only way to achieve the maximum chains.
effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in
winter operation. i When driving with snow chains, you may
For safe handling, make sure all mounted wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 49)
winter tires are of the same make and have before setting the vehicle in motion. This
the same tread design. will improve the vehicle’s traction.
For information on winter tires for your
vehicle model, see the “Technical data” Winter driving instructions
section (Y page 297).
Always observe the speed rating of the winter G Warning!
tires installed on your vehicle. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
Snow chains running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
serious damage to your vehicle or tires, To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
make sure the use of snow chains is a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
permissible as specified in the “Technical not facing the wind.
data” section of this Operator’s Manual.
G Warning!
Snow chains should only be driven on snow- The outside temperature indicator is not
covered roads at speeds not to exceed designed to serve as an ice-warning device
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
as possible when driving on roads without Indicated temperatures just above the
snow. freezing point do not guarantee that the road
Observe the following guidelines when using surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
snow chains: especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 297). G Warning!
RUse
snow chains in pairs and on rear
order to obtain braking action. This could
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
mounting instructions.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 221
Driving instructions 221
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent RAvoid frequent acceleration and
this type of loss of control. deceleration.
RHave all maintenance work performed at
The most important rule for slippery or icy
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
Booklet and as required by the
acceleration, braking and steering
Maintenance system. Contact an
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
the automatic transmission to neutral in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
position N or declutch in case of manual short trips and in mountainous areas.
Operation
transmission. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
Drinking and driving
i For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 220). G Warning!
Road salts and chemicals can adversely Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal driving are very dangerous combinations.
force may become necessary to produce the Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
normal brake effect. affect your reflexes, perceptions and
judgment.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can The possibility of a serious or even fatal
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency accident are greatly increased when you drink
back to normal. or take drugs and drive.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency anyone to drive who has been drinking or
should be tested as soon as possible after taking drugs.
driving is resumed.
G Warning! Pedals
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking G Warning!
maneuvers. Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Driving instructions obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
Drive sensibly – save fuel pedals still have sufficient clearance.
To save fuel you should: During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
RKeep
the objects could get caught between the
tires at the recommended inflation
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
pressures.
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
RRemove unnecessary loads. injury.
RAllow engine to warm up under low load
use.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 222
222 Driving instructions
Power assistance Wet roads
There is no power assistance for the steering After driving in heavy rain for some time
and the brake when the engine is not running. without applying the brakes or through water
Steering and braking requires significantly deep enough to wet brake components, the
more effort and you could lose control of the first braking action may be somewhat
vehicle and cause an accident as a result. reduced and increased pedal pressure may be
necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is
Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
in motion.
front.
Operation
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after

Brakes driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
advisable to brake the vehicle with
Downhill grades considerable force prior to parking. The heat
! When driving down long and steep generated serves to dry the brakes.
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
shifting into a lower gear to use the Salt-covered roads
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
G Warning!
overheating of the brakes and reduces
wear. A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake
linings may cause a delay in the braking
When using the engine’s braking power, a
effect, resulting in a significantly increased
drive wheel may not spin for an extended
braking distance, which could lead to an
period of time, e.g. on slippery road
accident.
surfaces. This may cause serious damage
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the To avoid this danger, you should:
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Roccasionally brake carefully when you are
driving on salt-covered roads, so that any
Continuous or hard braking layer of salt that may have built up on the
brake discs and the brake linings is
G Warning! removed without putting other road users
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will at risk
cause excessive and premature wear of the Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
brake pads. ahead and drive with particular care
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
thereby significantly reducing their
trip and immediately after commencing a
effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop
new trip, so that salt residues are removed
the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
accident. from the brake disc
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on Brake service

for some time, rather than immediately park,
so that the air stream will cool down the ! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
brakes faster. be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 223
Driving instructions 223
parking brake is released. Observe Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
additional messages in the multifunction System (BAS) (Y page 49).
display that may appear.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may High-performance brake system
be the reason for low brake fluid in the The high-performance brake system is only
reservoir. available on SLK 55 AMG.
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized G Warning!
Mercedes-Benz Center. New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
All checks and service work on the brake replacement brake pads and discs may take
Operation
system should be carried out by qualified several hundred miles of driving until they
technicians only. Contact an authorized provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that
Mercedes-Benz Center. time, you may need to use increased brake
pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid of this and adjust your driving and braking
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. accordingly during this break-in period.
G Warning! Excessive high-demand braking will cause
If other than recommended brake pads are correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
installed, or other than recommended brake attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
fluid is used, the braking properties of the instrument cluster and brake condition
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe messages in the multifunction display.
braking is substantially impaired. This could Especially for high performance driving, it is
result in an accident. important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
! Because the ESP® operates The high-performance brake system is
automatically, the engine and ignition must designed to operate under the extremely high
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch operating demands required to
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is accommodate the performance capabilities
being tested on a brake test dynamometer of the vehicle.
or when the vehicle is being towed with the
The brakes may produce a squeaking-type
front axle raised.
noise depending on the
Active braking action through the ESP®
Rvehicle speed
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the Rbrake force applied
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and
If your brake system is only subjected to humidity
moderate loads, you should occasionally test As with any brake system, the wear of
the effectiveness of the brakes by applying individual brake system components such as
above-normal braking pressure at higher brake pads or disks strongly depends on your
speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the driving style and the conditions under which
brake pads. you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style
G Warning! calling for high-demand braking will cause
Make sure not to endanger any other road your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 224
224 Driving instructions
Driving off damage is not covered by the Mercedes-

Benz Limited Warranty.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached. Driving abroad
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an or Canada, you should request dealer
extended period with the ESP® switched network information for your destination from
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Operation
Control and operation of radio

! Simultaneously depressing the transmitter
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes Safety notes
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz G Warning!
Limited Warranty. Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be his/her
Hydroplaning primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others, we recommend that
Depending on the depth of the water layer on you pull over to a safe location and stop
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low before placing or taking a telephone call.
speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or
when conditions indicate possible If you choose to use the telephone16 while
hydroplaning: driving, please use the hands-free device and
only use the telephone when road, weather
X Reduce vehicle speed.
and traffic conditions permit. Some
X Avoid track grooves in the road. jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
X Apply brakes cautiously. mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the audio system or
COMAND16 (Cockpit Management and Data
Standing water System) if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not be
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
able to observe traffic conditions and could
Before driving through water, determine its
endanger yourself and others.
depth.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
If you must drive through standing water,
drive slowly to prevent water from entering
the passenger compartment or the engine
14 m) every second.
compartment. Water in these areas could
cause damage to electrical components or
wiring of the engine or transmission, or
could result in water being ingested by the
engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such
16 Observe all legal requirements.

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 225
Maintenance 225
Emission control called for by the maintenance service

indicator.
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
the toxic components of the exhaust gases i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
within permissible limits required by law. accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
These systems will function properly only and maintenance service indicator at the
when maintained strictly according to factory designated times/mileage will result in
specifications. Any adjustments on the vehicle damage not covered by the
engine should, therefore, be carried out only Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
authorized technicians.
Operation
Maintenance service indicator
Engine adjustments should not be altered in
message
any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly Information on maintenance work and
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing maintenance intervals are specified in the
requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet. Contact an authorized
Maintenance Booklet. Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for additional
G Warning! information.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
The maintenance service indicator message
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
will notify you when the next maintenance
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
service is required.
unconsciousness and possible death.
Starting approximately 1 month before the
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
next maintenance service is required, one of
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
the following messages will appear in the
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
multifunction display. The messages will
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
appear while you are driving or when you
cause determined and corrected
switch on the ignition (example service A):
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one Service A Due In XXXX Miles (Km)
window fully open at all times. Service A Due In XX Days
Service A Due In X Day
Service A Due Now
Maintenance
Notes
The Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks the distance driven and the time
elapsed since the last maintenance service.
It calculates other maintenance service work
required, and calls for the next maintenance Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of
service accordingly. maintenance services and intervals they need
We strongly recommend that you have your to be performed at.
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordance
with the Maintenance Booklet at the times
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 226
226 Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service X Switch on the ignition.

indicator message X Press button V or U on the
The maintenance service indicator message multifunction steering wheel repeatedly

is cleared automatically until the standard display (Y page 96)
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you
X Press button * or & on the
switch on the ignition
multifunction steering wheel until the
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when maintenance service indicator display with
reaching the service threshold while driving the service symbol ¯ and the
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the maintenance service deadline appears in
Operation
suggested maintenance service term has the multifunction display.

passed
i If the battery was disconnected, the days
X Clearing the maintenance service of disconnection will not be included in the
indicator message manually: Press reset count shown by the maintenance service
button . on the instrument cluster. indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
The standard display appears in the service deadline, you will need to subtract
multifunction display. these days from the days shown in the
maintenance service indicator message or
Maintenance service term exceeded maintenance service indicator display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service
If you have exceeded the suggested
indicator with the engine oil level indicator
maintenance service term, you will see the
4.
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles Resetting the maintenance service
(Km) indicator
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
In the event that the maintenance service on
Service A Exceeded By X Day your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized
In addition, a signal sounds when the Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the
message appears. maintenance service indicator reset.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will The automotive maintenance facility carrying
reset the maintenance service indicator out the maintenance service will find the
following a completed maintenance service. information for resetting the maintenance
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
literature for your vehicle.
Calling up the maintenance service Such literature is available at any authorized
indicator display Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
i The menu overview can be found on Mercedes-Benz.
(Y page 96). ! If the maintenance service indicator was
You can call up the maintenance service reset inadvertently, have an authorized
indicator display at any time to check when Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
the next maintenance service is required. Only reset the maintenance service
indicator if the proper maintenance service
has been performed. Not following the
proper maintenance service as described
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 227
Vehicle care 227
in the Maintenance Booklet will result in To avoid paint damage, you should
engine damage and/or other vehicle immediately remove:
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz RGrease and oil
Limited Warranty.
RFuel
RCoolant
Vehicle care RBrake fluid
Cleaning and care of the vehicle RBird droppings
Notes RInsects
Operation
RTree resins etc.
Regular and proper care will help to maintain
the value of your vehicle. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
G Warning!
adverse influences.
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
More frequent washings are necessary to
Always follow the instructions on the
deal with unfavorable conditions:
particular container. Always open your Rnear the ocean
vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
inside. emissions)
Never use fluids or solvents that are not Rduring winter operation
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and keep You should check your vehicle from time to
them out of reach of children. time for stone chipping or other damage. Any
damage should be repaired as soon as
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use possible to prevent corrosion.
scouring agents. Never apply strong force In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge. the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the check is a washing of the underbody followed
surface to be cleaned. by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas
need to be re-undercoated.
While in operation, even while parked, your
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
vehicle is subjected to varying external
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
underbody and cause lasting damage.
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-
Such damage is caused not only by extreme Benz because of the possibility of
and varying climatic conditions, but also by: incompatibility between materials used in the
RAir pollution production process and others applied later.
RRoad salt We have selected vehicle-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
RTar
specially matched to our vehicles and which
RGravel and stone chipping always reflect the latest technology. You can
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 228
228 Vehicle care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or Do not apply any of these products or wax if
damage due to negligent or incorrect care your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
cannot always be removed or repaired with is still hot.
the vehicle-care products recommended X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an quick and provisional repairs of minor paint
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle
The following topics deal with the cleaning doors, etc.).
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references to Engine cleaning
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products. Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
Operation
make sure to protect electrical components

Power washer and connectors from contact with water and
cleaning agents.
! Follow the instructions provided by the Corrosion protection, such as MB
power washer manufacturer on Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the
maintaining a distance between the vehicle engine compartment after every engine
and the nozzle of the power washer. cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
tires. The intense jet of water can result in poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be
damage to the tire. protected from any wax.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across Vehicle washing
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other road salt as soon as possible.
rubber parts.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and Hand-wash
become more difficult to remove. A tar X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
remover is recommended. in direct sunlight.
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
Paintwork, painted body components clean the vehicle.
X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
or similar materials to painted body
Shampoo.
components may damage the paintwork.
X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should diffused jet of water.
be applied when water drops on the paint X Do not spray directly towards the
surface do not “bead up”. This should
ventilation intake.
normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
depending on the climate and washing
detergent used. and chamois frequently.
X Rinse with clean water and dry with a
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface shows chamois thoroughly.
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 229
Vehicle care 229
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
finish. moldings. Although ornamental moldings
may have chrome appearance, they could
Automatic car wash be made of anodized aluminum that will be
You can have your vehicle washed in an damaged when cleaned with chrome
automatic car wash from the start. Brushless cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
car washes are preferable. those ornamental moldings.
X To protect the filter system, activate the air For very dirty ornamental moldings of
recirculation mode using button g on which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
the climate control panel. a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
ornamental molding is chrome-plated,
Operation
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
touchless car wash which uses caustic Center.
spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
or ornamental moldings. Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before side markers, turn signal lenses
running it through the automatic car wash. X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
! Make sure the combination switch is set Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
to wiper setting 0. Otherwise, the rain with plenty of water.
sensor could activate and cause the wipers
to move unintentionally. This may lead to ! Only use window cleaning solutions that
vehicle damage. are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
Window cleaning solutions which are not
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
suitable may damage the plastic lamp
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
the vehicle through an automatic car wash
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
contain solvents.
X When taking the vehicle through an
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
automatic conveyor-type car wash:
blades
Make sure the automatic transmission ! The windshield wipers must be in a
remains in neutral position N. vertical position before folding them away
When leaving the automatic car wash, make from the windshield. They could otherwise
sure the mirrors are folded out. damage the hood.
After running the vehicle through an Never open the hood when the wiper arms
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the are folded forward.
windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
X Make sure the hood is fully closed.
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
which can be caused by residual wax on the X Switch on the ignition.
windshield. X Turn combination switch to wiper setting
II (Y page 76).
Ornamental moldings X With wiper arms in vertical position, switch
X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental off the ignition.

moldings, use a damp cloth.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 230
230 Vehicle care
G Warning! X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and cleaning solution on all outside and inside
remove SmartKey from starter switch before glass surfaces.
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper An automotive glass cleaner is
blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could recommended.
suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Light alloy wheels
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
They could tear.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of
Operation
into place. water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.

X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
inserts with a clean cloth and mild
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
detergent solution. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
clear coat.
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution on all outside and inside ! The vehicle should not be parked for an
glass surfaces. extended period of time immediately after
An automotive glass cleaner is it has been cleaned. This applies especially
recommended. after the wheel rims have been cleaned
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
can lead to increased corrosion of the
the windshield before turning the SmartKey brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved
in the starter switch. wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper paint if the vehicle is not driven after
arm back. If released, the force of the cleaning.
impact from the tensioning spring could Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
crack the windshield. should always be warmed-up before it is
! To clean the window interior, do not use parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved
containing solvents. Do not touch the
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved
inside of the windows with hard objects
Wheel Care products, take care not to
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
spray them on the brake disks.
damage the windows.
Rear window cleaning Plastic and rubber parts
Clean the rear window with the hardtop fully X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
raised and closed. detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
G Warning! solution.
Do not clean the rear window with the hardtop X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
in a position other than the fully raised and solution.
closed position. Otherwise, the hardtop may The surface may temporarily change color.
move unexpectedly which may result in If this is the case, wait for it to dry.
personal injury to you or others.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 231
Vehicle care 231
G Warning! Seat belts

Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays X Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the
steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents ! The seat belts must not be treated with
will make the surface porous and vehicle chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
occupants could suffer serious injuries from seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
plastic parts coming loose in the event of air (80†) or in direct sunlight.
bag deployment.
G Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
Operation
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the not be able to provide adequate protection.
surface.
Hard plastic trim items Upholstery
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light clothing that have the tendency to give off
pressure. coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the
upholstery to become permanently
Audio or COMAND display discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will
! You must switch off the audio or be prevented.
COMAND display and allow it to cool prior
to cleaning. G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents. and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
These can damage or even destroy the vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
audio or COMAND display screen. interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the head-thorax air bags. Contact an
X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
with light pressure. availability.
Steering wheel and gearshift/gear Leather upholstery

selector lever Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to a
X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
may also react to certain ambient influences
Leather Care.
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
Carpets X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets. Benz approved Leather Care.
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
Headliner
RWipe with light pressure only.
X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 232
232 Vehicle care
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.

As leather is a natural product, it could
otherwise harden or become porous.
RExercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
Wood trims
X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
Operation
wood trims in your vehicle.

! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Chrome-plated exhaust tip

Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
and the classy appearance.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
been washed, especially during the winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
wheel cleaners as they could cause
corrosion.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 233
233

Where will I find ...? .......................... 234
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 236
What to do if … .................................. 256
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 264
Opening/closing manually .............. 266
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 266
Replacing bulbs ................................. 267
Replacing wiper blades .................... 271
Flat tire .............................................. 273
Practical hints
Battery ............................................... 282
Jump starting .................................... 283
Towing the vehicle ............................ 285
Fuses .................................................. 288
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 234
234 Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment Vehicles with spare wheel
i This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
Where will I find ...?

First aid kit : Collapsible wheel chock
Practical hints
i Check expiration dates and contents for ; Jack

completeness at least once a year and = Protective wrap
replace missing/expired items. ? Alignment bolt
The first aid kit is located in a parcel net A Towing eye bolt
behind the driver’s seat. B Wheel wrench
C Valve extractor
Vehicle tool kit D Electric air pump
The vehicle tool kit is located in the space

Vehicles with TIREFIT
underneath the trunk floor.
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
change are specific to your vehicle.
Center to obtain the tools approved for
your vehicle.
X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 59).
X Lift the trunk floor. : TIREFIT kit
X Remove the spare wheel (if so equipped) ; Towing eye bolt
(Y page 235). = Valve extractor
? Electric air pump
Collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 234).
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 235
Where will I find ...? 235
X Turn the crank handle in the direction of

arrow as far as it will go.
X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.

X Fold the lower plate outward ;.
Practical hints
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
Operational position
into the openings of base plate =. X Turn the crank handle clockwise.
For information on where to place wheel Before placing the jack back into the vehicle
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting tool kit:
the vehicle” (Y page 277).
X Fully collapse the jack.
Jack X Fold in the crank handle (storage position).
G Warning!
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle Spare wheel
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or G Observe Safety notes, see page 273.
others could be injured, as the jack is The spare wheel is located in the space
designed only for the purpose of changing a underneath the trunk floor.
wheel. X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 59).
When using the jack, observe the safety notes X Lift the trunk floor.
in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and
the notes on the jack.
X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit

(Y page 234).
X Remove retaining screw ; by turning it

counterclockwise.
X Remove spare wheel :.
Storage position
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 236
236 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
The spare wheel bolts are located under a Vehicle status messages in the
plastic cover on the outside of the spare multifunction display
wheel rim.
Notes
X Take off the spare wheel bolts.
For information on mounting the spare wheel, Warning and malfunction messages appear in
see “Flat tire” (Y page 273). the multifunction display located in the
instrument cluster.
Storing the spare wheel after use Certain warning and malfunction messages
are accompanied by an audible signal.
If you wish to store the spare wheel after use,
Address these messages accordingly and
carry out the following steps. Otherwise, the
follow the additional instructions given in this
spare wheel may not fit into the spare wheel
Operator’s Manual.
well.
Selecting the Vehicle status message
Practical hints
! Make sure the spare wheel is dry before memory menu in the control system
storing it. (Y page 101) displays both cleared and
X
uncleared messages.
Take the valve extractor from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 234). High-priority messages appear in the
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the
multifunction display in red color.
collapsible tire. Certain messages of high priority cannot be
X Use the valve extractor to unscrew the
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button . (Y page 92) or button
valve insert from the valve.
&, *, U or V on the
X Allow the air to escape.
multifunction steering wheel.
i It may take a few minutes for the Other messages of high priority and
collapsible tire to deflate completely. messages of less immediate priority can be
X Use the valve extractor to screw the valve cleared from the multifunction display using
insert back into the valve. the reset button . or button &, *,
X Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
U or V on the multifunction steering
wheel. They are then stored in the Vehicle
X Place the valve extractor back into the
status message memory menu
vehicle tool kit.
(Y page 101). Remember that clearing a
X Take the protective wrap from the vehicle
message will only make the message
tool kit. disappear. Clearing a message will not
X Pull the protective wrap over the spare correct the condition that caused the
wheel. message to appear.
X Place the spare wheel into the spare wheel
G Warning!
well.
All categories of messages contain important
X Pierce the protective wrap with retaining
information which should be taken note of
screw ;. and, where a malfunction is indicated,
X Secure the spare wheel by turning retaining addressed as soon as possible at an
screw ; clockwise. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair the condition noted may
cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 237
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 237
Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property Rmalfunction/warning messages

damage or personal injury. Rfailure of any systems
G Warning! Driving characteristics may be impaired.
No messages will be displayed if either the If you must continue to drive, do so with added
instrument cluster or the multifunction caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
display is inoperative. Benz Center as soon as possible.
As a result, you will not be able to see On the pages that follow, you will find a
information about your driving conditions, compilation of the most important warning
such as and malfunction messages that may appear.
Rspeed
For your convenience the messages are
Routside temperature divided into text messages (Y page 237) and
Practical hints
Rwarning/indicator lamps symbol messages (Y page 243).
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

ABS ABS, ESP The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Inoperativ malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® are unavailable.
e X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
See during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Operator’s
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Manual
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ESP ESP The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Inoperativ malfunction the ESP® is unavailable.
e See The BAS may not be operational.
Operator’s
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
Manual
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
accident.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 238

ESP ESP The brake system still functions normally but due to
Unavailabl insufficient power supply the ESP® is unavailable.
Operator’s
Manual
When the voltage is above the required value again, the
ESP® is operational again and the message in the
multifunction display should disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does not
disappear:
Practical hints
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.

ESP ESP The ESP® is temporarily not available.

Unavailabl The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
Operator’s
Manual The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
systems specified above available.
X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed
of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ESP® is available again.
If the message does not disappear:
accident.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 239

Front- The passenger front air bag and the passenger-side knee bag
passenger are activated while driving even though a child, small
Airbag individual, or object below the system’s weight threshold is
Enabled on the passenger seat, or the passenger seat is empty.
See Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make
Operator’s the system sense supplemental weight.
Manual X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the passenger door.
Practical hints
X Remove child and child restraint from passenger seat.
X Make sure no objects which apply supplemental weight to
the seat are present. The system may recognize such
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 04 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 39) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 26) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 04 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 37) has deactivated the passenger front
air bag and the passenger-side knee bag.
Rthe message Front-passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front-passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the passenger
seat again. Depending on the passenger classification sensed
by the OCS, the 04 indicator lamp will remain
illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 240
G Warning!
If the 04 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective
steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Front- The passenger front air bag and the passenger-side knee bag
passenger are deactivated while driving even though an adult or
Airbag someone larger than a small individual is occupying the
Disabled passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat may make the
See system sense a decrease in weight.
Operator’s X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
Practical hints
Manual X Engage the parking brake.

X Have the passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 04 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 39) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 26) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 04 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 37) has deactivated the passenger front
air bag and the passenger-side knee bag.
Rthe message Front-passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front-passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the passenger
seat again. Depending on the passenger classification sensed
by the OCS, the 04 indicator lamp will remain
illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 241
G Warning!
If the 04 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the
passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use
the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Driving systems

Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
Control e X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Practical hints
Cruise - - - MPH One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
Control been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 160).
Vehicle

Close Windows You are getting out of the vehicle and a rear side window is
Rear Side still open.
X Close the rear side window (Y page 79).
Tires

Tire driving The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
pressure for a few TPMS.
displayed minutes. X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
only after
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Pressure e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 242

Tire Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Pressure e No (e.g. winter tires).
Monitor Wheel X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Sensors Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
Tire Whl. At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).

Pres. Sens. The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
Monitor Miss. inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Practical hints
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is

mounted (e.g. spare wheel).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Pressure Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
Monitor e power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Please The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
correct or
the tire The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
pressure. each other significantly.
The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 201).
X Restart the Advanced TMPS (Y page 203).
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 243

Caution At least one tire is deflating.
Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
Defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 273).
Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Tires below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
Practical hints
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
# Brake Wear The brake pads have reached their wear limit.
X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible at an
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 244
$ Release You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
Parking an acoustic warning sounds.
(USA only) Brake X Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada
only)
$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level
to do so.
Practical hints
(Canada X Engage the parking brake.

only)
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 245
Safety systems
G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
+ Restraint There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint System

System (SRS). The air bags or the Emergency Tensioning Devices
Malfunctio (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an
n accident.
Service X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Practical hints
Required Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked
immediately.
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
Vehicle
: The trunk is open.

X Close the trunk (Y page 60).
L You are driving with the hood open.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 193).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
¡ You are driving with at least one door open.

X Close all doors.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 246
K Retractabl The on-board voltage is too low.

e Roof X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
Operation X
Start the engine.
Please
Wait The hardtop drive system was shut down for safety reasons
after multiple, consecutive attempts to raise or lower the
hardtop.
After about 10 minutes you can open or close the retractable
hardtop.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
Practical hints
X If the retractable hardtop still does not open or close

properly, have the hardtop system checked at an
K Retractabl The retractable hardtop is not completely opened or closed.

e Roof The roof hydraulics will start to lose pressure.
Lowering X Make sure the retractable hardtop is completely opened or
closed (Y page 170).
K Retractabl You have attempted to open the retractable hardtop while

e Roof driving.
Operation X Stop the vehicle in a safe location and try to open the
Only At hardtop again.
Standstill
K Retractabl You are driving with the retractable hardtop not properly
e Roof locked.
Not X Stop the vehicle in a safe location. Observe the traffic
Opened/ situation around you.
Closed X Push the retractable hardtop switch forward or rearward
Completely
until the retractable hardtop is completely closed or open
(Y page 170).
X If the retractable hardtop still does lock properly, have the
hardtop system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
J Trunk You are trying to open or close the retractable hardtop even
Partition though the luggage cover in the trunk is not closed and/or
Open properly engaged.
X Close the luggage cover (Y page 173).
+ Remove Key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 247
+ Please The SmartKey is malfunctioning.

get a new X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
key.
~ Bluetooth The telephone has not yet been connected to the audio
Ready system or COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
X Connect the telephone to the audio system or COMAND
system via Bluetooth®.
¥ Top Up The washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir has fallen below
Washer the minimum level.
Fluid
Practical hints
X Add washer fluid (Y page 196).
Engine
= Engine There may be a malfunction in

Service Rthe fuel management system
(USA only)
; Rthe ignition system
(Canada Rthe exhaust system
only) Rthe fuel system
X Have the engine checkedas soon as possible at an
; Display Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to

Malfunctio the control system. The coolant temperature display or the
n tachometer may have failed.
Drive To X Have the electronic systems checked at an authorized
Workshop Mercedes-Benz Center.
+ Top Up The coolant level is too low.

Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 196).
See X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator’s
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 248
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.
? Coolant The coolant is too hot.

Stop, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
turn X Turn off the engine immediately.
engine
off.
Practical hints
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.

You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction
display.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 249
? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.

Stop, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
turn X Turn off the engine immediately.
engine
X Check the poly-V-belt.
off.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
Practical hints
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
display.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.

display.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
# The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 250
4 Check SLK 300 and SLK 350 only:

engine The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.
oil level X
Check the engine oil level (Y page 193) and add engine oil
at next
as required (Y page 195).
refueling.
X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
checked for possible leaks.
4 Add 1 qt. SLK 55 AMG only:

engine The engine oil level is too low.
oil at X Add engine oil (Y page 195) and check the engine oil level
next
(Y page 193).
Practical hints
refueling.
X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
(USA only)
Add 1 checked for possible leaks.
liter
engine
oil at
next
refueling.
(Canada
only)
If the message Add 1 qt. (Canada: station to refill your engine oil to the required
1 liter) engine oil at next level.
refueling (SLK 55 AMG) or Check engine For information on approved engine oils
oil level at next refueling (SLK 300, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
SLK 350) appears while the engine is running or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
and at operating temperature, the engine oil
level has dropped to approximately the ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
minimum level. ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious engine
The message will be stored in the vehicle
damage that is not covered by the
status message memory after you have
cleared it from the multifunction display.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 251
4 Cannot SLK 55 AMG only:

Measure The measuring system is malfunctioning.
Engine X Have the measuring system checked at an authorized
Oil Level
4 Engine SLK 55 AMG only:

Oil Level You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of
Reduce damaging the engine or the catalytic converter.
Oil Level X Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal
requirements with respect to its disposal.
Practical hints
4 Engine The engine oil level is too low. There is a danger of engine
Oil Level damage.
Stop, X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
turn to do so.
engine X Turn off the engine.
off.
X Add engine oil (Y page 195) and check the engine oil level
(Y page 193).
C The fuel level is low.

X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Reserve The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Fuel X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Gas Cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
Is Open fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaking.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 191).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 252
Lamps
b Reverse The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

Lamp Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Reverse
Lamp Right
b Brake-/ The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message

Tail Lamp will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Practical hints
Brake-/
Tail Lamp
Right
b 3rd Brake The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This

Lamp message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Front The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Foglamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
or
Front
Foglamp
Right
b Marker The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Front Left possible.
or
Marker
Lamp
Front
Right
b Marker The rear left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Lamp Rear This message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped
Left working.
or X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Marker possible.
Lamp Rear
Right
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 253
b Parking The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A

Lamp, substitute bulb is being used.
Front X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 267).
Left
Auxiliary
Bulb On
or
Parking
Lamp,
Front
Right
Practical hints
Auxiliary
Bulb On
b High Beam The left or right high-beam lamp (halogen headlamps)/high-

Left beam flasher lamp (Bi-Xenon headlamps) is malfunctioning.
or X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 267).
High Beam
Right
b License The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Plate X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 267).
Lamp Left
or
License
Plate
Lamp Right
b AUTO- The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on

Light automatically.
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X In the control system, set daytime running lamp mode to
manual (Y page 106).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 71).
b Low Beam The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
or (Y page 267).
Low Beam X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Right
Benz Center as soon as possible.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 254
b Rear The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being

Foglamp used.
Auxiliary X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Bulb On possible.
b Switch You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Off Lights opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or Ã
(Y page 71).
b Switch The exterior lamp switch is set to Ã and you have forgotten
Practical hints
off to remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. The parking
lights or lamps remain switched on.
remove key X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
or
X Switch off the headlamps.
b Tail The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning. This message will
Lamp, only appear if all LEDs have stopped working. A substitute
Left bulb is being used.
Auxiliary X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Bulb On possible.
or
Tail
Lamp,
Right
Auxiliary
Bulb On
b Rear Left The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A
Turn substitute bulb is being used.
Signal X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Auxiliary possible.
Bulb On
or
Rear
Right
Turn
Signal
Auxiliary
Bulb On
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 255
b Turn The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Signal X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 267).
Front Left
or
Turn
Signal
Front
Right
b Left The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Mirror malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Turn stopped working.
Practical hints
Signal X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Right
Mirror
Turn
Signal
Tires
h Please The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
correct or
the tire The tire inflation pressure of the individual tires differ from
pressure. each other significantly.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 201).
h Tire At least one tire is deflating.

Pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Caution - steering and braking maneuvers.
Tire X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 273).
Defect
h Tire The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Pressure below the reference value.
Check X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Tires steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 256
256 What to do if …
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Practical hints
What to do if … When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in

the instrument cluster come on. The high-
Lamps in instrument cluster beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn
signal indicator lamps will only come on if
Notes
activated. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
If any of the following lamps in the instrument fails to come on when the ignition is switched
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- on, have it checked and replaced if necessary.
check when switching on the ignition, have
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
necessary.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 257
What to do if … 257
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

! The yellow ABS The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS
indicator lamp and the ESP® are also switched off.
comes on while The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
the engine is systems specified above available.
running.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Practical hints
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (Y page 236).
accident.
! The yellow ABS The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.
indicator lamp The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
comes on while When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
the engine is operational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.
running.
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
! The yellow ABS The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.
indicator lamp The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a
comes on while vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
the engine is
running.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 258

$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) Risk of accident!
The red brake warning X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
lamp comes on while soon as it is safe to do so.
Practical hints
the engine is running. X Engage the parking brake.

X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be

Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 259
Safety systems

7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passenger to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
6 seconds after
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the
starting the engine.
engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes X Fasten your seat belt.
Practical hints
on. In addition The warning chime stops sounding.
you hear a
warning chime
for a maximum
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt You and/or your passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
telltale comes belts.
on while the X Fasten your seat belts.
vehicle is The seat belt telltale goes out.
standing still
and the engine is There are items placed on the passenger seat and therefore the
running or while system senses the passenger seat as being occupied.
driving. X Remove the items from the passenger seat and put them in a
safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
telltale flashes and/or your passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts.
while driving. In X Fasten your seat belts.
addition, an The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
intermittent sounding.
warning chime
sounds with There are items placed on the passenger seat and therefore the
increasing system senses the passenger seat as being occupied.
intensity. X Remove the items from the passenger seat and put them in a
safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 260
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a door is
opened.

+ The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Practical hints
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® has been switched off.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while
When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
the engine is
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
running.
is spinning.
X Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 50).
X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
d The yellow ESP® The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while X
Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
the engine is
running.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 261

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® or the Electronic Traction System (ETS) has come into
warning lamp operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
driving. X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 50).

accident.
Practical hints
Vehicle

8 The yellow fuel The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
tank reserve X Refuel at the next gas station.
warning lamp After refueling you will see the message 1 Message in the
comes on when multifunction display.
the engine is X Press reset button . to confirm the message (Y page 92).
running.
In addition the
message
Reserve Fuel
appears in the
multifunction
display.
8 The yellow fuel The fuel cap is not closed properly.
tank reserve X Close the fuel cap.
warning lamp
comes on when
the engine is
running.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 262
Engine

! (USA only) There may be a malfunction in
; (Canada only) Rthe fuel management system
The yellow engine Rthe ignition system
malfunction indicator
Rthe emission control system
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. Rsystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Practical hints
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
Tires

h USA only: The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
Combination X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
low tire pressure braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
telltale/TPMS X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
malfunction (Y page 236).
telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
Advanced TPMS
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
illuminates
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
continuously.
h USA only: There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.
Combination X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
low tire pressure (Y page 236).
telltale/TPMS X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-
malfunction Benz Center.
telltale for the
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
Advanced TPMS
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
flashes 60
of driving.
seconds and
then stays
illuminated.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 263
G Warning! maintenance, and it is the driver’s

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), responsibility to maintain correct tire
should be checked at least once a month pressure, even if underinflation has not
when cold and inflated to the inflation reached the level to trigger illumination of the
pressure recommended by the vehicle TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
Information placard on the driver’s door B- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the the system is not operating properly. The
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
tires of a different size than the size indicated the low tire pressure telltale. When the
on the Tire and Loading Information placard system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should flash for approximately 1 minute and then
determine the proper tire inflation pressure remain continuously illuminated. This
Practical hints
for those tires. sequence will continue upon subsequent
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring exists. When the malfunction indicator is
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire illuminated, the system may not be able to
pressure telltale when one or more of your detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
tires are significantly underinflated. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure reasons, including the installation of
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check incompatible replacement or alternate tires
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a TPMS from functioning properly. Always
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
handling and stopping ability. Please note that continue to function properly.
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
Lamp in center console

04 The system is malfunctioning.
The passenger front air X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
bag off indicator lamp Mercedes-Benz Center.
illuminates and X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
remains illuminated follow corrective steps (Y page 236).
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
passenger seat.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 264
264 Unlocking/locking manually
G Warning! than a small individual on the passenger seat,

If the 04 indicator lamp do not have any passenger use the passenger
illuminates and remains illuminated with the seat until the system has been repaired.
weight of a typical adult or someone larger

04 The system is malfunctioning.
The passenger front air X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
bag off indicator lamp and check installation of the child seat.
does not illuminate X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
and/or does not seat are present.
remain illuminated with X
If the passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out,
Practical hints
the weight of a typical

have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
12-month-old child in a
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the
standard child restraint
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
or less on the
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
passenger seat.
follow corrective steps (Y page 236).
G Warning! Removing the mechanical key

If the 04 indicator lamp does not
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or less on the passenger seat, do not
transport a child on the passenger seat until
the system has been repaired.
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the X Move locking tab : in the direction of
SmartKey, unlock the driver’s door and the arrow.
trunk using the mechanical key. X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing.
The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when
you
Runlock the driver’s door or the trunk with
the mechanical key
and
Ropen the driver’s door or the trunk
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into
the starter switch.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 265
Unlocking/locking manually 265
Unlocking the driver’s door ! When you open the trunk, the trunk lid
swings open upwards. Always make sure
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
X Turn mechanical key = back and remove
it from the trunk lid lock.
Locking the vehicle

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey, lock it as follows:
X Open the driver’s door.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s X Close the passenger door and the trunk.
Practical hints
door lock. X Press the central locking switch
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise (Y page 59).
to position 1 until the locking knob moves X Check to see whether the locking knob on
up. the passenger door has moved down.
The driver’s door is unlocked. X If necessary, push it down manually.
X Pull the door handle to open the driver’s X Exit the vehicle and close the driver’s door.
door. X Remove the mechanical key from the
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
SmartKey (Y page 264).
it from the driver’s door lock. X Check whether the trunk is locked.
X If it is not locked, lock it with the
Unlocking the trunk mechanical key (Y page 61).
A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
(1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid. should now be locked.
X Insert mechanical key = into the trunk lid X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s
lock. door lock.
X Turn mechanical key = counterclockwise X Turn mechanical key ; clockwise to
to position 2 and simultaneously pull position 1.
handle : and lift trunk lid. The driver’s door is locked.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
it from the driver’s door lock.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 266
266 Replacing SmartKey batteries
i This procedure does not arm the anti- Opening/closing manually

theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
filler flap and the storage compartments. Raising retractable hardtop manually
G Warning!
Manually unlocking the gear selector If the retractable hardtop does not completely
lever open or close, the roof hydraulics will lose
pressure and the retractable hardtop is
If the vehicle’s electrical system is lowered
malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could Rafter approximately 7 minutes when the
remain locked in park position P. In this case ignition is switched on
the gear selector lever can be unlocked
Rafter approximately 15 seconds when the
manually, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
ignition is switched off
Practical hints
Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a

warning will sound. In the multifunction
display you will see K and the message
Retractable Roof Lowering.
Properly lock retractable hardtop before
continuing to drive.
G Warning!
Manually closing the retractable hardtop is a
complicated and technically demanding
procedure and should only be performed by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
! Do not use sharp objects to loosen the qualified technician.
gear selector lever cover in the center Attempting to manually close the retractable
console, as this could damage the gear hardtop may cause damage to the retractable
selector lever cover or the center console. hardtop and/or personal injury.
X Insert a flat, blunt object into the left edge G Warning!
of gear selector lever cover : at the
To prevent possible accidents, drive the
positions indicated by the arrows.
vehicle only with the retractable hardtop
X Loosen gear selector lever cover : using
either completely closed and locked, or fully
this object. lowered into its storage compartment.
X Pull gear selector lever cover : out and
remove.
X Simultaneously push down release ; and Replacing SmartKey batteries
move the gear selector lever out of park
position P. If the batteries in the SmartKey are
The gear selector lever is unlocked. discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
i The gear selector lever is locked again as have the batteries replaced at an authorized
soon as you move it back to park position Mercedes-Benz Center.
P.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 267
Replacing bulbs 267
G Warning! X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive opening until battery compartment
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out cover : opens. Do not keep the cover
of reach of children. shut.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
G Warning!
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
Practical hints
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
X Remove the battery compartment cover.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly. X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method hand until battery = falls out.
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or X Insert the new battery with the positive
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth.
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment
When inserting the batteries, make sure they cover into the housing and press the cover
are clean and free of lint. closed.
When replacing batteries, always replace X Check the operation of the SmartKey.
both batteries.
i The required replacement batteries are
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Replacing bulbs
Center.
Safety notes
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent. Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
X Remove the mechanical key from the
exterior lighting and signaling to a large
degree.
SmartKey (Y page 264).
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
headlamp adjustment.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 268
268 Replacing bulbs
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A i Since replacing bulbs is a technically

bulb can explode if you highly demanding process, we recommend
Rtouch
to have them replaced at an authorized
or move it when hot
Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch the bulb i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of high
Wear eye and hand protection. humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is the lights on should clear up the fogging.
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
Practical hints
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 269
Replacing bulbs 269
Bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Halogen headlamps Type
: Turn signal lamp: 3457A
; High-beam lamp: H7 55 W
= Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
? Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W
Practical hints
Bi-Xenon headlamps Type
: Turn signal lamp: 3457A
; High-beam flasher lamp: H7 55 W
= Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
License plate lamps Type

: License plate lamps: C 5 W
Notes on bulb replacement bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
described in this section. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 270
270 Replacing bulbs
G Observe Safety notes, see page 267. G Warning!

ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
with the specified watt rating. headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
to prevent short circuits. repair the lamp and its components. It is
recommended to have such work done by a
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when qualified technician.
handling bulbs.
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps
grease. only)
RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Practical hints
i Mercedes-Benz recommends using

Longlife (LL) bulbs.
Replacing bulbs for front lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
lamp, do the following:
A Bulb socket for low-beam headlamp
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
$. and remove it.
X Open the hood (Y page 192). X Turn bulb socket A with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket A.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
A.
X Place bulb socket A back into the housing
and turn it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb

: Housing cover for low beam (halogen (halogen headlamps only)/high-beam
headlamps only) flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon headlamps only)
Housing cover for Bi-Xenon headlamps.
X Turn bulb socket = with the bulb
Do not remove!
; Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket =.
= Bulb socket for high beam/high-beam
flasher lamp
? Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 271
Replacing wiper blades 271
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket License plate lamps
=.
X Place bulb socket = back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Front turn signal lamp bulb

X Turn bulb socket ; with the bulb
X Gently press onto the bulb and turn it
counterclockwise out of bulb socket ;.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb
socket ; and turn it clockwise until it X Switch off the ignition.
Practical hints
engages. X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
X Place bulb socket ; back into the housing $.
and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Open the trunk.
X Loosen screws : of lamp cover to be
Parking and standing lamp bulb removed.
X Turn bulb socket ? with the bulb X Remove lamp cover ;.
counterclockwise and remove it. X Replace the bulb.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ?. X Reinstall lamp cover ;.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb X Retighten screws :.
socket ?.
X Place bulb socket ? back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages. Replacing wiper blades
Safety notes
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps G Warning!
Tail lamp unit For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
Since replacing bulbs in the tail lamp unit is a before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
technically highly demanding process, we wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause
recommend to have them replaced at an injury.
G Warning!
Wiper blades are components that are subject
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
Otherwise the windshield will not be wiped
properly. As a result, you may not be able to
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
could cause an accident.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 272
272 Replacing wiper blades
! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper Removing wiper blades

arms should only be folded forward when
in the vertical position. ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
! Never open the hood when a wiper arm is
X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps
folded forward.
into place.
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield.
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
windshield glass without a wiper blade
inserted.
Practical hints
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

this work carried out at an authorized
X Press tabs ; together and tilt wiper

Placing wiper arms in vertical position
blade : in direction of arrow.
Tabs ; on both recesses of attachment
= are detached.
X Maintaining its tilted position, remove
wiper blade : out of attachment =.
Installing wiper blades
Wiper arms in vertical position

X Make sure the hood is fully closed.
position 1.
X Turn the combination switch to wiper
setting II.
X With wiper arms : in vertical position, turn
the SmartKey in the starter switch to X Maintaining a tilted position of the wiper
position 0. blade, move cover : onto attachment =
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
and slip guide tab ; into cover opening.
switch.
X Tilt the wiper blade in direction of the arrow
towards the wiper arm.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 273
Flat tire 273
X Simultaneously press tabs ? together and Preparing the vehicle

let the wiper blade engage into both
X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a
recesses of attachment =.
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,
X Check if the wiper blade is securely
flat surface.
fastened.
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
windshield.
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm
when folding it back.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
! Make sure the wiper blades are installed position P (manual transmission to 1st or
properly. Improperly installed wiper blades reverse gear R).
may cause windshield damage. X Turn off the engine.
Practical hints
Flat tire switch.

X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
Safety notes safe distance from the roadway. Open
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TIREFIT doors only when conditions are safe to do
kit or a spare wheel with collapsible tire. so.
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit do not have a spare
wheel.
For information on your vehicle’s equipment, Sealing tires with TIREFIT
see “Rims and tires” (Y page 297). This section applies to SLK 55 AMG with
Performance Package only.
G Warning!
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
Small tire punctures, particularly those in the
different from those of the road wheels. As a
tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
result, the vehicle handling characteristics TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures
change when driving with a spare wheel down to -4‡ (-20†).
mounted. Adapt your driving style G Warning!
accordingly.
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
The spare wheel is for temporary use only. cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
When driving with a spare wheel mounted, than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do damage caused by driving with extremely low
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or a
(80 km/h). damaged wheel.
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes- Do not drive the vehicle under such
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the circumstances.
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
wheel.
Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside
Never operate the vehicle with more than one Assistance.
spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 274
274 Flat tire
X Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails) i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
should not be removed from the tire. can then peel it off.
X Take the TIREFIT kit, the sticker, and the If clothing has come in contact with
electric air pump out of the TIREFIT, have it dry-cleaned with
trunk(Y page 234). perchloroethylene as soon as possible.
G Warning!
Observe safety instructions on air pump label.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of

two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
Practical hints
behind a flap.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and
Two-part sticker electrical plug are located at the bottom of
X Attach upper part : of the sticker where the pump housing.
it will be easily seen by the driver on the The following description applies to both
instrument cluster. versions. Differences in usage are expressly
X Attach lower part ; of the sticker to the declared.
damaged tire (close to the tire valve).
G Warning!
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT
to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.
TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or
absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye
and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
Version 1
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.
G Warning!
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.
Version 2
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 275
Flat tire 275
X Version 1 only: Open flap C on the i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire.
electric air pump. The pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi
X Pull plug ? and air hose A out of the pump (5 bar). This is normal and not an indication
housing. of a malfunction. Do not switch off the
X Screw the air pump’s air hose A onto
electric air pump.
flange B of TIREFIT container :. X Let the electric air pump inflate the tire for
X Stick TIREFIT container : upside down
approximately 5 minutes.
The pressure gauge must display at least
into notch ; of the electric air pump.
26 psi (1.8 bar).
G Warning!
The air hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
Practical hints
! Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than 6 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after
it has cooled off.
X Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged tire If the tire inflation pressure of at least
from tire valve E. 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained:
X Turn off the electric air pump by pressing
0 on electric air pump switch =.
X Detach filler hose D from tire valve E.
X Drive vehicle back or forth very slowly
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT
sealant material inside the tire.
X Inflate the tire again.
G Warning!
If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
Version 1
is not attained, the tire is too severely
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw F on damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire
pressure gauge G. repair.
X Screw filler hose D onto tire valve E. In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal the
X Insert electrical plug ? into the cigarette tire.
lighter socket (Y page 177) or a power Do not drive the vehicle.
outlet (Y page 177). Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
X
call Roadside Assistance.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
X Press I on electric air pump switch =.
The electric air pump is switched on and
inflates the tire.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 276
276 Flat tire
After attaining a tire inflation pressure of If the tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi
at least 26 psi (1.8 bar): (1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the tire to the
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch =. correct tire inflation pressure (see Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver’s
The electric air pump is switched off.
door B-pillar):
X Detach the TIREFIT kit from the tire valve.
G Warning!
The air hose may still be hot. Exercise proper
caution to avoid burning yourself when
detaching the electric air pump.
! Remaining TIREFIT sealant could escape

from the filler hose after it has been
Practical hints
detached from the tire valve. TIREFIT

sealant may cause stains.
Therefore, cover the filler hose, e.g. by Version 2
inserting it into the plastic bag the TIREFIT
X To increase tire inflation pressure:
kit was packed in.
Switch on the electric air pump.
X Drive off immediately. X To decrease tire inflation pressure:
Version 1: Open vent screw F on
G Warning!
pressure gauge G (Y page 275).
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to Version 2: Press yellow deflate button a
operate at higher speeds. located in air pump housing next to
The sticker must be attached on the
pressure gauge G.
instrument cluster where it will be easily seen G Observe Safety notes, see page 201.
by the driver. X Drive to the nearest qualified workshop,
Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFIT e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
repaired tire may change. Adapt your driving to have the damaged tire replaced.
accordingly. X Recommended duration of use: A
maximum of 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph
X After driving the vehicle for an initial (80 km/h) or below with the recommended
10 minutes, check the tire inflation tire inflation pressure.
pressure using pressure gauge.
G Warning! Center as soon as possible to obtain a new

If tire inflation pressure has fallen below TIREFIT kit.
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the X Bring used TIREFIT materials to an
vehicle. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
Park your vehicle safely away from the proper disposal.
roadway and contact the nearest authorized X Replace your TIREFIT container every
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside 4 years. Replacement containers are
Assistance. available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Have the damaged tire replaced. Center.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 277
Flat tire 277
Mounting the spare wheel vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
Introduction change.
X Prepare the vehicle as described Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
(Y page 273). supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
X Take the following out of the vehicle: away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Rspare wheel Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under the
Rjack
vehicle.
Rwheel wrench Always engage the parking brake firmly and
Rcollapsible wheel chock block the wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects before raising the vehicle
Rwheel bolts for spare wheel with the jack. Do not disengage the parking
Practical hints
Ralignment bolt brake while the vehicle is raised.
Relectric air pump Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
For information on where to find the
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
respective items, see “Where will I find ...?”
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
(Y page 234) and (Y page 235).
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
factory-equipped with the tools required for Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel not be able to achieve its load-bearing
change are specific to your vehicle. capacity if it is not at its full height.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Never start the engine when the vehicle is
Center to obtain the tools approved for raised.
your vehicle. This section describes the
Also observe the notes on the jack.
wheel change using the tools approved and
recommended for your vehicle. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
Lifting the vehicle sizeable objects.
G Warning! When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit
which has been specifically approved by (Y page 234). For information on setting up
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. the collapsible wheel chock, see
(Y page 234).
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built When changing a wheel on a level surface:
into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable
jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up object in front of and another wheel chock
bracket. The jack must always be vertical or other sizeable object behind the wheel
when in use, especially on inclines or that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
declines. being changed.
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle
briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 278
278 Flat tire
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on

a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a hill:
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side in front of both
wheels on the side opposite to the side on
which the wheel is to be changed.
G Warning!
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or X Place jack = on firm ground.
others. X Position jack = under take-up
Practical hints
bracket ; so that it is always vertical as

seen from the side, even if the vehicle is
parked on an incline.
X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do

not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with wheel
wrench :). X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = is
The jack take-up brackets are located directly fully seated in take-up bracket ; and the
behind the front wheel housings and in front jack base evenly meets the ground.
of the rear wheel housings. X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
G Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
Removing the wheel
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
take-up bracket.
If you do not position the jack correctly in the
jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off
the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or
others.
! Do not position the jack on the body of

the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 279
Flat tire 279
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt and

remove it.
X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt :.
X Remove the remaining bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.

This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
X Remove the wheel.
Wheel bolt : must be used for light alloy
Attaching the spare wheel rims. Wheel bolt ; must be used for the
Practical hints
spare wheel with collapsible tire. The wheel
G Warning! bolts for the spare wheel are located under a
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is plastic cover on the outside of the spare
properly attached. wheel rim.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
! Wheel bolts ; must be used when
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
mounting the spare wheel with collapsible
G Warning! tire. The use of any wheel bolts other than
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
wheel bolts ; for the spare wheel with
or rusted. collapsible tire will damage the vehicle’s
brakes.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be G Warning!
repaired immediately. Do not continue to Make sure to use the original length wheel
drive under these circumstances! Contact an bolts when remounting the original wheel
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call after it has been repaired.
Roadside Assistance.
X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. hub.
This could cause an accident. Make sure to ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
use the correct wheel bolts.
against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt.
G Warning!
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 280
280 Flat tire
X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment

bolt and push it on.
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Install the last wheel bolt and tighten it
slightly.
X Inflate the collapsible tire (Y page 280).
Inflating the collapsible tire

Version 1
G Warning!
Practical hints
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is

properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!
Observe safety instructions on air pump label.
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating

the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may
be damaged. Version 2
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of X Version 1 only: Open flap : on electric
two versions of the electric air pump: air pump.
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug
gauge and the electrical plug are located = and air hose with pressure gauge and
behind a flap. vent screw ?.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug = and
in the pump housing. The air hose and the air hose out of the pump housing
electrical plug are located at the bottom of bottom.
the pump housing. X Version 1 only: Close vent screw on air
The following description applies to both hose ?.
versions. Differences in usage are expressly X Remove the valve cap from the collapsible
declared. tire valve.
X Screw union nut A onto the collapsible tire
valve.
X Make sure air pump switch ; is set to 0.
X Insert electrical plug = into the cigarette
lighter socket (Y page 177) or a power
outlet (Y page 177).
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 281
Flat tire 281
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to G Observe Safety notes, see page 201.
position 1. X Detach the electric air pump.
X Press I on electric air pump switch ;.
X Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.
The electric air pump switches on and
X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug =
inflates the collapsible tire.
and air hose ? behind flap :.
X Inflate the collapsible tire to the
X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug =
recommended tire inflation pressure as
specified for your vehicle (Y page 300). and the air hose back into the pump
This should take approximately 5 minutes. housing bottom.
X Place the electric air pump back in its
G Warning! designated storage space.
The air hose and the union nut can become X Lower the vehicle.
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution
Practical hints
to avoid burning yourself when using the
Lowering the vehicle
equipment.
G Warning!
! Do not operate the electric air pump Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
longer than 6 minutes without interruption. properly attached.
Otherwise it may overheat. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
You may operate the air pump again after air pump before lowering the vehicle.
it has cooled off.
X Lower the vehicle by turning the crank
! Compare the recommended tire inflation counterclockwise until the vehicle is
pressure for your vehicle with the tire resting fully on its own weight.
inflation pressure on the yellow label X Remove the jack.
located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
label on the spare wheel rim differs from
the values given in this Operator’s Manual,
inflate the tire to the recommended tire
inflation pressure given on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim.
X Press 0 on electric air pump switch ;.
position 0.
X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressure
is above the recommended tire inflation X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
pressure as specified for your vehicle following the diagonal sequence illustrated
(Y page 300), decrease tire pressure using (: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe
the vent screw on air hose ?. a tightening torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressure
G Warning!
is above the recommended tire inflation
pressure as specified for your vehicle Have the tightening torque checked after
(Y page 300), decrease tire pressure using changing a wheel. The wheels could come
deflate button B.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 282
282 Battery
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of Battery acid is caustic. Do

80 lb-ft (110 Nm). not allow it to come into
contact with skin, eyes or
X Fully collapse the jack, with handle folded clothing.
in (storage position), see (Y page 235). Wear suitable protective
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools clothing, especially gloves,
in the designated storage space. apron and faceguard.
X If so equipped, wrap the damaged wheel in Wear eye protection.
the protective wrap provided with the Rinse any acid spills
vehicle tool kit and put the wheel in the immediately with clear
trunk. water. Contact a physician
The retractable hardtop must be closed. if necessary.
For information on storing the spare wheel
Practical hints
Keep children away.

after it has been replaced by a regular road
wheel, see (Y page 235).
Follow the instructions in
Battery this Operator’s Manual.
Safety notes
A battery should always be sufficiently A battery contains materials that can harm
charged in order to achieve its rated service the environment if disposed of improperly. A
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery large 12 V storage battery contains lead.
maintenance intervals. Recycling of the battery is the preferred
If you use your vehicle mostly for short- method of disposal. Many states (USA only)
distance trips, you will need to have the or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
battery charge checked more frequently. batteries to accept the old battery for
recycling.
When replacing a battery, always use a
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz. G Warning!
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions can result
for an extended period of time, contact an in severe injury or death.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about Never lean over batteries while connecting.
steps you need to observe. You might get injured.
G Warning! Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
Observe all safety instructions and allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
precautions when handling automotive skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
batteries. flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
Risk of explosion.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
Fire, open flames and improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking are prohibited smoking etc.
when handling batteries.
Avoid creating sparks.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 283
Jump starting 283
G Warning! i After battery power was interrupted, do

Do not place metal objects on the battery as the following:
this could result in a short circuit. RSet the clock (Y page 105).
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk RSynchronize the power windows
of acid burns in the event of an accident. (Y page 79).
Take care that you do not become statically
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you Charging the battery
also should not pull or push the battery over
carpets or other synthetic materials. G Warning!
Never touch the battery first. First touch the Never charge a battery while still installed in
outside body of the vehicle in order to release the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
Practical hints
any possible electrostatic charges.
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The being used. Gases may escape during
battery could explode if touched due to charging and could cause an explosion that
electrostatic charge or due to spark may result in personal injury, paint damage or
formation. corrosion.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
! As any other battery, the battery may adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
discharge if you do not operate the vehicle tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
for an extended period of time. Have the available. It permits the charging of the
battery disconnected at a qualified battery in its installed position. Contact an
workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
Center in such a case. You may also information and availability.
connect an accessory battery charge unit Charge battery in accordance with the
expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for separate instructions for the accessory
your vehicle model to maintain the battery battery charger.
charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Have the battery charged at an authorized
Benz Center for further information.
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
The battery, the battery ventilation hose battery yourself, follow the operating
and the lateral plug must always be instructions for your charging device.
securely installed when the vehicle is in
Only use a battery charge unit with a
operation.
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal X Charge battery in accordance with the
clamps while the engine is running or the instructions of the battery charger
SmartKey is in the starter switch. manufacturer.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely
damaged. Jump starting
Have the battery checked regularly at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G Warning!
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for Failure to follow these directions will cause
maintenance intervals or contact an damage to the electronic components, and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 284
284 Jump starting
can lead to a battery explosion and severe If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
injury or death. started with jumper cables and the fully
Never lean over batteries while connecting or charged battery of another vehicle or an
jump starting. You might get injured. equivalent starter pack. Observe the
following:
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, RAccess to the battery is not possible on all
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
flush affected area with water, and seek of the other vehicle, provide jump start
medical help if necessary. power by an external battery or starter
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, pack.
which is flammable and explosive. Keep RJump starting should only be performed
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid when the engine and catalytic converter
improper connection of jumper cables, are cold.
Practical hints
smoking, etc. RDo not jump start the engine or charge the
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can battery if the battery is frozen. Let the
result in it exploding, causing personal injury. battery thaw out first.
Read all instructions before proceeding. ROnly jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
! Vehicles with automatic transmission: with a more powerful battery could damage
Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could the vehicle’s electrical system. Such
otherwise seriously damage the automatic damage will not be covered by the
transmission which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
! Jump starting should only be performed cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
using the jump-start terminals located in
the engine compartment. RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
attempts. that move when an engine is started or
running.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick-charge unit. RShould the battery be drained completely,
If the engine does not run after several let the donating power source charge the
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it vehicle for several minutes before
checked at the nearest authorized reattempting the starting process.
Mercedes-Benz Center. The jump-start contacts are located in the
Excessive unburned fuel generated by engine compartment on the passenger side.
repeated failed starting attempts may X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
damage the catalytic converter and may X Switch off all electrical consumers.
present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation.
park position P (manual transmission to
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch Neutral).
any other metal part while the other end is
X Open the hood (Y page 192).
still attached to a battery.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 285
Towing the vehicle 285
Practical hints
Position B represents the charged battery of X Remove the jumper cables from positive
another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. terminals ; and =.
X Flip up cover : of positive terminal =. You can now switch on the headlamps.
X Close cover : of positive terminal =.
! Never invert the terminal connections! X Have the battery checked at the nearest
X Connect positive terminal ; of charged authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
battery B with positive terminal = with a
jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive
terminal ; of charged battery B first. Towing the vehicle
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged Safety notes
battery B and run at idle speed.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
X Connect negative terminal ? of charged
be transported with all wheels off the ground
battery B with negative terminal A with using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to equipment. This method is preferable to other
negative terminal ? of charged battery types of towing.
B first.
! To prevent damage during transport, do
X Start engine of the vehicle with the
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
discharged battery and run at idle speed.
suspension parts.
You can now turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not switch on the If circumstances do not permit the
headlamps under any circumstances. recommended towing methods, the vehicle
X Remove the jumper cables from negative may be towed with all wheels on the ground
terminals ? and A first. or one axle raised only so far as necessary to
have the vehicle moved to a safe location
where the recommended towing methods
can be employed.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 286
286 Towing the vehicle
X Switch off the tow-away alarm before For more information see “Battery”
towing the vehicle with all wheels on the (Y page 282) or “Jump starting”
ground or one axle raised (Y page 52). (Y page 283).
Vehicles with automatic transmission: For
! Before towing the vehicle observe the
information on manually unlocking the gear
following instructions:
selector lever, see (Y page 266).
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
otherwise seriously damage the Installing towing eye bolt
automatic transmission which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Depending on whether you are towing a
Warranty. vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
RDo not tow with sling-type equipment. which are located behind covers on each
Practical hints
Towing with sling-type equipment over bumper.

bumpy roads will damage radiator and The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
supports. vehicle tool kit, located in the compartment
RTowing of the vehicle should only be underneath the trunk floor (Y page 234).
done using the properly installed towing X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk.
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts. Removing cover in front bumper
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or

diagonally, since it could result in damage
to the chassis alignment. X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
arrow.
! Do not use the towing eye bolt for
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
recovery, as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. for the towing eye bolt.
i If the battery is disconnected or Removing cover in rear bumper

discharged
Rthe
G Warning!
SmartKey will not turn in the starter
switch In order to avoid possible serious burns or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
RVehicles with automatic transmission: the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe
the automatic transmission will remain in is extremely hot.
park position P
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 287
Towing the vehicle 287
Removing towing eye bolt

X Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it
counterclockwise.
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.
X Reinstalling cover: Fit cover :
(Y page 286) and snap it into place.
X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel
wrench back into the vehicle tool kit.
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the

Towing with front axle raised
arrow.
Practical hints
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole ! The vehicle may be towed only for
for the towing eye bolt. distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Fixing towing eye bolt X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift
the manual transmission into the neutral
position (no gear selected).
or
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift
the automatic transmission into neutral
position N.
Example illustration front bumper X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Switch off the automatic central locking
X Take the towing eye bolt and, if so
equipped, the wheel wrench from the (Y page 108).
vehicle tool kit (Y page 234). X Switch off the ignition and leave the
X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into SmartKey in the starter switch.
threaded hole to its stop. X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and

(Y page 74).
tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it ! Because the ESP® operates
clockwise. automatically, the engine and ignition must
or be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel position 0 or 1) when the vehicle is being
wrench, use a suitable object to turn the towed with the front axle raised.
towing eye bolt. Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 288
288 Fuses
Towing with all wheels on the ground ! The vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
G Warning! speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow with i While being towed with the hazard
a tow bar if: warning flasher in use, use the combination
Rthe
switch in the usual manner to signal turns.
engine will not run
Only the selected turn signal will operate.
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply warning flasher will operate again.
or in the vehicle’s electrical system
This is necessary to adequately control the
Fuses
towed vehicle.
Practical hints
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on Introduction

the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
starter switch position 2. switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch If a fuse is blown, the components and
position 0 for an extended period of time, it systems secured by that fuse will stop
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this operating.
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
remove SmartKey from starter switch and G Warning!
reinsert. Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system in
G Warning! question and do not attempt to repair or
With the engine not running, there is no power bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
assistance for the brake and steering approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
systems. In this case, it is important to keep fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
in mind that a considerably higher degree of and/or cause damage to electrical
effort is necessary to brake and steer the components and/or systems. Have the cause
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. determined and remedied by an authorized
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the A blown fuse must be replaced by an
brake pedal and keep it pressed. appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift
the amperage recommended in the fuse
the manual transmission into the neutral chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
position (no gear selected). to advise you on this subject.
or
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-
the automatic transmission into neutral
Benz Center.
position N.
X Release the brake pedal. If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
cause determined and rectified by an
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
The fuse chart is located in the fuse box in the
(Y page 74).
passenger compartment. The fuse chart
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 289
Fuses 289
explains the fuse allocation and fuse moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
amperages. and possibly impair fuse operation.
Before replacing fuses Fuse box in engine compartment

X Engage the parking brake. X Open the hood.
park position P (manual transmission to
Neutral).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Practical hints
switch.
Fuse box in passenger compartment

! Do not use sharp objects such as a X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in fuse box cover :.
the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
X Opening: Release clamps ;.
box cover or the dashboard.
X Remove fuse box cover =.
X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is

positioned properly.
X Press fuse box cover = down and secure
with clamps ;.
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
X Open the driver’s door. fuses.
X Opening: Insert flat, blunt object as a lever
in recess on the edge of cover : at the
position indicated by the arrow.
X Loosen fuse box cover : from the
dashboard using the lever.
X Closing: Hook fuse box cover : into the
opening at the front.
X Press fuse box cover : back on until it
engages.
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described. Otherwise,
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 290
290
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 291
291

Parts service ..................................... 292
Warranty coverage ........................... 292
Identification labels .......................... 292
Vehicle specification SLK 300
(171.454) ........................................... 294
Vehicle specification SLK 350
(171.458) ........................................... 295
Vehicle specification SLK 55 AMG
(171.473) ........................................... 296
Rims and tires ................................... 297
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 300
Technical data
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 292
292 Identification labels
Vehicle equipment RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission System Warranty
i This Operator’s Manual describes all REmission Performance Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
purchase. Please be aware that your Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
features described in this manual. Control Systems Warranty
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Parts service
Replacement parts and accessories are
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Parts required for maintenance and repair available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
work. In addition, strategically located parts Center.
Technical data
distribution centers provide quick and

reliable parts service.
Loss of Service and Warranty
More than 300 000 different parts for Information booklet
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Should you lose your Service and Warranty
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has Information booklet, have an authorized
been specifically developed, manufactured or Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz replacement. It will be mailed to you.
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
Identification labels
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 293
Identification labels 293
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can specific to each vehicle and may vary from
be found data shown in the illustration. Refer to
Ron certification label : on the driver’s door certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
B-pillar
Rembossed on the center tunnel behind the
passenger seat (Y page 293)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 293)
Technical data
X Move the passenger seat forward as far as
possible (Y page 63).
X Fold cover ? upward.
VIN A is now visible.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
; VIN
= Paintwork code
B Engine number (engraved on engine)

C VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
D Emission control information label,
Example certification label (Canada vehicles) includes both federal and California
; VIN certification exhaust emission standards
= Paintwork code i When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine number.
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 294
294 Vehicle specification SLK 300 (171.454)
Vehicle specification SLK 300 Electrical system SLK 300

(171.454)
Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33
The quoted data apply only to the standard Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- electrode gap
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment. Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Engine SLK 300
Engine, type 272
Main dimensions SLK 300
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
Overall vehicle 161.7 in (4 107 mm)
gasoline injection
length
No. of cylinders 6
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm) width18
Technical data
Stroke 3.23 in (82.10 mm) Overall vehicle 51.0 in (1 296 mm)

height
Total piston 182.8 cu in 60.8 in (1 545 mm)19
displacement (2 996 cm3)
Wheelbase 95.7 in (2 430 mm)
Compression 11.3:1
Track, front 60.2 in (1 530 mm)
ratio
Track, rear 61.0 in (1 549 mm)
Output acc. to 228 hp/6 100 rpm
SAE J 134917 (170 kW/6 100 rpm) Turning circle 34.5 ft (10.5 m)
Maximum torque 221 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 500 - 5 000 rpm Weights SLK 300
(300 Nm/
2 500 - 5 000 rpm) Roof load max. 110 lb (50 kg)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
speed
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 ! This vehicle is not designed to carry items
Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm devices, unless expressly approved by
Mercedes-Benz for use on this vehicle
Electrical system SLK 300 model, must not be used as they will
damage the vehicle and retractable
Alternator 14 V/150 A hardtop.
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does
not offer any roof racks or any other roof-
Battery 12 V/74 Ah mounted devices for use on this vehicle.
17 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
18 Exterior
rear view mirrors folded out.
19 When opening/closing hardtop.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 295
Vehicle specification SLK 350 (171.458) 295
! This vehicle is not designed to carry any Electrical system SLK 350
items on its trunk lid or accommodate any
type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such Alternator 14 V/180 A
devices may damage the vehicle and
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
Battery 12 V/74 Ah
Vehicle specification SLK 350 Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33

(171.458) Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
electrode gap
The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
special bodies and special equipment.
Engine SLK 350 Main dimensions SLK 350
Technical data
Engine, type 272 Overall vehicle 161.7 in (4 107 mm)
length
gasoline injection Overall vehicle 79.2 in (2 012 mm)
width21
No. of cylinders 6
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
height
60.8 in (1 545 mm)22
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Total piston 213.5 cu in
displacement (3 498 cm3) Track, front 60.1 in (1 526 mm)
Compression 11.7:1 Track, rear 61.0 in (1 549 mm)
ratio
Turning circle 34.5 ft (10.5 m)
SAE J 134920 (224 kW/6 500 rpm)
Weights SLK 350
Maximum torque 266 lb-ft/4 900 rpm
acc. to SAE J 1349 (360 Nm/4 900 rpm) Roof load max. 110 lb (50 kg)
Maximum engine 7 200 rpm Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
speed
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 ! This vehicle is not designed to carry items
Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm devices, unless expressly approved by
Mercedes-Benz for use on this vehicle
model, must not be used as they will
21 Exterior
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 296
296 Vehicle specification SLK 55 AMG (171.473)
damage the vehicle and retractable Engine SLK 55 AMG

hardtop.
At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
not offer any roof racks or any other roof- Poly-V-belt 2 380 mm
mounted devices for use on this vehicle.
! This vehicle is not designed to carry any Electrical system SLK 55 AMG
items on its trunk lid or accommodate any
type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such Alternator 14 V/150 A
devices may damage the vehicle and Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/74 Ah
Spark plugs, type NGK IFR 6D10
Vehicle specification SLK 55 AMG
(171.473) Spark plugs, 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
electrode gap
Technical data
The quoted data apply only to the standard

vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Spark plugs, 18 - 22 lb-ft
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all tightening torque (25 - 30 Nm)
special bodies and special equipment.
Engine SLK 55 AMG Main dimensions SLK 55 AMG
Engine, type 113 Overall vehicle 161.5 in (4 103 mm)

length
gasoline injection Overall vehicle 79.2 in (2 012 mm)
width24
No. of cylinders 8
Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm) height
60.4 in (1 535 mm)25
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston 331.9 cu in
displacement (5 439 cm3) Track, front 60.0 in (1 524 mm)
Compression 11.0:1 Track, rear 61.0 in (1 549 mm)
ratio
Turning circle 34.5 ft (10.5 m)
SAE J 134923 (265 kW/5 750 rpm)
Weights SLK 55 AMG
Maximum torque 376 lb-ft/4 000 rpm
Roof load max. 110 lb (50 kg)
acc. to SAE J 1349 (510 Nm/4 000 rpm)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
speed
24 Exterior
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 297
Rims and tires 297
! This vehicle is not designed to carry items Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
on its roof. Roof rails and any roof-mounted Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
devices, unless expressly approved by dimensional variations and different tire
Mercedes-Benz for use on this vehicle deformation characteristics that could
model, must not be used as they will cause them to come into contact with the
damage the vehicle and retractable vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the
hardtop. tires or the vehicle may be the result.
At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does
not offer any roof racks or any other roof- i Further information on tires and rims is
mounted devices for use on this vehicle. available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. The Tire and Loading Information
! This vehicle is not designed to carry any placard with the recommended tire
items on its trunk lid or accommodate any inflation pressures for cold tires is located
type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such on the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplemental
devices may damage the vehicle and tire inflation pressure information for
retractable hardtop mechanism. driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads
Technical data
less than the maximum loaded vehicle
condition can be found on the tire inflation
Rims and tires pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
Notes flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
! Only use tires which have been tested and checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
manufacturer’s maintenance
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
recommendation included with the vehicle.
to provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety systems For information on recommended tire
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the inflation pressure and supplemental tire
ESP®. Tires specially developed for your inflation pressure information for special
vehicle and tested and approved by driving situations, see (Y page 198).
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must
the following on the tire’s sidewall: be equipped
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Rwith wheels of identical dimensions on
equipment tires
each axle (left and right)
Using tires other than those approved by Rwith tires of identical characteristics all
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires, or
all-season tires etc.
Limited Warranty.
! Using tires other than those approved by i The following pages also list the approved
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle
effects, such as with winter tires. Winter tires are not
Rpoor handling characteristics
available as standard or optional factory
equipment, but can be purchased from an
Rincreased noise authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rincreased fuel consumption Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
approved for your vehicle model may
require the purchase of rims of the
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 298
298 Rims and tires
recommended size for use with these equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
winter tires. This depends on vehicle model your vehicle. For more information contact
and the standard or optional factory- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Same size tires
SLK 300
16" Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2
wheels Wheel offset 1.34 in (34 mm)
Winter tires26,27 205/55 R16 91H M+Si
SLK 300 SLK 55 AMG

SLK 300 (Sport Package)
Technical data
SLK 350
SLK 350 (Sport Package)
17" Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 —
AMG rims (light alloy) — 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset 1.46 in (37 mm)
Winter tires26,27 225/45 R17 91H M+Si 205/50 R17 89H
M+Si28
Winter tires26,27 — 225/45 R17 91H
M+Si28
SLK 55 AMG
SLK 55 AMG (Performance Package)
18" AMG rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires26,27,28 225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
26 Radial-plytires.
27 Not available as factory equipment.
28 For use with snow chains, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 299
Rims and tires 299
Mixed size tires
SLK 30029
16" Front axle Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2
Summer tires30 205/55 R16 91W
Rear axle Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 16 H2
Summer tires30,31 225/50 R16 92W
SLK 30032
SLK 300 (Sport Package)29
Technical data
SLK 35032
17" Front axle Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2
Summer tires30 225/45 R17 91W
Rear axle Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 17 H2
Summer tires30,31 245/40 R17 91W
SLK 300 (AMG Sport Package)32

SLK 35029
SLK 350 (AMG Sport Package)32
SLK 55 AMG
SLK 55 AMG (Performance Package)
18" Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 18 H2
Summer tires30 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
Summer tires30,31 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)
29 Canada only.
30 Radial-plytires.
31 Must not be used with snow chains.
32 USA only.
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 300
300 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
i The SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package does not have a spare wheel. The SLK 55 AMG
with Performance Package is equipped with TIREFIT (Y page 273).
All models
(except SLK 55 AMG with Performance Package)
Technical data
Rim 4.5 B x 17 H2
Collapsible tire33 145/70-17 92P
Recommended tire inflation 51 psi (3.5 bar)
pressure
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
33 Must not be used with snow chains.

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 301
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 301
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil All models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine
filter oils
Manual SLK 300 1.6 US qt (1.5 l) MB Manual
transmission SLK 350 Transmission Fluid
Automatic SLK 300 9.8 US qt (9.3 l) MB Automatic

transmission SLK 350 Transmission Fluid
SLK 55 AMG 9.2 US qt (8.7 l)

Rear axle SLK 300 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Hypoid Gear Oil
(SAE 85W-90)
SLK 350 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
Technical data
SLK 55 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fuchs Titan
EG 5010 D
Power steering All models aprrox. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering
Fluid (Chevron
Texaco PSF 9109)
Brake system All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling system SLK 300 approx. 10.4 US qt (9.8 l) MB 325.0
SLK 350 Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze
SLK 55 AMG approx. 11.7 US qt (11.1 l)
Fuel tank All models 18.5 US gal (70.0 l) Premium unleaded
gasoline (Minimum
Fuel tank SLK 300 approx. 2.4 US gal (9.0 l) Posted Octane 91
reserve SLK 350 [Avg. of
SLK 55 AMG approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l) 96 RON/86 MON])
Air All models — R134a refrigerant
conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 302
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Hydraulic All models 0.2 US qt (0.195 l) MB Hydraulic Oil
system for
retractable
hardtop
Washer system All models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield
and headlamp Washer
cleaning Concentrate34
system (Y page 306)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 306)
Technical data
Approved engine oils Use the table below to determine the

MB sheet number.
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for our Model Engine, MB sheet
service intervals. Therefore, only use type number
approved engine oils and oil filters required
SLK 300 272 229.5
for vehicles with the Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil SLK 350 272 229.5
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
SLK 55 AMG 113 229.5
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a
specification other than those expressly i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
required for the Maintenance System, or outside of oil containers.
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by the Viscosity grades for engine oils
Maintenance System will result in engine or Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
emission control system damage not according to the lowest air temperature
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited expected before the next oil change.
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
recommendations for scheduled oil
changes. Failure to do so will result in
engine or emission control system damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
34 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 303
Engine oil additives Never allow sparks, flames or smoking

materials near gasoline!
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
They may damage the engine. Damage or
malfunctions resulting from blending oil Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
additives are not covered by the Mercedes- inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
Benz Limited Warranty. contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
Air conditioning refrigerant health.
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning ! To maintain the engine’s durability and
system. performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used.
! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based If premium unleaded gasoline is not
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the available and low octane gasoline is used,
Technical data
system will occur. follow these precautions:
RHave the fuel tank only partially filled
Brake fluid with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
G Warning! as possible.
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt
the brake fluid is continuously reduced acceleration.
through the absorption of moisture from the
RDo not exceed an engine speed of
atmosphere.
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
Under extremely strenuous operating
light load such as two persons and no
conditions, this moisture content can lead to
luggage.
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus
reducing the system’s efficiency. RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance is fully loaded or operating in
Booklet for replacement interval. mountainous terrain.
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz

is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes- Fuel requirements
Benz Center will provide you with additional
information. Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
Premium unleaded gasoline Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
G Warning! known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
It burns violently and can cause serious unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
personal injury. such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 304
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not ! Damage or malfunction resulting from

exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. poor fuel quality or from blending additional
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not fuel additives other than those tested and
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be or Extended Limited Warranties.
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
Coolants
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
RCorrosion protection
Gasoline additives
RFreeze protection
A major concern among engine
Technical data
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling

manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only point)
the use of quality gasoline containing The cooling system was filled at the factory
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon with a coolant providing freeze protection to
deposits. approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
After an extended period of using fuels protection.
without such additives carbon deposits can ! Add premixed coolant solution only.
build up, especially on the intake valves and Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
in the combustion area, leading to engine Antifreeze separately from each other,
performance problems such as: could cause engine damage not covered by
RWarm-up hesitation the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RUnstable idle If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
RKnocking/pinging
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
pressurized cooling system is reached at
RMisfire approximately 266‡ (130†).
RPower loss The coolant solution must be used year round
In areas where carbon deposits may be to provide the necessary corrosion protection
encountered due to lack of availability of and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
gasoline which contains these additives, the the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is interval.
recommended. Coolant system design and coolant used
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center determine the replacement interval. The
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a replacement interval published in the
listing of approved products. Follow Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
directions on the product label. MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
of equal specification are used to renew the
This only results in unnecessary cost and may
coolant concentration or bring it back up to
be harmful to the engine operation.
the proper level.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 305
For information on other Mercedes-Benz If you are not sure about the water quality,
approved products of equal specification, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Center.
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To provide important corrosion protection, Anticorrosion/antifreeze
the solution must be at least 50% Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to parts. The use of aluminum components in
freeze protection to approximately -35‡ motor vehicle engines necessitates that
[-37†]). anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
If you use a solution that is more than 55% such engines be specifically formulated to
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
temperature will increase due to the lower result in a significantly shortened service life.
heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, the following product is strongly
Therefore, do not use more than this amount recommended for use in your vehicle:
of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Technical data
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 Before the start of the winter season (or once
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to a year in hot southern regions), you should
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
system checked for signs of leakage). Please concentration checked.
make sure the mixture is in accordance with
label instructions. The coolant is also regularly checked each
time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
The water in the cooling system must meet Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water.
Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system SLK 300 5.2 US qt (4.9 l) 5.7 US qt (5.4 l)
SLK 350
SLK 55 AMG 5.9 US qt (5.55 l) 6.5 US qt (6.1 l)
Z
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 306
Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
Technical data
X Mix with commercially available premixed

washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 307
307
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 308
308
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 309
Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
We reserve the right to make changes in

design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time May 13, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 310
É1715842796]ËÍ
1715842796
Order no. 6515 3297 13 Part no. 171 584 27 96 Edition A 2010

2010 SLK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 SLK

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 SLK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

171_AKB; 3; 60, en-US 2009-05-11T16:00:23+02:00 - Seite 1

d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Symbols YY This continuation symbol marks a

! Highlights hazards that may result in

i Helpful hints or further information you

Our company and staff congratulate you on

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 23

Introduction ......................................... 18 Safety and security ............................. 31

Controls in detail ................................. 55

Operation ........................................... 189

Practical hints ................................... 233

Technical data ................................... 291

1, 2, 3 ... Air volume .......................................... 168

Automatic locking when driving ...... 108 Brake fluid

Clear button ....................................... 116 Coolant

Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 209 E

Consumption ................................. 193 Front air bags

Glove box ........................................... 174 I

Unlocking/locking manually .......... 264 Low tire pressure/TPMS

Maximum engine speed License plate lamps ....................... 253

Occupant safety Passenger front air bag ...................... 35

Rear lamps Satellite radio .................................... 125

SmartKey Fuel requirements .......................... 303

Indicator lamps ................................ 26 Vehicle status message memory .... 101

Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 232

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Important notice for California retail Maintenance

contacting you in a timely manner should the Operating safety

Proper use of the vehicle Reporting safety defects

This information helps, for example, to

Exterior view ....................................... 24

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel 27

Function Page Multifunction steering wheel

1 Function only available in telephone menu.

Function Page Center console

Function Page Lower part

30 Door control panel

Overhead control panel Door control panel

Function Page Function Page

Vehicle equipment .............................. 32

Safety and security

Vehicle equipment Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices

i See “Children in the vehicle”

Safety and security

bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful steering wheel or dashboard.

thorax air bag be deployed. Always sit as authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an

weight of the child. (1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in

installed or supplied by an authorized RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

Safety and security

Rindependently of the front air bags the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Safety and security

the passenger front air bag is activated. child.

size and weight of the child, and secure G Warning!

Safety and security

belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit

Safety and security

the seat belts. special seat belt retractor to secure child